Home

XMap User Guide

1. sessssersrrererrrrererrrrrrerrrrerrrrne 55 Managing Datlaesa E E E A EAA 56 Managing Projects scare a a a a a E A ean 59 USING ronson PUCSayenpunsua nessa saad E A a ER 62 Changing the Properties of YOUr Data erionenn ee E Ea 66 WORKING WIN GI erate taara raar e eare re iioa 75 GIS OVEPVIEW oostrrdacer eiei aaa o r Ana i eetaenteniennt 75 Handling Disconnected or Deleted LayerS essrrsrererrerererrersrrrrerrrrrrererrrrerrrrerrrrne 76 GIS ODUONS aaea aae a o e a aia teu valent rellys ines 76 ushMoLayers in a SUBSCriptON oerna a a Ae NA 78 REGIIAING cenaren a a prea a a E S 80 SONN A a a e a E N a E S 82 BUIK IMpOruinG and EX DOr ms ccusacscriws sive seeeoceee eeerind mn Sudent seer MeeroieeheradeRooneare ingest 83 Managing Layers in Your WorkSpace ccc cece cece cece cee ences eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseageeeeennnegs 90 Classifying Symbolizing and Labeling a Layer cece cece cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 117 Attributes Datasheet VICW c cece cece ecceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeteeeggaeeeeeeenengs 131 XMap User Guide ALUMDULES DESION VIEW rieron reana cosine da EEE tienen eran een A aid poulaenues eons 138 OMS re at tesa ot Aad tia tidc ot terion roe abe oue Soin au nie Recta hieel al ean nn tet EON 150 QUC cian Geis cumanea essere ie ia oot Beer Seed eae eta oe ee San noua bane tae eds 156 Reordering Layer het Anis tier attaatieds E A a a a 162 PAND oriniai a r a a a aa a a a A 165
2. Find Modify a Find search result Right click a result item in the Find tab to add it as a MapNote insert it as a stop in your route copy the information to your clipboard and so on Find a custom point of You can use the Custom option to find other categories interest Such as a Chinese besides those listed or to find multiple categories at once restaurant when performing a GPS radar search in Find GPS If you want to View a GPS log on the map Use the Draw tab to import a GPS log file and view it as a line object on the map XMap User Guide Handheld Export Modify the export area in When you click Preview the default export area for the Handheld Export location you selected displays on the map as shaded rectangles Click Select to confirm the area To edit the area click the Select Edit tool and then click the map to add or remove rectangles to from the export area Info Quickly view information Hover your cursor over objects on the map to see for a location on the map information Such as road names city town details about draw objects etc in the status line that appears at the bottom of the map just above the tab area Map Data Learn how to add route Add existing route and or draw files to your project by and or draw layers to your clicking the Add button and selecting the Draw File or project Route File option Measurement Tool Measure the men area perimeter of a
3. 1 select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options You can also select a different font style size and color for the waypoint name 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box opens 3 Optional Click the Hyperlink button ai and browse to the document you want to link your point object to Then click the file name and click Open The address appears in the URL field 4 Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes 5 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Add an image From the Draw tab 1 Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select Image Under Images select an existing image or click Add browse to an image and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection Note To delete an image from the Images selection select the image and then click Delete Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box opens Optional Click the Hyperlink button al and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to The address appears in the URL field Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
4. 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit on the toolbar to match shape points in a polygon line to 2 on the toolbar 3 Move your cursor over the object polygon or line on the map A box displays around each object as you hover over it and click the object you want to edit Shape points small white squares indicate the edges of the object 4 Click the first point you want for an anchor point A pink box appears around each anchor point once it is selected 5 Click the second anchor point 6 Click the object you want to match to select it 7 Click the point on the second object to create an anchor point to match with the first anchor point on the first object If you need to reverse the anchor point selection order on the first object right click it and click Switch Anchor Points 2 Click the Edge Matching tool a 111 XMap User Guide 8 Move the cursor over the point on the second object that you want to match with the second anchor point on the first object The edge that will be matched is highlighted blue If you create a self intersecting Shape the edge is highlighted pink 9 Click the second anchor point on the second object The edges on the two objects are matched Two polygons with matched Hovering over second anchor Matching second anchor point edges point on second object step 9 step 8 Notes To return to the default map mode
5. 16 Tips Getting Started Press ALT PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom level Press ALT PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full data zoom level Use the mouse wheel to zoom the map in and out Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while rotating the mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level Panning Centering the Map Use any of the following methods to pan move or center the map Click anywhere on the map The point you click becomes the new map center Double click a layer name in the GIS workspace When you point near the map edge a white hand displays Drag the hand to move the map in that direction With your cursor anywhere on the map press the CTRL key on your keyboard the cursor becomes a white hand Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to a new location Click the Map Panning button on the toolbar to drag pan the 2 D or 3 D map in any direction Click anywhere on the overview map The point you click becomes the new map center This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the main map Point anywhere on the black view box in the overview map window When the armi OF a a WASHINGTON charlotte Use the search features on the Find tab to center the map on a particular location Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up down left or righ
6. Color DOGA Aerial x imagery a Down ownload ss Color DOO consists of 1 meter color imagery for use with your DeLorme software andlor PH Series GPS receiver Click the Image to see available coverage Step 3 Name your selection and process the order On the next screen type a name for your selection This is the name you want for your map file Then click Process Order 315 XMap User Guide T Selections List Step 4 Download your imagery or data You will be notified by email when the download is ready You can also check the download progress on the Downloads subtab When your file is ready go to the Downloads subtab and download your map files Note For each selection a map file for your PN Series GPS device is saved to the DeLorme Docs Mobile Maps folder on your computer and a map file for use in the desktop mapping program is saved to the DeLorme Docs Downloads folder Step 5 Sync the project with your PN Series GPS 1 Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable If syncing with an SD card you can insert the card in the device or use an SD card reader e 2 Click the Sync button on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box 3 To verify your downloaded map is ready to sync on the left side of the dialog click Project Contents Then click Map Packages You can view the maps you already have on the device on the right side of the dialog 316 Using DeLorme PN Serie
7. Draw File Management Creating a New Draw File Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 There are five different types of draw files e DrawLayer Created when you add a line arc spline circle rectangle polygon symbol MapNote or text label to the map e RoadLayer Created when you add a routable road e TrailLayer Created when you add a routable trail to the map e WaypointLayer Created when you add a waypoint to the map e TrackLayer Created when you add a track to the map A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and there are no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current project You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area To Create a New Draw File Use the following steps to create a new draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area A selected check box next to the draw file s name in the file list indicates the file is displaying on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all roadiayer files are grouped together in the list all drawlayer files are grouped together and so on 3 Click New and then click Draw Road Trail Waypoint or Track The new file is now the active draw file
8. e The toggle on the project side indicates where you are sending the file to select GPS for the device s internal drive Select SD for an SD card in the device e The toggle on the GPS side allows you to move a file layer or map For example if you have a waypoint file on your device s internal drive you might want to move it to the SD card e fan option is grayed out it is unavailable for that data View Available Memory The Memory Preview area shows the approximate amount of memory that will be available on your device and SD card after you sync This can help you make decisions about where to sync your data Sync When you sync only files you have selected on either side are included 313 PH 60 Sto geocaches drive or an the internal PN 40 Sto drive or an geocaches Store route XMap User Guide e Click Sync to sync new files and changes to existing files at the same time e To ONLY send new files and changes to existing files from Topo North America to the device or SD card click the arrow next to the Sync button and select Send Then click Send e To ONLY receive new files or changes to existing files from the device or SD card into Topo North America click the arrow next to the Sync button and select Receive Then click Receive EE o SYNC n SEND 4a RECEIVE Cp SYNC 4 Once the sync has finished you are notified that the sync is complete J Sync complete J Sync complete
9. Return a string with spaces removed from its left end The result type is string expression 143 XMap User Guide LOWER MAX MID MIN MONTH OR POWER PREFIX REPLACE RIGHT RTRIM ROUND 144 LOWER string_ expression MAX field SUBSTRING string expression start length MIN field MONTH date_expression logical expression OR logical expression POWER numeric_expression power PREFIX string expression string expression REPLACE string expression string expression string expression RIGHT string_ expression number _of_ characters RTRIM string_ expression ROUND numeric_ expression number of digits Returns a string with its letters converted to lowercase The result type is string expression Return the maximum value of a field The result type is the same as the data type of field Return the length characters of a string beginning at start start and length are both of type integer_expression MID is synonymous with the SUBSTRING function The result type is string expression Return the minimum value of a field The result type is the same as the data type of field Returns an integer representing the month datepart of the specified date The result type is integer_expression Returns TRUE if either of two logical expressions are TRUE and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression Raise a numb
10. To Change Vector Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of vector data 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 67 XMap User Guide Click the plus sign next to the sub data category Highlight Vectors click Data and then click Properties The Vector Properties dialog box opens OR Right click Vectors and click Properties The Vector Properties dialog box opens Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Click Next Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your vector properties Review the dataset information and click Next if applicable Click Finish The vector properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The vector property changes are made only in the current project You must Save your project to retain the property changes Changing the Contour Properties Use the Properties option in the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as rasters vectors shaded relief contours points DEM properties etc Notes e You must select to show contours in the Map Features tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the contour propert
11. To Set GIS Query Options Use the following steps to create default settings for GIS queries 1 Click the Options button c E on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the GIS tab and then click the Queries subtab 3 Set the following options e Zoom map to query results Select this check box to zoom the map to Show the results of a query e Count results when running query Select this check box to show a count of the results in the Query Results area on the Query subtab when you run a query e Attribute effect Use the drop down list to select the default attribute effect of a new query for any layer Options are Highlight Filter and None e Map effect Use the drop down list to control the default map effect of a new query for any layer Options are Highlight Filter and None Using Layers in a Subscription Opening a Subscription File This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Once a database administrator sends you a subscription file you must open it in XMap to activate the subscription A subscription to an Enterprise database allows you to synchronize your local copy of the layers with the Enterprise database on the server You can edit a layer and then synchronize your edits with the Enterprise database You can also use the redlining feat
12. cccee cece 56 Adding Draw Objects 224 225 229 231 Adding Files in a Project 00eee es 61 Adding Geometries to a Layer 108 Adding Layers to your Workspace 101 Adding Points to Draw Objects 221 Adding Stops and ViaS ceeeeeeees 268 Adding Subscription Layers to your WORK SD ACO urari ENO eas 79 Adding Text or Grapnhics 0006 168 Address Book 193 194 195 196 197 Advanced Search ccccccceeeeeeeeees 179 Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map rctMuleletectesbel LA 170 AINON Ci a E a 293 Along the Way ceeeeeeeeeeees 166 278 ANChor POSItION 0 cccee eee aa 245 BU CUS e a Peccesnteeuans 224 226 227 Assembling a Multi page Map 173 Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom SY MOOI vise Gretueda aa eter caneaeenie 242 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts 49 Attribute s 131 136 138 139 141 147 149 156 161 Audio CONTIOIS ccc cece eee e ee eeee teens 303 Auto Zoom LO TUN erare a sunken 285 PUTO CAD eenean E N clan aus 91 Automatically Detect GPS 285 Average Grade cccececcseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 255 Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing a en re ere ere 274 275 B Back ON Track cc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 Base Dake vpscicuseactsietie ccc nescse tense settee 56 Basic Map Features ccceeceeeeeee eens 36 BASIC SCAG yiaarei aA eae 178 Bate FNC ienataansaawum
13. 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Select a scheme from the Scheme drop down list 4 Click Apply to activate the selected scheme Creating a New Custom Scheme You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses To Create a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to create a custom scheme 1 Click the Options button B EE on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Click File and then click New The Scheme drop down list is completed with Custom Scheme where indicates the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you have created Note If you want to rename the new scheme file click File click Rename and then type a new name in the Scheme text box Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when finished The new name displays 4 Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme There are three DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes that you cannot edit however you can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme 49 XMap User Guide Use the following steps to edit a custom scheme Notes 50 1 10 11 Click the Options button arans 7 on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to th
14. OR Right click in the workspace table and click Refresh View Modifying the Properties of a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Layer Properties dialog box to modify a layer s name minimum and maximum data zoom levels geometry shape layering level and more To Modify the Properties of a Layer Use the following steps to modify the properties of a layer PS 106 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer for which you want to view modify the properties Right click the selected layer and then click Properties The Layer Properties dialog box opens OR Click the Tools button and then click Properties The Layer Properties dialog box opens To change the layer s name type a new name in the Layer Name text box Tip You can also change a layer s name in the workspace table by clicking the layer name twice Be sure to click the layer name twice instead of double clicking double clicking centers the map on the layer and does not activate the layer name cell for editing To change the geometry shape of the layer select an option from the Geometry Shape drop down list e Planar default This geometry shape is best for medium or large scale mapping and is a simpler and subsequently faster when performing spatial analysis way of storing spatial data It does not take the curvature of
15. Third Party GPS Devices You can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on your third party GPS device By creating this custom symbol set the waypoints you create display the Same in both the mapping application and on your third party GPS device no matter where they originated Third party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number which is assigned by the device s manufacturer To successfully view third party GPS waypoint symbols in the mapping application you must assign the proper waypoint identification number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set Important To create a custom symbol set of your third party GPS device s waypoint symbols you must contact the device s manufacturer to obtain the graphic files and the waypoint ID number associated with each symbol To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Waypoint Track tool to view its hidden options Select the Waypoint tool Create a new symbol set Paste the third party GPS device s waypoint symbol into XSym Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID text box 7 For each additional symbol click New and then repeat steps 4 7 8 Click OK when finished Notes e Waypoint ID numbe
16. When appending OpenSpace layers the following rules apply 1 If the source layer has a column with a formula that differs from the formula of the same column in the target layer the target layer s formula overwrites the source s layer s formula and is automatically applied to the entire layer 2 Classifications are preserved in both the target layer and source layer The target layer s active and default classifications are adopted in the resulting layer 3 If the source layer and target layer have identically named Extended Attribute Sets that contain different attributes and join rules the attribute sets are automatically unlinked from the source layer when appending occurs The target layer maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets 4 If the source layer has a different label structure than the target layer the target layer s formula is adopted and automatically applied to the entire layer Replace This import method is used to replace or overwrite an existing GIS layer with a new layer The new layer must be of the same geometry type as the existing layer and attribute columns must have an exact name match in order to append to each other In addition like named attributes in the incoming layer must be of the same type family in order to append The importer will be as tolerant as possible within a type family allowing 96 Working With GIS data to convert or widen For example a 100 character string column in th
17. advanced GPS support for field tracking and navigation interoperability with Earthmate PN Series GPS devices for field data collection and exchange of map data waypoints and tracks 3 D terrain modeling with simulated fly over functionality advanced printing tools and much more XMap GIS Enterprise The upper tier of the XMap suite is designed to meet the specific needs of enterprise GIS managers who need to efficiently manage and deploy GIS data throughout a company XMap GIS Enterprise also includes all of the features in XMap GIS Editor Create and distribute GPS data collection forms to XMap Editor and XMap Professional users and PN Series GPS owners e Quickly sync layers increased sync speed for large databases e Establish database permissions for Windows security groups e Ensure data integrity with check out check in tools e Share data across the enterprise with database synchronization tools e Use the API Command Window to perform basic mapping functions from a third party application e Automate the import and export of standard spatial data files with the bulk importer exporter e Supports Microsoft SQL Server 2008R2 and 2012 e XMap GIS Enterprise in conjunction with multiple copies of XMap Professional provides a complete field force GIS data collection system XMap GIS Editor XMap GIS Editor is a perfect choice for small GIS departments or for a company or organization that is considering the develop
18. your changes You can use the Undo and Redo ad buttons in the toolbar to reverse your changes until you commit them e Once a document is in the database there is no connection to the version on your computer s hard drive If you move or change the file on your hard drive it does not affect the version in the database and vice versa e Embedded documents become shared information in the database For example if a document where information is logged is embedded each user who edits the document updates the database e Embedded documents are included when you synchronize a database Viewing the Attributes of a Geometry on the Map This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise To view the attributes of a geometry that is in the active layer on the map right click the location on the map and then click Show Attributes You can also select the geometry with one of the GIS tools such as the Selection tool x The attribute information for that geometry is highlighted in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab and is also highlighted on the map Viewing Redline Edits This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise 135 XMap User Guide After users synchronize their redline layers with the redline GIS layer in the Enterprise database those users with permissions to view the redline
19. 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type for example all road layers are grouped together in the list all draw layers are grouped together and so on 4 Select a draw file from the file list and then click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel OR Right click the draw file in the list and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel 5 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Hiding Draw Files You can hide draw files you created This removes from view all the draw objects in that file without permanently deleting them To Hide a Draw File Use the following steps to hide a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all road layers are grouped together in the list all draw layers are grouped together and so on 3 Hide any files in the file list by clearing the check box next to the file name e A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map e A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map 4 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area 205 XMap User Guide Editing Locking Draw Files You can ed
20. 350 Legal Information Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For t
21. For more information about data types see the Data and Zoom Level Information box below To Create a Map Package Use the following steps to create a custom map to send to an Earthmate PN Series GPS 1 Click the Handheld Export tab 2 Under the select layers list select the check box next to each layer to include in the map package For information about layers click a data type in the Data and Zoom Level Information box below Tips e If you installed the PN Series detailed DVD data on your device clear the XMap North America Topographic Data check box so you do not duplicate data e You can select multiple layers and then click one check box to select or clear the check boxes for all selected items 3 To change the maximum and minium zoom levels for the data click the cell under Min or Max and type the new number Click the arrow next to the range in the table to open a dialog with more zoom controls For more information about zoom levels see the Data and Zoom Level Information box below 4 Select an appropriate grid size from the Grid Size drop down list for more information see Grid Size Comparisons click the Select Edit Hip SelectEdit button and click grids on the map to add or remove them Grids selected for export are Shaded red You can click and drag to quickly select multiple grids If you used the Preview in Handheld feature on the GIS tab or the Find tab to i AA Select All preview a layer you can
22. Note Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects To Delete a Project Use the following steps to delete a project 1 On your computer browse to the location of the project you want to delete Note Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Projects created in XMap 5 x or earlier are stored in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your C drive For more information see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location Select the file from the file list and then click the Delete button on the toolbar or press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the file in the file list and click Delete Tip You can open a project to verify it is the one you want to delete For more information see Opening a Project Opening a Project You can open projects created in all versions of XMap To Open a Project Use the following steps to open a project 1 Open a project from the toolbar OR Click the Map Data tab click File and then click Open The Open File dialog box opens Note If you made changes to a project that is already open the Save Changes dialog box opens Note Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Click the project and then click Open The last saved map view for that project displays OR Double click the project The last saved map view for that project displays N
23. Note Selecting the GEOMETRY attribute creates a spatial query see the To Create a Spatial Query section below Click the cell under Operator and select an operator from the drop down list The options in this list vary based on the Attribute field s data type Click the cell under Criteria A drop down list displays all of the records available for the field selected in step 6 Select the value or enter a custom value that you want to use in your query If you want to create a complex query click the cell under Logical Operator and select a logical operator And Or or And Not from the drop down list Optional If you want to allow Web users or other XMap users to enter their own values for the query select the User Input check box next to the query you want to share Optional Repeat steps 6 10 in the next row s if you are creating a complex query Click Run If you selected User Input in step 10 the Run Query dialog box opens Verify the query is correct and then click Run All objects that satisfy the query are highlighted on the map and the number count of query results displays under Query Results You can change how query results display on the map using the tools in the Query tab You can change how the highlight is symbolized by clicking the Edit button to the right of the Query table Note To decrease the time it takes to run a query disable the Count function by clicking the Query button and then clicking Count to to
24. OR Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button z Options 2 Under When Tracking clear the Recenter Map on GPS check box If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking Center on GPS displays in the Control Panel OR Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking the map automatically re centers itself on your location after 5 seconds 3 Click OK 289 XMap User Guide 4 Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS OR Click the GPS button G on the toolbar Notes e The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control Panel when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected e If you deactivate the Center on GPS button you can continue to manually pan the map or use the search function in the Find tab e When you are done with other tasks click Center on GPS in the Control Panel to resume tracking Playing Back a Log File After you log a route with your GPS receiver you can play it back in the mapping application and review your entire journey on screen Notes e You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS receiver e Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail To Play Back a Log File Use the following steps to play back and review a log file Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and
25. PANUNG al Velo o E E T N E T E E eee 165 Printing a Route and DIIecCtiOns orisirisii aa eaea aa a aaa 166 PANUNG AP OO aea E E A TA 167 Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map sssssssssssrrssererersrsrrrsrsrsrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrererrrre 168 Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map sssseseresrererrerererrrrererrererrrrrrererrerre 170 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map s ssssssererrersrrrrererrrrererrrrerrrrrrsrerrne 171 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map c cece cece ce ceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 172 Manually Assembling a Multi page Map cccccccceeee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenas 173 PINGING a LOCATION OM TNE MAD esiseina vai tient sendevadninadialetevleuniaaadnatees aA 177 FUNG OV ERVICW oeoa poe d acka emer caaanirah cata A aaaaea aT 177 FG ODE ONS wrusownea adnan adieu E Pave ula eae e tas Bi cae a ed Rae ee 177 PEMorming a Basic So eare ache tatater arte tiniuakh hel N A teenies 178 Performing an AdVanced S Carlisi viscid e O A vad oer een a 179 Por ormiNg a POSCA arna ah Gay etae bined eae oh ees 182 Finding Points Near Your Current LOCAtION c cece cece eee cece ee eee e ee eeeeeeeeseeaeeeeseeanees 183 Tutorial Find Points of Interest ON a ROUtC c cece cece cece eeeeee sees eee eeeeeeeeeeneeteeeenegs 184 FINGING a SYMDOl DY ICS NaMe wesiiisdavetic
26. Routes and Tracks Use Earthmate GPS Sync to sync your XMap projects with your Earthmate PN Series GPS device or an SD card you plan to use in your device Before you start set your preferences for using Earthmate GPS Sync See the tutorials to learn more about using Earthmate GPS Sync e Tutorial Add a Map to a PN Series GPS e Tutorial Sync Data with a PN Series GPS When you open Earthmate GPS Sync you can see a Summary of the project open in XMap on the left side of the dialog box On the right side of the dialog box you see a summary of the device connected to your computer with a USB cable or an SD card in a reader in your computer To change the view on the right side of the dialog box click the arrow in the top right corner and select the device or SD card to view Select the GPS device or SD card in an SD card reader to connect to GPS Earthmate PN 60w Eanhmate PA 6bOw DeLorme Topo North America 9 0 Open Project gt PA L a Date Crestet May 20 2070 253 FM Lasi 5y Lasi Modified May 25 2010 424 Pu Not all files on GPS SYNC PREVIEW 2 File s will be synced 3 Map Package s will be synced Click the contents i to view details Project Contents a I See more detail and make changes gt Removable Disk F ni E File Status h i ties in Topo North America SYNC PREVIEW 3 File s will be synced lt Sync Preview 4 Map Package s w
27. Style drop down list and select the style OR To hide the fill color on the map clear the Show Fill check box e To change the outline color of your feature ensure the Show Outline check box is selected click the Outline Color button next to Outline under Polygon Features and select a standard line color or create a custom line color Then select how wide you want your outline to display from the Width drop down list OR To hide the outline color on the map clear the Show Outline check box e To change the highlight color for a line layer e To change the line color of your feature click the Color button and select a standard or custom line color Then select a line width from the Width drop down list and a line style from the Style drop down list e To change the outline color of your feature click the Outline Color button and select a standard line color or create a custom line color Then select how wide you want your outline to display from the Width drop down list Note An outline is placed underneath a line Therefore if the outline is fewer pixels wide than the line the outline may not be visible To ensure an outline will be visible make sure the outline is at least 2 pixels greater than the line Working With GIS To change the highlight color for a point layer e To change the type of symbol you want to display select a symbol set from the Set drop down list and then use the symbol scroll list below the dro
28. The Redline geometry shape is stored as a Planar type If the layer is a point layer Planar is the only Geometry Shape option available unless the point layer was geocoded and then the option is Geocode Points If the layer is a polygon layer the Geometry Shape options are Planar and Spherical If the layer is a line layer the Geometry Shape options are Planar and Spherical If the layer is a redline layer Redline is the only Geometry Shape available Note The Geometry Shape option is disabled when there are uncommitted edits against the layer 9 10 To change the minimum and maximum zoom levels at which the layers display on the map select the zoom levels from the Min Zoom Level and Max Zoom Level drop down lists To change on which map the layer is viewed primary secondary or both select the option from the Map drop down list To change the layering level click inside the Layering Level text box and edit the value For more information see Reordering Layers If you want to show labels related to the layer select the Labels check box Click OK Creating a Buffer Around a Geometry This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Buffer feature in XMap to create a buffer around a geometry based on a specific distance This tool is helpful in GIS spatial analysis when proximity issues are of concern such as site planning or risk assessment To Create a B
29. advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder LibTiff License Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that i the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE CSMap License Copyright 2008 Autodesk Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted
30. and then click the spot on the map where you want to end your route OR To use an address book entry as your finish location select Finish From Address Book from the Finish drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR Type your finish location in the Finish drop down text box You can type in the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code 267 XMap User Guide The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names Select a calculation method the program adjusts the default calculation values based on your selection amp priving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle ES leycting Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot Select a route type Road Shortest Road Quickest Trail or Direct from the drop down list If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK Click Directions to view the rou
31. check box is selected The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map 6 Use the notes and annotations in the draw layer to make the appropriate edits to the corresponding GIS layers to which the user was subscribed 81 XMap User Guide Stationing Stationing This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Stationing is a linear referencing method that calculates numeric values along a line based on user defined From and To values These values are entered into Fr_Station and To Station attribute fields for a line in a GIS layer which are automatically assigned by XMap to the start and end points of the line Stationing is commonly used in the pipeline industry to locate station values numeric point locations along pipelines For example field personnel may be given work orders of sections of pipeline to inspect or repair These locations may be referenced by their station values or a range of values along the pipeline Using a GIS line layer of the pipeline that has the station values present the field worker is able to locate the exact point of the station along the line and navigate to it Although stationing has its roots in the pipeline industry it is a convenient method of referencing data to a location for any type of linear data XMap Professional users can view stationing fields created in XMap Editor or Enterprise To Add Stationing Attributes to a L
32. or high to low in color value e Qualitative Displays colors that vary in color hue to represent different legend classes e Diverging Puts equal emphasis on mid range critical values and extremes at both ends of the data range Then select a color pattern from the Pattern drop down list 12 Optional Click the Reverse Order button classes are varied 13 Optional To edit an existing classification click the Recalculate button recalculate the classification 14 Optional To add a class to your classification click the Add Class button i Double click in the Value and or Legend Label fields to edit the values 15 Optional To remove a class from your classification click the Remove Class button 16 Click OK Note Once you create a unique value classification you can use the classification menu on the toolbar to edit the classification of a selection on the map The classification tool on the toolbar is available only for active layers with a unique value classification and only after you click either the edit points tool the edit tool or the draw tool and select a geometry 118 Working With GIS Classifying a Layer with a Range This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you classify a layer with a range the data in the layer is clustered into classes based on a Statistical algorithm and each class is varied by color or size characterist
33. to the horizontal center of the page To disable the auto snap function hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while dragging the text graphic items on the map To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map 171 XMap User Guide 1 Add text or graphics to your map 2 Drag each text graphic item you placed on the map to the location you want them on the map If you drag an item to the edge of the map print area the text graphic Snaps to the edge If you drag the item to the horizontal center of the edge of the map print area the text graphic snaps to the center of the edge You can also drag the item to the center of the map print area to snap it to the center of the printed map Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and click Width Height or Both When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map In this case use the right click Bring to Front Se
34. town measurement line waypoint track draw symbol or point of interest The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type length area ZIP Postal Code town name county name state province coordinates and Standard Industrial Classification categories Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the category to view more detailed information OR Right click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the information categories Right click in the information box again and click Collapse All to minimize all of the information categories Optional Repeat steps 1 3 to get information about another location Optional Right click in the information box and click Print to print your map feature information e You can also get information about a location using the right click option J ust right click the location and click Info e The status bar located above the tab area displays draw object type draw file information point of interest name if applicable street name address highway city State province and ZIP Postal Code information for the map location that your cursor is positioned on e Some map features Such as campgrounds national scenic historic trail information centers and state parks display with a blue outline at higher data zoom levels The blue outline indicates that the feature
35. 1 7 All files on GPS A TS iN laff Geocaching 5 22 10 2 AN ODN em 1s SYNC PREVIEW E AU 1 File Will te SVT kn E Mf ol ro I ae Lo T a T a tl ai a ai File selected for deletion i Project Contents gt S See more dotai and make changes CEL f o Memory Preview GPS 26 17 MB of 2 85 GB wil be used SD card 209 40 MB of 1 24 GB wil be used ESL Sync Time zm Co SYNC v Firmware Updates Occasionally DeLorme releases updates for Earthmate PN Series GPS devices When an update is available for a device connected to your computer with the USB cable you will be notified when you start Earthmate GPS Sync An Internet connection is required for firmware update notification and download a FA E Earthmatem GPS Symi Update Available A newer version 3 1 of the PN 60 firmware amp available Some deta Remind Me 322 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices Sending GIS Points and Forms To edit GIS points on an Earthmate PN Series GPS device you can use the Export Points dialog to send a GIS point layer or specific points in a layer to an SD card in the device using a GPX file If the point layer includes a PN compatible form you can attach it and send it to the device as part of the GPX file The maximum number of points allowed in a GPX file is 900 Once you have finished editing points or adding new points to your device with the proper permissions you can import
36. 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map In the example below 2 x 2 is selected This means the print area encompasses four standard pages at whatever paper size you specified in the Setup options You can assemble a multipage map into a large map Print Layout Single o If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 and do not want to save all the pages in the multipage map on the map layout graphic click each page you do not want to save The page appears dimmed or gray In the example below page 4 will not print B Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save If not pan the map to the location and zoom to the level you want Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges reduces the map features and changes the map area that you save as an image If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are larger and your map area is reduced If you decrease the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are smaller and your map area is enlarged The reduction enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop down list If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print area print photo zoom or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box This locks the print area and changes the tab label to red Add text or graphics to your map Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire ar
37. A 3retton Woods reg Il i TT er a ER ne ee TT ee ee eT L a ames LI ies Sa DAN ee L i L z i AT Eirion Broni K I a Pre ae a a a 5 pn ye ha i 264 h TA Ir EE a iat an ae eee ae Se me le hoa me e ha i EE a 7 L ice po Ot ja he oa ee ae gt w T ra T Viewing Your Map in 3 D Step 3 Open the GPS log file Open the newly created GPS Log file using the GPS Log subtab in the GPS tab Step 4 Play the GPS log file Click the Play button to play back the GPS Log file Step 5 Adjust 3 D settings Use the tools in the 3 D tab to adjust the rotation pitch and more Step 6 View the map in 3 D while you play back the GPS log file Drag the resize tool to the right or double click the bar above the right arrow to view the map in full 3 D mode Make sure 3 D is selected in the select map view drop down list 265 XMap User Guide Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences Use the 3 D tab in the Options dialog box to customize your 3 D maps with increased vertical exaggeration billboards a GPS tracking cursor type and more To Set Your 3 D Map Preferences Use the following steps to set your 3 D map preferences ps 1 Click the Options button GB options on the toolbar and then click Options Then click the 3 D tab You may have to scroll the tab area to see the 3 D tab OR Click the 3 D tab to open it and click the Options button If you want the right map to
38. A W Click the Draw tab l pr PaP Click and hold the Track Waypoint tool and select the Track tool Select a track style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a track color Select a track width from the Width drop down list Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the track As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the track on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options 225 XMap User Guide e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes 9 To finish the track click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the track Tip To get information about a track right click it on the map and click Info The Info tab opens with information
39. All Pop up Tutorials e To enable all pop tutorials after you have shut off one or more click the Help button on the toolbar and click Reset All Pop up Tutorials Control Panel Getting Started If you want to Zoom the map out in Drag the map cursor in an up left direction to zoom the quickly map out or drag it in a down right direction to zoom the map in Pan the map quickly Position your cursor on the edge of the map it becomes a white hand that you can use to drag the map to the new location With your cursor anywhere on the map press the CTRL key on your keyboard the cursor becomes a white hand Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to a new location Update the coordinate Update your measurement preferences at any time using format that displays in the the Display tab in the Options dialog box Control Panel View the last map center Press the middle button in the Compass Rose in the Control Panel to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom up to 256 times Draw Create a route using a When drawing a routable road trail click each existing road or trail you have road it crosses to ensure that you can route on the new added to the map with the road trail When you open a track you ve imported from Draw tab your GPS device join the imported line with existing lines by right clicking each intersection and selecting Manage Draw J oin
40. Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Notes e The appearance of a POI many change at different data zoom levels e The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box For more information see Displaying Basic Map Features This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POIs If you You will see You will see You will see You will see You will see view large the following the following the following the following the following symbols information information information information information at data at data at data at data at data at data ZOOM zoom level zoom level zoom level zoom level zoom level level 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 names and name of the name of the name of the name of the Small square POI and the POI and the POI and the POI and the symbols large symbol large symbol large symbol large symbol 41 XMap User Guide 15 small Squares only name of the POI anda Small square symbol small square symbols only Small square symbols and some names of POls name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI anda Small square symbol name of the POI anda Small square symbol Setting Units of Measure Preferences name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI anda Smal
41. COGO dialog box 1 Select the layer you want to edit from the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar 2 Click the COGO tool ES The COGO Editing dialog box opens 3 If you want to place your point line polygon by coordinate click the Coordinates tab The information that is required in this tab varies depending on the coordinate system chosen in the Display settings in the Options dialog box OR If you want to place your point line polygon by angle and distance measurements click the Angle tab The angle information is based on the angle from the last point that was placed The distance information is the distance from the last point that was placed OR If you want to place your point line polygon by bearing and distance measurements click the Bearing tab The bearing information is not related to the last point rather fixed angular measurements 4 Select the Pan to Points check box if you want the map to center on each COGO placement you make in the next step OR Clear the Pan to Points check box if you do not want the map to center on the COGO points 5 For point layers type the coordinates angle bearing of the point in the applicable text boxes and then click Apply Repeat this step for each point that you want to place OR 115 XMap User Guide Note For line layers type the coordinates angle bearing for the first point in the line in the applicable text boxes and then click Apply Repeat this step for e
42. Each draw file type has an active file 4 Optional If you want to rename the draw file Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard 5 Optional If you want to ensure no changes are made to a particular draw file select the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area 6 Click Save 7 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note You can save new draw files any time For more information see Saving a Draw File Saving a Draw File 204 Using the Draw Tools After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file you can save them in a draw file that you can view or edit later Any time you edit a draw file click Save to save your changes To Save a New Draw File Use the following steps to save a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File 3 Click Save Draw files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Draw with anl extensions 4 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Deleting a Draw File You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved To Delete a Draw File Use the following steps to delete a draw file 1 Open the project that contains the draw file you want to delete
43. File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers From the file list click the draw file to export Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box opens Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of C DeLorme Docs Export Select Text File from the Save as Type drop down list Using the Draw Tools 7 Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is root name of the layer 8 Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file 9 Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Exporting Track Data Files to Text Files You can export track files containing athletic data as text files Tracks with athletic data exported to text files contain the data from the device such as speed heart rate etc To Export Track Data Files to Text Files Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area Any draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column Shows the active layers 3 From the file list click the track file to export 4 Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box opens 5 Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of C DeLorme Docs Export 6 Select Channel Data Text File from
44. G on the toolbar The status of your GPS connection displays on the screen Once your GPS receiver acquires a fix on your location your position on the map displays as a yellow or green dot that changes to an arrow as you travel For more information see Monitoring Your GPS Status While your receiver is acquiring data many red dots display on your map except with Magellan receivers You may have to zoom in to see them clearly These red dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS receiver as it is acquiring data Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup the default configuration it reserves the COM port If that is the one where the GPS receiver is attached you must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to initialize To do this right click the HotSync icon on the taskbar and click Exit If you have two COM ports verify the correct COM port is selected for use with your application This pertains to older devices Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver should be directed to its manufacturer Tracking a Route with GPS When tracking you can follow along a road route you created using any of the routing methods in your mapping program As you travel the current leg segment of your route is highlighted on the map Notes e To automatically recalculate your route when off track on the Route tab select t
45. GIS legend The legend displays on the map You can reposition or resize legends on the map To reposition drag the legend to the new location To resize drag any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the legend Select the Show Highlight Feature check box to view the highlight color in the legend Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can use the right click options to align each object with a certain location on the map Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map 170 Printing Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 2 Place more than one text or graphic item on your map For more information see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard click each text graphic item on the 3 map OR Drag your mouse over the text graphic items on the map to select multiple items at Once 4 Right click one of the items point to Align and then click Tips Left to align the left sides of all of the items placement is based on the left side of the left most item Right to align the right sides of all of the items placement is based on the right side of the right most item Top to align the top side of all of the items placement is based on the top side of the top most item Bottom to align the bottom side of al
46. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE GDAL hdf4 Format License Copyright 1996 Hughes and Applied Research Corporation Permission to use modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in Supporting documentation GDAL pcraster Format License Copyright 1997 2003 Utrecht University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Utrecht University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without spe
47. If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool S automatically commit your changes Editing Points in a Polygon Line Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Edit Points button ms on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an empty existing layer To Edit Points tn a Polygon Line Layer Use the following steps to edit shape points in a polygon line layer 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the polygon line layer you want to edit 109 XMap User Guide 2 Click the Edit Points tool es on the toolbar and select a geometry The shape points in the geometry display as white squares outlined in black If you edit a line or polygon layer the start and end nodes are annotated with the following symbols i Used when the edited shape point is being snapped to the start node of a polygon geometry or the end node of a line geometry D Used when the edited shape point is being snapped to the shape point of another geometry Used when the edited shape point is being snapped to the edge of another m geometry when there are no shape points If you edit a topological line layer the start and end nodes of the lines in the layer are a
48. Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view e See also Importing a Bitmap Copying and Pasting Pasting a Bitmap into XSym Dragging a Bitmap into XSym Editing a Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set dim file and save the change or save it aS a new symbol to be added to another symbol set You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Edit a Symbol Use the following steps to edit a symbol 1 Click the Draw tab T Pp 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default symbol set or from another symbol set you have created The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occur
49. Name Within the Draw tab you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map For more information on adding symbols to the map see Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote or Text Label to the Map You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using the QuickSearch feature on the Find tab For example if you named a symbol My House when you placed it on the map use the following steps for conducting a search on the unique symbol name To Find a Symbol by its Name Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name 1 Click the Find tab 2 Using QuickSearch type the symbol name followed by the town and state abbreviation for example My Office Yarmouth ME in the Search For text box 3 Click Search The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The symbol name displays in the Name column 4 Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map The map view centers on the item A MapTag displays the symbol name at the symbol location Note To display MapTags select the MapTags check box on the Find tab Tips on Viewing Search Results These tips can help you view Find tab search results e To make it easier to view a long list of search results increase the height of the tab by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase up tab height arrow Em atthe top of the tab e
50. Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Rename The Scheme text box becomes active 51 XMap User Guide 5 Type the name in the Scheme text box 6 Click Apply The new name displays OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard The new name displays OR Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name Deleting a Custom Scheme Once you have created a custom scheme you can delete it at any time You cannot delete DeLorme schemes To Delete a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme 1 Click the Options button E E on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Delete Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme Importing a Custom Scheme ae ee lS You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Import a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to import a custom scheme 1 Click the Options button E S on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dial
51. Roads Draw tool For more information see Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map To report a correction to us Click the NetLink tab Click the Support subtab Click the Submit Correction link Use the Customer Revisions Wizard to submit the change e WUWU Ne How do initialize my GPS receiver Each time you use your GPS receiver you initialize it which means you set your starting position on the map by obtaining the initial coordinates of your location This can be done automatically or manually For more information see GPS Options Initializing GPS What s the difference between a stop and a via When routing you have the option of adding or inserting stops or vias in the route A stop is a location in the middle of a route where you want to stop and then proceed from A via is a road on the map that you want to specifically use when routing For example if you create a route between Portland Maine and Yarmouth Maine without any stops or vias the route directions will tell you to take 1 295 However if you want to take US Route 1 instead you can place vias in the route on US Route 1 to force the route to go by way of US Route 1 If you plan on stopping in Falmouth Foreside for lunch you will want your route directions to reflect that stop When you add a stop the route can be recalculated to include the stop in the middle of your route Getting Started The map below shows the area between Portland Mai
52. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE stePOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Apache License Version 2 0 Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License
53. To Export Files Creating an ini File This option works on a single file basis using the parameters described in previous sections You can create the initialization file ini with a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad All parameters are separated by a return in the ini file The name and path of the ini file are referenced in the command line 1 Open your preferred text editing program such as Wordpad or Notepad 2 Type the following export parameters in the text document e source server the SQL server where the database for exporting resides e source db the OpenSpace database from which the layers are being exported 88 Working With GIS e output file the file format and extension for the exported layers e source layer the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported OR sourcelayerid the identification number of the layer in the OpenSpace database The following parameters are optional e query name of the query being referenced OR queryid identification number of the query in the database being referenced e attributes the name of the attribute field to include in the exported layer Note If this parameter is left blank all attribute fields in the layer will be exported 3 Save the text document with an ini extension rather than a txt extension 4 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 5 Type the following parameters in the co
54. Type the following parameters in the text document target server server name target db database name source file file path datum the datum of the file coordinate system the coordinate system of the file Note The coordinate information varies depending on the type of coordinate system you specify for example if you select SPCS you will also need to specify the SPCS zone and units 3 Save the text document with an ini extension rather than a txt extension 4 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 5 Type the following parameters in the command line xmapimport the path to the ini file you created in steps 1 3 6 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is imported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file to import in days hours minutes and seconds 7 Add the layer to your workspace To Import Files Creating a Batch File This option allows you to automate several iterations of import with a user created batch file You can create batch files with a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad Each line of the batch file pertains to a single import command line and contains the same parameters as would be specified with manual entry in the command line You can import multiple file types located in different folders into different OpenSpace databases using t
55. You can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create using the Route tab the route options on the toolbar or by right clicking the map 2 D only 268 A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed from Routing A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through Add stops or vias to follow a route in a particular order Insert stops or vias to arrange them geographically in the route Turn off Auto Calculate when you are adding many stops and vias Use Add instead of Insert when your start and finish are at the same place Don t place the finish point until you add all your stops and vias Place vias near the beginning of the road or trail you want to use When you calculate the route if it goes to a via and then returns to the original path insert another via toward the end of that road where you want to turn onto the next road to force it to use that road When using a road as a stop or via zoom in to ensure you select the correct road The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route The Add Stop Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the route Use the following steps to add a stop or via to your route 1 2 3 2 Create a route In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool 2 if you are adding a stop or the Via tool s if you are adding a
56. about the track Editing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline Once you create a line object routable road routable trail line arc or spline you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Line Object Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road trail line arc or spline 1 2 3 Open the project containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the line object you want to edit is not active click File and activate the draw file in the file list Then click Done Click the Select tool es and then click the line object you want to edit e A box displays around the selected line e The shape points used to create the line object display as small magenta squares Perform any of the following edits to the line object e To edit any label on the line object select it twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the line object OR Select the line object and edit its label e Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edi
57. all route preferences and road type preferences to the default settings Editing a Route 219 XMap User Guide You can modify existing routes by Adding removing and rearranging stops and vias Adjusting your route preferences based on road type Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed Reversing a route Zoom in to set accurate points for your route Use the right click option for routing J ust right click the route stop or via point to Manage Route and click the applicable option To Edit a Route To edit a route click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Select the route from the Name drop down list box The route becomes active The following list describes the edit functions To change the route name select the name in the Name text box type the new route name and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard To change a route point click the corresponding tool and then click the new spot on the map OR Select a route point on the map and drag it to the new location on the map Note If you try to add a Start or finish point to an existing route the Would you like to move your Start location or create a New route message opens Click New to begin creating a new route Click Move to move the Start or Finish point to the last location clicked To add or insert a stop or via to your route click the corresponding tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to add o
58. already opted to install the speech recognition engine you may not see the option to install it again Voice Options Click a link to learn more about the Voice tab in the Options dialog box e Training the Speech Recognition Engine 296 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition e Speech Recognition Tips e Changing Voice Output e Voice Preferences Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition calculated To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route Use the Voice tab to view status information about your microphone and the list of available voice commands e The Microphone bar VU meter indicates the level of sound received from the microphone e The Command Status area displays either the last recognized voice command or one of the following error messages e Too noisy e No signal e Input too loud e Input too quiet e The Commands box lists the voice commands for accessing the Voice tab navigating using the map and using GPS It shows the availability of the commands and their shortcut keys You can double click a command to issue it To Activate and Monitor the Speech Recognition Feature Use the following steps to activate and monitor the speech recognition feature 1 Click the Voice tab 2 Select the Microphone check box to activate your microphone and to turn on the speech recognition feature The tab name turns red if the microphone is listening to your comman
59. an active route GPS Radar Search for points of interest waypoints and GIS points within a designated distance from your current location while tracking a route with a GPS receiver Before you use GPS Radar check the Find settings in the Options dialog box Advanced Control what you are looking for with the Find field and where you are looking for it with the Within field while you conduct a more detailed search Find Options Use the Find tab in the Options dialog box to set your preferences when you use GPS Radar to find POIs when tracking with GPS To Set GPS Radar Find Options 1 Click the Options button c silica i on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the Find tab OR Click the Find tab and click the Options button EE Options 2 Select your preferences e Calculate the distance to objects by The method to search for objects e Select Road to calculate the distance by road e Select Distance to calculate the distance as the crow flies e Search area equals z miles The search distance for a road search or radius for a direct search Select the distance from the drop down list The results returned are based on the calculation method For example if you are looking for gas stations and you have set your calculation method as Road and the search area for 10 miles the results will not show you gas stations that are 10 miles or less in distance as the crow flies if the dis
60. an imported file that you can view and analyze on the map What is a Workspace A workspace is the area where you import layers to a database and visualize the data on the map Within this area is a table that displays in the center of the Workspace subtab To modify which columns display in the workspace right click the bar at the top of the table to see all of the available columns column names with a selected check box are currently displaying in the table You can also sort the table by a particular column by clicking the column you want to sort by change the order of the workspace columns by dragging a column to the desired location or resize the width of the columns by dragging the line that separates the column names to a different position Your workspace is saved in your current project Each time you create a new project the workspace Is reset resetting a workspace does not delete layers Managing the Layers in a Database Use the Layers button in the Workspace subtab to make changes to the local workspace such as e Create a new layer to add to a database e Import a layer into a database e Delete a layer from a database e Adda layer from a database to your workspace e Remove a layer from your workspace e Export a layer as a Shapefile text file or DeLorme OpenSpace Transfer File e Refresh all layers in the workspace from the database e Rename a layer in a database e Copy a layer from one database to another Modifyi
61. and click Create In the toolbar click the Forms menu button and click Create Forms 2 From the Choose Layer drop down list select the layer to which you are adding the form Forms are associated with a layer You cannot move a form from one layer to another 3 Type a name for the form in the Form Name box For clarity give each form a unique name within the layer The form name appears in the title bar of the form when it is opened 4 From the Form Type drop down list select the type of form Only the form types you can use with the layer are available in the list XMap only These forms are based on the layer attributes you select PN compatible These forms are for use with GIS point layers on Earthmate PN Series GPS devices and support only certain attribute types For example document attributes cannot be displayed on a PN Series GPS device If the layer is not classified and symbolized the default red pushpin is used as the symbol on the device and it cannot be edited on the form To choose symbols use the Earthmate PN Series symbol set Do NOT use the geocaching symbols in that set to symbolize your layer If you do they will be sorted to the Geocaches Page on the device and the form will not work properly For more information about forms for PN Series GPS devices see PN Compatible Forms For more information about sending forms to a PN Series GPS see Sending GIS Points and Forms Custom To create a custom
62. and click the Delete button Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel OR Right click the draw object in the table and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel 11 Optional Click Less to return the tab height to its default height Note To edit the Comments field click once in the cell type your text in the box and then press ENTER on your keyboard When you hover your cursor over a comment the entire comment displays as a ToolTip Copying a Draw File You can copy the contents of an existing file and save it as a different file type for example convert a road layer to a draw layer Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Copy a Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw file Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Click to select the file that you want to copy Click Copy To and select the layer type you want to copy to Draw options Select Road Trail Waypoint or Track A new file is created and inserted into the table GIS Layer option If you want to create an exact copy of the original file select the layer type that matches the original file GIS Layer has options for New Layer Append Layer and Replace Layer When you se
63. and pan the 2 D or 3 D map in any direction click the Map Panning button lt 7 on the toolbar Tip With your cursor anywhere on the map press the CTRL key on your keyboard the cursor becomes a white hand Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to a new location To Use the GIS Tools There are many GIS tools available on the toolbar including tools that allow you to edit geometries create redline layers perform COGO editing and more 30 Using the Toolbar GIS Layer Management Import Layers menu kr y database from a file mport a layer add append or replace into a Manage Layers E Use the Manage Layers dialog box to add and remove layers from your workspace delete layers from the source database or remove a database reference Forms menu Create manage and open forms See the related Help topics for more information about the options that are available for your version of XMap GIS Tools Active Layer Use the Active Layer drop down list to select a layer from your workspace as the active layer Selection w Highlight geometries on the map without the risk of accidental editing Edit Move or change the size of a geometry Edit Points es Edit points in a polygon line layer Edge Matching Py polygon line Match shape points in a polygon line to those in another Rotate Rotate a geometry NO Draw Geometries i R Or depending o
64. and then click the location on the map where you want to start your route OR Select an address book entry a previous location or your current GPS position from the Start drop down list 2 Type the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box next to the red Finish button OR Click the red Finish button and then click the location on the map where you want to end your route OR Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish drop down list 3 Optional If you want to add a stop or via to your route click the Stop button z I or the Via button and then click the location on the map where you want to add or insert the stop or via Repeat this step for each stop or via you want to add to your route Note If the Add option is selected in the Route tab stops and vias are added in the order they are added to the route If the Insert option is selected in the Route tab stops and vias are added in the order they are approached in the route For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias 4 Click the Calculate button Gr Important If you have only the left map window open the route Start Finish and Stop buttons on the toolbar and on the Route tab are grayed out To activate the options use the map resize tool to expose the right map window 32 Using the Toolbar Note To use the current GPS location in a route you must connect your device to your comput
65. associated with a layer and display attribute fields chosen by the administrator when the form is created The administrator can create multiple forms for a GIS layer Authorized users with access to a layer can open forms to view them and those with the proper permissions can edit a form XMap Editor and XMap Enterprise users can create and manage forms see chart below To use XMap Forms with XMap Professional an administrator is required to own one license of XMap 8 GIS Enterprise which includes the form builder and enables database synchronization across the network Note See chart below on Form Rights to understand when an XMap product can create and access forms 150 Working With GIS Types of Forms There are three types of forms e XMap only These forms are based on the attributes selected by the form creator Some attribute types are not available for forms e PN compatible These forms are for use with GIS point layers on Earthmate PN Series GPS devices and support only certain attribute types For example document attributes cannot be displayed on a PN Series GPS device For more information about forms for PN Series GPS devices see PN Compatible Forms e Custom To create a custom form you can create and export an XMap only form to your computer edit it using your own HTML J avaScript tools and then import it into XMap Multiple Forms in a Layer You can create multiple forms for a layer and tailor each of them to
66. attributes table is copied and can be pasted into another program Place Point When selected for a record the corresponding point geometry is selected with the Edit Tool and the cursor changes to the Edit tool Click the map to move the point from its previous location to the clicked location 137 XMap User Guide Geocode Selection When selected the selected records are re geocoded placed on the map according to the attributes they were geocoded by This option is relevant when a user removes their map data Streets or Topo after geocoding a layer during import and they edit the attributes of the geometry that were used in geocoding Zoom to Query The map zooms to display all of the geometries that satisfy the Results query results Zoom to Record The map centers on the selected record Refresh The attributes table refreshes updates to include any changes that were made These right click options display only for geocoded point layers This right click option displays only when there is an active query Attributes Design View Showing Hiding Attributes in a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Attributes Datasheet View to view and or edit the attributes of a layer The column headings that display in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab are attribute fields that are selected to be visible in the Design View of the Attribu
67. available only for road routes Repeat these steps for each road type When you are finished setting your road preferences click Review to display your settings In the Route Features list select the check box for each feature you want to display e Show Location MapNotes Displays Location MapNotes with their coordinate information for each point in your route e Show Comments MapNotes Displays comments about your route e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each waypoint and the finish point of your route e Display Waypoint Labels Displays start stop via finish labels on the map when the route is created e Include State Borders Shows or hides state borders in your route directions only available when Road is the selected route type e GPS Voice Navigation Provides spoken route directions when you are tracking with a GPS receiver After initializing the computer speaks the directions for the next turn in your route It repeats the instructions approximately 90 seconds prior to arriving at the turn e Display Route Vias Shows or hides your route vias on the map In the Voice Alert text box type the amount of time in seconds that you want to elapse before the computer alerts you of your next two turns Note Because it may take the computer a while to speak turn information it is recommended that you designate at least 60 seconds for the voice alert Click Done Note Click Use Defaults to restore
68. be specified The result type Is integer_expression CONTAINS CONTAINS Return TRUE if the first string contains string expression an instance of the second string and string expression FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression COUNT Return the number of rows in table The result type is integer_expression DATEADD DATEADD datepart Returns a new datetime value based on numeric _expression adding an interval to the specified date date expression in units specified by datepart The result type is date_expression DATEDIFF DATEDIFF datepart Returns the interval between two date expression datetime values in units specified by date expression datepart The result type is integer_expression DATENAME DATENAME datepart Returns a string representing the date expression specified datepart of the specified date 142 DATEPART DAY EQUALS FLOOR GETDATE IS NOT EMPTY IS NOT NULL LEN LEFT LTRIM Working With GIS The result type is string_ expression DATEPART datepart date expression Returns an integer representing the specified datepart of the specified date The result type is integer_ expression DAY date_expression Returns an integer representing the day datepart of the specified date The result type is integer _expression expression EQUALS expression Returns TRUE if the two expressions are equal and FALSE otherwise EQUALS is synonymo
69. ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Pasting a Bitmap into XSym 240 PROTOFIGQNE jisiieniiniettarwawaenenewni sated 7 PICtUIre cece eee 17 231 238 240 241 PEC Le siceceosecos eeeaticic ear a ea aces tava erieseameeataeae 261 Placing Draw Objects 227 230 PONa stunner A ane naa 106 Playing Back a Log File 0000 ee 290 PN iaeds Crime tutaieementendavcnaetias 324 325 326 POSCAN aaora aE ON 182 PONS aen E 36 182 POOO rreri 229 230 Previewing a GPS Log File 291 Print 17 30 165 166 167 170 172 278 Print Maps with a Transparent Background OE eT eT TRE eee Te E TT 172 Print Maps With a Yellow Black BACK OFOUNG viitacinitatncetseisdeeuieen 172 Profile 34 252 253 255 257 258 PROF ECESs oeitiialinimaereceeh tars 59 60 62 Properties 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 106 Publicly Managed Lands eeees 36 Q Qualitative sree see teeaerie iar 117 QUAN Earne aae a S 118 QUClY arn iei 156 159 161 162 OQUICKS EI CN enaa aA 178 187 R Radio Coverage Ellipse Connection 73 RANGO aeien N ee 118 Raster Properties cccceeeeeeeeee eee 71 Read ONV eues cues 149 Recalculate When Off Route 285 Receiving a ROUute cccceeeee eens 330 Receiving a TraCK cece cece ee eeeeeeees 331 Receiving Waypoints eeeeeeeeees 331 Recenter Map on GP S 285 289 Recognition SettiNgS c
70. cece cece ccc cee nsec eee eeee ee eeeeeeaeeeseeaneeeeenssaaaeenes 42 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas 3 iissasevisstisive vesaainabeeeein wie tsaere seer Saeroiscieriierptacersba rans 44 Viewing Two Maps at the Same TIM cece cece ccc eceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegeneeneeeeags 45 SHOWING OF HIGING TADS riir aa i a odavere a a aa eieala aetna aeration 46 Importing Exporting Tab Manager Preferences c cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeetanas 47 Reordering the TaOSkaciasconankdcaaincedoneworrnrns E ea veal ce OA 48 Using Keyboard SMOMCUES S iarna a E E N enemies 49 Selecting a Keyboard SNOrtC UtS Chemen aaa E EA 49 creating New Custom SCHEME cicinieenyiien tee E ee beneatis 49 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom SchemMe s s sssserererererrererrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrere 49 Customizing a DeLorme Scheme ccc ccceceeee eee e cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeettsegggenrengs 51 Renaming a Custom Scheme srein redie aa vie aah a a a ee iai 51 Deleting a CUSTOM SENEM E eira a O E a E 52 LMPOFLING lt a Custom SceNeMe orire E E EE EEA TA 52 EXDOrlinG a CUSLOM SCEME eraa a a a aaa a eas 52 Searching FOr COMManGS maera E a A A 53 Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme s sesserererrerererrerererrrrerrrrrrerrrrsrerrne 53 Jsmo Prorects Map Dal as cies wuncins aipu e o a oa e peie en 55 Map Data OVelViGw orriren aA TAE EE ATENE TOE AN I A T E VETE 55 Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs LOCATIONS
71. click the Navigation tool on the toolbar To undo your last action click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo your last action click the Redo button To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool am if you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool automatically commit your changes Moving or Changing the Scale of a Geometry This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Edit tool on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an empty existing layer To Move a Geometry Use the following steps to move a geometry 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit 2 Click the Edit tool on the toolbar 112 Working With GIS 3 Move your cursor over the geometry a gray box displays over each object as you hover it and click the object you want to edit Small white squares indicate the edges and corners of the object Note To move multiple geometries drag your cursor to encompass all of the geometries you want to move Then position your cursor over one of the geometries and move it in the direction you want to move all geometries 4 Drag the object to the new location To Change t
72. click the Select Al button to select the default export area for the layer 5 Type a name for your map package in the Enter map package name box 6 Click Save ed E When you sync your project the map package will be sent to your device Notes e To clear the highlighted grids from the map click the Clear All button HB oa 306 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices e To view a previously exported map select it from the Saved Map Packages list and then click View fa View e To delete a previously exported map select it from the Saved Map Packages list and then click Delete XK Delete e Vector data points lines polygons may look slightly different in the software than on the device e Lines Blazed Trail Sewer Line Water Line Drain Line Gas Line Electric Line Telephone Line Ticked Fence Post and Rail Fence Barbed Wire Fence Guard Rail Stone Wall Vegetation Line Completed Dozer Line Line Break Completed Highlighted Geographic Feature Man Made Feature Uncontrolled Fire Edge Fire Break Incomplete Directional Arrow e Polygons e Points Wetlands Bare Ground Rock Lake or Pond Island Land Mixed Forest Evergreen Forest Only Earthmate PN Series point symbols are supported on PN Series GPS devices If you use other symbols they will be changed to PN symbols for display on the device Data and Zoom Level Information e IMPORTANT The data types
73. close talk microphone the recommended position is a thumb width from the corner of your mouth and slightly to the side For more information see the note at the end of this topic e When issuing commands to the computer use the same tone that was used when during the speech recognition engine training e Keep the microphone as far as possible from the car radio or console computer Speakers or other speakers e f your microphone is near your speakers and you are using the microphone together with voice reminders GPS VoiceNav the program may recognize some of the words that it is speaking and react to them Here are ways to eliminate this problem e Make sure that you have chosen the Voice Output device speakers headset and the Input device on board microphone headset microphone that you intend to use with DeLorme GPS voice navigation Use the selections that are available in the Voice settings tab in the Options dialog box e If more than one speech recognizer is available in the drop down list choose the most recent highest version number e Your best speech recognition responses will always be to use a close talk microphone with voice output using the laptop speakers rather than a headphone speaker so that the computer will not hear itself e If you are speaking with someone else in the room have a radio or television on and so on the computer may think those sounds are commands to follow Select the Microphone che
74. columns inside the Address Book dialog box Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact You can center the map on any address book contact you have with the Go To function in the Address Book dialog box To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact 1 Click the Find tab 194 Using Address Book Contacts 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click the contact 4 Click Go To The map centers on the selected contact Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Editing a Contact In Your Address Book Once you have imported your address book contacts you may need to edit the information if your contacts have moved changed phone numbers etc Instead of importing the information again you can simply edit the information To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Double click the record you want to edit OR Click the record you want to edit and then click Edit 4 Edit the applicable information 5 If you want to move the contact select the method to place it on the map from the Update Location drop down list 6 Cl
75. cree uti pin ei Acta aee ce tented aA athens at cea et E E ee ot noe 294 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition cece ccceee sees cece ects eeeeeeeeeeeeeessananenes 296 VOICES OV El VIEW esi as a E ee ya ws earn die Paw Seed een as Pea ea Cie pee mee 296 VOICE 0 gamut rrr Re eer arene Ra a ee ie or nm eee er ee eae oe ee ere 296 Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition ccc cece cee cee ence eee eeeeeeeeseneeeeeteanees 297 Training the Speech Recognition Engine cc cece ce cesee eee e ee eeee eee eeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeesseages 297 VOICE COMIMANGS aeina a A a erties eases 299 Speech RECOGHIVION NDS eraris ateen a sad leon evan a te tedereiu bread Oded ae 301 Cia Gling Voce OUOU essere na e e a A E E O aaa 303 VOICE PrEre ren CO Saaana a a a a a a A ed ET 303 VOCEIRO NP US aeran e a tee eid wn E nye due cums A 304 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices sssserssrrrerrrrrrrerrrererersrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerererrene 306 PN SereS GPS OVERVIEW irrarerar i aa A E Na 306 creating MapD PACKAGES viii abatediatniceasuiaaitida e a eT aaa ataare ad 306 SYynciNd Maps aNd D tdreusat naiean n a a a EAE Eaa 311 vi Table of Contents Using Tnird party GPS DEVICES cians wae viene tain a aes Pane ee aaa ve 325 Sending ROUTE AfOFMaLON ereraa a a sas eea ee eh 325 Sendin LACKS sncaresnsvae inser oeemra seaman ninieniaa E a EE 326 SEMIN Wayponts a a oul tele g ina einnactad a ead 326 RECEIVING ar ROUTO ainera rneer
76. dialog box The data zoom level affects interval display Scale Bar ndicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in the measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options dialog box 21 XMap User Guide The overview map Is a small map in the lower right corner of the screen that offers a wide angle view of your current map view area It is approximately three data zoom levels out from the current map view Tips e Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map center This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the larger current map view e Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map Point anywhere on the view box When the pointer becomes a P drag the view box to the new location i a WASHINGTON Charlotte Toolbar Use the toolbar to perform many functions in the application without navigating through the tab area Tips e Not all of the toolbar features are activated by default To modify which toolbar items you want to view right click the toolbar Toolbar options with selected check box next to them are currently displayed on the toolbar Click the item to activate or inactivate it on the toolbar In addition to customizing which toolbar features are displayed you can also reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically J ust drag the vertical dotted bar that separates each segment to the new lo
77. down list 165 XMap User Guide Tips e If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print area or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box Selecting this check box locks the print area and changes the tab label to red e Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire print area Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level e Add text or graphics to your map To change printers or make choices for transparent yellow background paper orientation paper size and paper source click Setup The Print Setup dialog opens Note From the Setup dialog box click Properties to view additional options If the options are available set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics Consult your printer manual for additional information Click the Print button to print your map To save a map to a file see Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image To adjust the print area of a Page map select the Lock Print Center check box select the Select tool A and then drag the frame to the new position Printing a Route and Directions You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create Additionally you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file For more information see Saving Route Directions as Text For specific recommendations on best printing results see your printe
78. eeeeeees 222 Deleting ProjectsS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 59 Deleting Your Entire Address Book 197 DeLorme OpenSpace Transfer Files 91 Descending Distance ceceeeee eee 255 Descending Elevation cceeeeeees 255 Design View 065 138 141 147 149 Dilution Of PreCiSION ccccee eens 293 Directos wie tise inners 166 272 278 Disable Screen SaVel ccccceeeeeeeees 285 DISHA V snpniatstmavernaterdaanmeiaen 40 41 Display Route VIAS cece eee cece eee ees 278 Display Waypoint Labels 5 278 Displaying Basic Map Features 36 Displaying Routes on the Map 282 DIVEF QING korini a aera 117 Drag ANd ZOOM euni an EEE A LS Dragging a Bitmap into XSym 241 Draw 199 203 204 205 206 207 208 212 213 214 216 217 218 219 221 222 224 225 229 230 231 235 238 241 274 Draw CONNECTION cccceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 71 Draw Geometries Tool ceeeee eee 30 Draw LAY Cl oane a a a ees 204 Draw LNE TOON sainan e 108 Draw Point TOO cccccceeeeeeeeees 108 Draw Polygon Tool cccceeeeeeeeees 108 DAW TO0l BOX ercu a tahun seid 243 Duplicate the Source Layer 99 E EISIN camicivedivracs Oas 255 EdOE Matcare enen 30 111 EdIE POINTS TOO pijtsiuctaier eriaacereias 30 109 EGIE LOOM nsrdvenemrstieeur wrenreeawneueinsed 30 Editing a Contact In Your Address Book EE E
79. exceed the value of your certificate you are prompted to click Submit Order OR If your order exceeded the value of your certificate you are prompted for payment Step 7 Download your imagery or data When the download is available you are sent an e mail to the e mail address you provided when you registered 1 Click the NetLink tab and click Downloads 2 Expand the Your Data list 3 Select the check box for each dataset to download and click Download Selected Step 8 View your imagery Once the download is complete the map will display your imagery or data You can also view NetLink data through the Map Data tab 333 XMap User Guide 334 Using the XMap API Command Window XMap API Command Window XMap includes a command prompt utility XMapi that allows you to control the application via the command line The interface provides access to simple commands for performing a variety of basic operations such as panning and zooming the map performing quick searches and creating routes All operations are triggered from the command line but control the running application You can create scripts and use the XMapi executable to run them within your organization Any commands that require further input prompt the user through the standard XMap user interface To Open the Command Window TO open the command window From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap 8 gt Tools and then click XMap API Command Wi
80. existing symbol or to create a new symbol 1 Click the Draw tab O T M 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool e 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Under Symbols in Set select a symbol from the symbol selection 6 In the Draw Tool Box click the Select tool 7 Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol and then click the Copy button under Edit Symbol 8 Click the Paste button oe under Edit Symbol The copied image Is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid Drag the pasted piece into the place you want it within the current symbol 239 XMap User Guide OR To create a new symbol with the copied image click New under Symbols in Set to clear the Symbol Editing Grid and then click the Paste button to add the pasted image into the grid Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 9 Click OK when finished Notes e To undo an action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat an action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol Pasting a Bitmap into XSym You can copy a bitmap or part
81. export commands or with referencing user created ini files on the command line You can use the XMap Bulk Importer Exporter to export all file types Supported in the Export dialog box You can export files with the bulk exporter in three different ways e Enter export parameters directly into the command line e Creating a ini file that specifies the export parameters then reference this ini file in the command line 87 XMap User Guide e Creating a bat or cmd batch file that specifies the export parameters for multiple files then run this batch file directly in the command line All exported OpenSpace layers require you to specify at least four parameters in the command line following the xmapexport command The required exporting parameters include text in red reflect the user s information e source server the SQL server where the database for exporting resides Note If the server was created on your local machine type lt computer name gt xmap 7 If you are connecting to an external server see your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information e source db the OpenSpace database the layers are being exported from e output file the file format and extension for the exported layers e source layer the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported OR source layerid the identification number of the layer in the openspace database Optional exporting parameters include text in red reflect the user s information e query nam
82. fix The geometry moves to the current GPS location e Manual Click the new location on the map e Map Center Moves the geometry to the map center Delete geometries To delete the selected geometries click the Delete button Add new geometries 5 Once you have finished using the form click Close or close the dialog Managing Forms This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Manage Forms dialog to view your existing forms copy forms and modify forms it is available only when you have forms in the active layer For more information about XMap Forms see the Forms Overview To Manage Forms Use the following steps to modify a form 1 To open the Manage Forms dialog box do one of the following Click the GIS tab and ensure the Workspace tab is selected e Click Tools point to Forms and click Manage OR e Right click a layer in the workspace table point to Forms and click Manage In the toolbar click the Forms menu button and click Manage Forms 2 You can do the following View details about the form Click the form in the list Its details appear in the area below the form list Open a form Select a form or forms and then click Open Modify a form Create a copy of a form Select the form you want to copy and click Create Copy The Forms Designer dialog box opens You can modify the new form or just click OK to create an exact copy If you
83. form you must first create and export an XMap only form to a folder on your computer the form is comprised of HTML and J avaScript files edit the files using your own tools and then zip the files and import them to use as a custom form Custom forms cannot be used on a PN Series GPS device For help with custom forms visit www xmap com forms 6 Under Form Operations select the actions the form allows the user to make The available options depend on the layer type For point layers all three options are available For polygon and line layers the Add option is not available and the form type You can lock specific fields so they are view only see step 10 View Data The form user can only view the form Edit Data The form user can view and edit attributes for a selected geometry GIS object Add Data The form user can use the form to add new geometries as well as view and edit data 153 XMap User Guide e Allow Deletions A button is added to the form the user can delete the selected geometries from the layer Use caution when enabling this feature PN compatible forms do not allow deletions 7 In the Form Description box type a description for the form This appears at the top of the form HTML is allowed 8 Under Attributes in Layer select the attributes from the layer that you want to add to the form Note that if the fields in the attributes have constraints it will affect what data appears on the form
84. given point You Should be able to tell what the coordinate format of the image is by viewing the X and Y coordinates Optional Use the Magnify drop down list in the upper left corner of the Image Window to magnify the image in the Image Window and zoom in on the map in the Map Window until the image and map are approximately the same viewing resolution Note Use the Magnify function and zoom in on the map to place more accurate points and more accurately register Optional Click the Rotate Left tool to rotate the image left OR Click the Rotate Right tool to rotate the image right Optional If you want to change the color of the background of the image select a color from the Background drop down list 93 XMap User Guide d Click Done The image and map are linked and display at the same scale Note Click Cancel at any time to cancel the import process 11 Under Datum Selection select a coordinate format from the Coordinate drop down list and then select the datum that applies to your imported file WGS84 NAD83 or NAD27 from the Datum drop down list If you selected this Perform this action coordinate system Degrees Lat Lon Go to the next step SPCS Under SPCS Parameters select the applicable zone and units from the drop down lists UTM UPS Under UTM Parameters enter the zone number and band letter in the boxes Note If you select a coordinate format that does not match the data in the file
85. has a hyperlink to its website To open the hyperlink right click the feature and then click Open Hyperlink OR click the URL in the Info tab To Create a Profile To create a profile L 34 Center your 2 D map on the area with the linear object you want to profile OR Center the route you want to profile on the map Click the Profile button on the toolbar gt Move your pointer over the map The pointer changes from to when it passes over an object that you can profile Using the Toolbar 4 Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile When the object is selected it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile tab area Note Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the terrain profile These lines indicate the height and distance of the particular location A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map You can also right click a linear object or route on the map and click Profile For more information about profiles see the Help topics under Profiling Linear Objects To Choose Options TO open the Options dialog box click the Options button c ele on the toolbar Use the Options dialog box to set preferences for program options The Options dialog has the following tabs e GIS e GPS e Voice e Find GPS Radar e Map Features Basi
86. http www nar associates com nurbs Copyright c 2009 David F Rogers All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the David F Rogers nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 349 XMap User Guide THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
87. hyperlink files When you create a transfer file with hyperlinked files you can choose to maintain the directory information of common files By doing this the recipient of the transfer file can keep a similar directory structure as the creator This is helpful when a transfer file is shared and updated between users Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data To Import a Transfer File Use the following steps to import a transfer file including transfer files that have been e mailed to you by other DeLorme users 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box opens The default location is C DeLorme Docs Projects Browse to another location to change it Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Import to finish the import process The imported project opens and displays in the map view To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file attachments 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box opens The C DeLorme Docs Projects directory displays by default Browse to another location to change it Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Im
88. in your layer that you want to classify Note for small layers Only fields containing fewer than 100 unique values display in the Field drop down list The options in the Field list are based on the visible attributes in the Design View of the Attributes subtab When you select Unique Value as the classification method all visible numbers and strings are available in the Field drop down list 8 If you selected a numeric field in step 7 select the field by which you want to divide the field in step 6 from the Normalize By drop down list Note When you select a field to normalize by classes are created based on the ratio of data in the first field to the second field for each attribute record 9 If you selected a numeric field in step 7 select the decimal place to which you want to round your value from the Round At drop down list 10 From the Vary By drop down list select how you want to vary your value Note The Custom option allows you to customize classifications that do not follow a set scheme or pattern If you change the symbolization of a class in an existing classification the Vary By option automatically changes to Custom and any new classes that you add to the classification are assigned the default symbology for that layer s geometry type for example green in color 11 If you selected Fill Color in step 10 select a color scheme from the Scheme drop down list e Sequential Displays a color that progresses from low to high
89. is active 11 Click the object again A text box displays Type the label in the text box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Editing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete at any time To Edit a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following steps to edit an area draw object 1 2 2 containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done The Draw dialog area displays Click the Select tool A and then click the object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active To edit multiple objects click the Select tool Al and then drag a box around the objects that you want to edit Change the object s fill outline and or width option OR If you selected a single circle drag one of the magenta squares around the circle to change the circle s size The center of the circle remains in its original location OR If you selected a single rectangle click one of the corner points of the rectangle and drag to change its width height and area on the map OR If you selected a single polygon click one of the shape points of the polygon and drag to change its bearing or angle the leg length a
90. is active The shape points of the draw objects display as small magenta squares 2 Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag A new point is created as well as a new line segment within the object The new segment displays with its first and last end points as well as a text box indicating the new point s bearing or angle length of the new segment leg and total object s length on the map Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button 9 to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects You can delete points from routable road routable trail track line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool Al and click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it is active The shape points of the linear objects display as small magenta squares 3 Select the shape point The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line segment it is ass
91. is the same as deleting all geometries in the target layer and pasting in all geometries from the source layer Example 1 SOURCE LAYER w Neme te 3 ENE TARGET LAYER cio Name we a fes foom ooo RESULT 97 XMap User Guide io name type Example 2 SOURCE LAYER w mme te TARGET LAYER RESULT Higgins Rd lt NULL gt lt NULL gt lt NULL gt OpenSpace Considerations When appending OpenSpace layers the following rules apply 1 If the source layer has a column with a formula that differs from the formula of the same column in the target layer the target layer s formula overwrites the source s layer s formula and is automatically applied to the entire layer 2 Classifications are preserved in both the target layer and source layer The target layer s active and default classifications are adopted in the resulting layer 3 If the source layer and target layer have identically named Extended Attribute Sets that contain different attributes and join rules the attribute sets are automatically unlinked from the target layer when replace occurs The source layer maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets and the new result layer adopts it 4 If the source layer has a different label structure than the target layer the target layer s formula is adopted and automatically applied to the entire layer 98 Working With GIS 3 If the source layer and target layer have ident
92. item on the map without moving the map single click an item in the results list It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map view This is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want but point labels are not displaying Notes To select multiple items press and hold the CTRL key while clicking up to 350 items in the results list If the items are listed continuously click the first item in the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want e You can adjust column widths The new size is retained until changed again You cannot rearrange the column order Different search types result in different column orders e There are two types of results lists Most searches provide a fixed number of results If all of Scroll Browse the results do not fit in the screen area a scroll bar Bar Buttons automatically displays A Some searches provide results you can browse This means the entire database displays with the best match highlighted It is possible to continue browsing to the first or last item in the database Leala b db Keywords for Category Searches Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both general and specific searches using category keywords Try entering words that seem appropriate Keyword Samples The list below shows a few of the categories that expand to reveal sample keywords Sample keywords may be l
93. key and click the first and last file To Delete Multiple Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete several draw objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool A click the first draw object on the map to select it and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete A box displays around each selected object OR To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool A drag a box over the draw objects you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then click Manage Draw Delete Draw Object A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from the current file e If you click Yes all selected draw objects in the file are deleted You cannot undo this action e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file To Delete All Draw Objects To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file click the Draw tab and click a draw object button that represents the draw file you want to clear for example if you want to clear a RoadLayer click the Routable Roads tool al and then click Clear All A message box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from the current file e If you click Yes all draw objects in the file are cleared You cannot undo this action 220 Using the Dra
94. lines travels along the top of the 252 Profiling Linear Objects terrain profile These lines indicate the elevation and distance of the particular location A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map An Info box displays the profile statistics and user data see Statistical Data and User Profile Data for more information To Profile Multiple Linear Objects e To profile multiple linear objects press the SHIFT key on the keyboard while clicking the items you want to profile Thin vertical dashed lines display in the Profile graph indicating the beginning and end of each chosen segment e To make it easier to profile multiple linear objects use the Draw tab to join them e To clear one of the multiple objects you have profiled press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking the profiled object on the map Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs The Profile tab lets you view two profile elevation graphs the profile graph and the overview profile graph To View the Profile Graph 1 055 1 it 1 025 ft 1 000 ft OO Latitude N44 28 467 975 ft Longitude W707 51 600 Barkers Brook Elev 1 022 0 ft 0 mi 200 ft Grade 6 The profile graph automatically displays when you select an object to profile It shows a two dimensional image of the elevation associated with the selected object Distance and elevation are indicated below and to the left of the graph respectively Use the following ste
95. list e True North The direction to the north pole This is the default setting e Magnetic North The direction that a compass needle points 4 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Resizing the Map and Tab Areas You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary right map secondary left map tab area and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools Notes e The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose another tab e Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on the number of results e You can also hide the tab area panel To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas 1 Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows The pointer becomes a OR Point to the horizontal edge of the tab main map window The pointer becomes a _t 2 Drag to resize 3 To cancel the resize while dragging press the ESC key on your keyboard The size just prior to this resize is restored To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools The map resize tool runs perpendicular to the tab area If the secondary and primary maps are both displaying the resize tool is the bar that separates them When the bar is moved all the way to the left of the map only the primary map
96. listed may not exist in your project The data shown in 307 XMap User Guide 308 the list is determined by the data you have connected on the Map Data tab Click a data type below for more information The optimum data zoom level ranges for each raster data type is provided GIS Layers 0 20 Selected GIS layers in the current GIS project You can preview a GIS layer in the Handheld Export tab from your workspace in the GIS tab These layers will be visible on your device but cannot be edited To edit GIS points on your device you can use the Export Points dialog to send a GIS point layer or specific points to an SD card in the device using a GPX file If the point layer includes a form you can attach it Once you have finished editing points or adding new points to your device with the proper permissions you can import them to XMap and merge them with your GIS layer Draw Layers 1 20 All draw layers in the current project excluding waypoints and tracks User Raster Data 0 20 Selected MrSID and GeoTIFF data in the current project Image Data Series 0 20 User raster data registered to the map using the ImageReg tab DeLorme USA Street Level Data 9 17 DeLorme XMap USA Canadian Street Level Data All vector data points lines and polygons excluding draw objects in XMap Street Level Data and all user vectors on the map MapTags and so on The Street Level Data must be installed separately from
97. location BRWN Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find tab in the Options dialog box In the program s tab area click the Find tab Click the GPS Radar subtab button From the Find drop down list select the category to search for example Gas Stations Restaurants etc OR From the Find drop down list select Custom and then click the Custom button In the Radar dialog type a keyword or phrase to search for a specific point or to search for multiple POI types such as Chinese restaurant or Mexican restaurant To use the Custom search to search for waypoints or GIS points use search general or specific terms such as draw symbol map pin GIS layer GIS point GIS layer or waypoint lt layer name gt for example hydrant or waypoint To turn the search repeat on or off click the Repeat Timer button D this button controls the Repeat Search Every check box on the Find tab in the Options dialog box Click Search The search results display in the list box Click a search result to select it A green highlighted line displays on the map between your current specified location and the point of interest s location Note Click Recenter to center the map on the selected point in the route Click I nsert Stop to insert the selected search result into your current route Select the Info option to view the information about the point including the distance from the current location OR Select the Directions
98. manner consistent with the maintenance of DeLorme s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your obligations hereunder No Copies The copying of the System any portion of the System or any of the printed materials accompanying the System is strictly prohibited All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A SEPARATE EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTACT DELORME AT PROSALES DELORME COM FOR DETAILS AND PRICING WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMER Limited Warranty on Media DeLorme warrants that the media on which the System is furnished shall for a period of sixty 60 days from date of receipt the Warranty Period be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use If a defect in the media appears during the Warranty Period return all materials to DeLorme for replacement or at DeLorme s option a refund of the license fee Disclaimer of Warranty DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the System or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error free TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED AS IS AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHAN
99. meet different user needs e Create forms that contain different attribute subsets e Create one form for viewing one for editing and one for adding geometries GIS objects e Create forms with different permissions by making specific attributes read only Suggested Uses for XMap Forms e Use in the field or office to set up regulatory compliance reporting and data collection e Combine with XMap pipeline stationing functionality to set up more productive field navigation and data collection e Attach images and other files to forms e Develop your own completely new approach to data collection Form Rights Create Access Remote Local Server Local Server Server localDB non Enterprise Enterprise non DB DB Enterprise DB Remote Server Enterprise DB XMap No Sync Note t Cannot share layers stored on a localDB Forms cannot be shared over the network gt Forms can be shared over the network PN Compatible Forms Supported Attributes for PN Series Compatible Forms 151 XMap User Guide Only the following field types are supported for use in PN Series compatible forms e Biglnteger e Boolean e DateTime e Double e Float e Integer e String e Memo e Unicode e UnicodeMemo Classification and Symbolization To make full use of the symbol set that is available on a PN Series GPS classify and symbolize the GIS point layer using the Earthmate PN Series symbol set e
100. minor adjustments to it without overwriting the classification Copied classifications are created as new independent classifications To Copy a Classification Use the following steps to create a copy of an existing classification Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to copy Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 From the Classification drop down list select the classification you want to copy 6 Click the Manage button and then click Copy 7 The original classification is retained and the new classification is named Copy of lt classification name gt 8 Click OK eA W NBE Renaming a Classification This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Classifications names are based on the field name by default You can change the default classification name using the Rename feature in the Classify Layer dialog box The classification is used in the print legend To Rename a Classification Use the following steps to rename a classification Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to rename Click the Tools button and then click Classify The C
101. option to view directions to the point from your current specified location Tutorial Find Points of Interest on a Route You can search for points of interest POIs such as restaurants and truck stops along a route using the POIs subtab in the Find tab If you are traveling with GPS you can use the 184 Finding a Location on the Map Radar subtab to find the closest waypoint GIS point or point of interest to your current location Note You must install the XMap North America Topographic Data to use routes and POIs Step 1 Create a route The route in this tutorial was created with right click menu options For more information about the different ways you can create routes see Creating a Route 1 2 E R fa ey 40 q 706 er 4 wie Ss Right click the location on the map that you want to set as your route start point to Create Route and then click Set as Start Right click the location on the map that you want to set as your route finish point to Create Route and then click Set as Finish You can follow this same procedure if you want to add insert stops or vias in your route l ine Denver L E Wi 3 Add MapNote n Step 2 Use the Find tab to search for POIs L 2 Click the Find tab and then click the POIs subtab Type the name of the point of interest you want to search for such as Flying J Exxon McDonalds etc in the Name text box Type a keyword for the point of i
102. or to add railroads or utility lines You can draw lines with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file You can draw arcs with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map The first and second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base The third point placed between the first two determines the radius of the arc and fixes the arc in place Use splines to add trails or any other map feature that contains curves You can draw splines with varied line colors weights and styles including lines that reflect actual map line types Note As you draw a Spline points are entered in much the same way as those entered when creating a line The difference between a line and a spline is that when you enter each point the line segment between the points curves instead of staying Straight To Draw a Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to draw a line arc spline 1 Click the Draw tab f Ag 2 Click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool 7 ew and select the tool you want 3 Select a line arc spline style from the Style drop down list 224 Using the Draw Tools Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a line arc spline color If available select a line arc sp
103. page map Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges not along the seams 7 For each seam fix the tape to the work surface not on the sheet so the tape is in alignment with the seam 8 Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam Be careful not to let the tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it in step 9 175 XMap User Guide 9 Keeping the length of the tape taut carefully apply the tape to the seam until both sides are fixed to the work surface 10 Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together 12 Using the straight edge ruler carefully trim the edges of the map at the seams where the tape Is affixed to the workspace 13 Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges You are now ready to display your multi page map 176 Finding a Location on the Map Find Overview There are four Find options you can use to search for and locate places and other map items The search options available depend on your datasets QuickSearch Search for places addresses cities towns ZIP Postal Codes and coordinate positions If the item you are looking for is not recognized the Advanced tab displays automatically POI s Search for specific points of interest such as hotels restaurants hospitals department stores etc Search a specified distance from the current map center or along
104. party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual Se Click the Sync button on the toolbar Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Receive from Device Select Route from the Object drop down list Select Route from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the route name or route number on the device that you want to receive Select the route file you want to add the route information to If you want to create a new route file select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the available text box Click Receive from Device 327 XMap User Guide 13 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to receive from your device 14 Click Finish Receiving a Track Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive tracks created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program Note When you open a track you ve imported from your GPS device you may notice that the track does not join existing roads Use the select tool in the Draw tab to snap the end node of the track to a road For more information see Snapping Draw Objects To Receive a Track
105. remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected draw file Note To select multiple draw objects in the file list press and hold the CTRL key and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last file Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right click feature in the draw file list In order to move a draw object to another draw file a secondary compatible draw file must exist Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file If you do not want to remove it but copy it to another draw file see Copying a Draw Object from One Draw File to Another To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to move a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5 Right click the draw object you want to move point to Move To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to all compatible draw files display in the Move To list 216 Using the Draw Tools The
106. road trail line arc or spline 1 Place a routable road trail line arc or spline on the map 2 Right click the line object on the map and click Create Route from Line The original line object is retained in its draw file and a new direct route is created 215 XMap User Guide 3 To view information about the route click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right click feature in the draw file list Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while placing a copy of it in a selected draw file If you want to move a draw object to another draw file see Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5 Right click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file point to Copy To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to The draw object
107. rotate pan in the same direction as the left map select the Link 2 D and 3 D Map Rotation check box The 2 D map updates after the 3 D map finishes panning rotating Note If you do not select this check box you can use the data zoom level tools above the left map window to adjust the zoom level of the 3 D map If you want to view billboards on your 3 D map select the Show Billboards check box Note If you receive a message saying that 3 D billboards cannot be displayed ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest drivers and that it supports DirectX and transparencies To select the cursor graphic that you want to display on the 3 D map when GPS tracking select the symbol type from the GPS Tracking Cursor drop down list To select a vertical exaggeration value click one of the vertical exaggeration graphics from left to right flat 1x 2x 4x or 8x 2 Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box 266 OR Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog box Routing Creating a Route You can create a road trail or direct route using the Route tab right click feature or the toolbar Once you create a route you can use the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and display routes on a map Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences To show remove routing MapNotes waypoint labels state borders and route vias enable disable GPS
108. route from here F9 Show turns Show directions Show list Map Commands Displays your route on the map Adds current GPS location as a stop and recalculates the route Adds current location as a stop and recalculates the route Activates the Show Turns dialog area in the Route tab Activates the Directions subtab in the Route tab The following table shows main map voice commands If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command Spoken Command Pan left ALT Left Scroll left ALT Left Pan right ALT Right Scroll right ALT Right Pan up ALT UP Scroll up ALT UP Pan down ALT DOWN Scroll down ALT DOWN Zoom in ALT PAGE DOWN Zoom out ALT PAGE UP Zoom in lt gt times Zoom out lt gt times Zoom level lt gt Previous map Go back 300 Response Pans or scrolls the map left Pans or scrolls the map right Pans or scrolls the map up Pans or scrolls the map down Zooms in one level Zooms out one level Zooms in the specified number of levels Zooms out the specified number of levels Zooms to specified level Displays the previous map Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition GPS Tab Commands The following table shows GPS voice commands If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command Monitor GPS Displays the GPS Monitor subtab GPS Monitor Center on GPS ALT P R
109. server see your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information Viewing the Supported File Types and Required Parameters Type xmapimport list supported files in the command line and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard to see a list of supported file types File Types That Contain Spatial Reference Information Supported spatial file types that contain spatial reference information include e Arclnfo Interchange files e00 e AutoCAD Data Exchange file dxf or dwf 85 XMap User Guide e AutoCAD Draw file dwg e DeLorme Draw files an1 e DeLorme OpenSpace files openspace e ESRI Shapefiles shp e MapInfo Table files tab e MapInfo Exchange files mif These files often contain intrinsic spatial reference information but this is not always the case When they do not additional parameters will need to be supplied in the command line to enable import If these parameters are not specified you will receive the following notice when trying to import The spatial data source does not offer spatial hints and none were specified on the command line Required parameters for this file type xmMapimport target server SQL Server name target db OpenSpace DB name source file file and path Optional parameters include layer name name of the layer to be created replace layer name of the layer to be replaced append layer name of the layer to append to replace all replace dat
110. symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Click Remove The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and the next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 7 Click OK when finished GPS Device Custom Symbols You can use DeLorme XSym to create custom symbol sets for use with your DeLorme PN Series GPS device or a compatible third party GPS device If you are assigning waypoint IDs to symbols for a third party device use the Waypoint ID text box shaded green to make the assignment If you are assigning symbols to use with a PN Series GPS click the button in the GPS area shaded orange The image on the button changes based on the symbol you have selected ard party devices PN Series Devices You can create a custom symbol set and assign the symbols to the symbols on your PN Series GPS To Assign Symbols to Symbols on a PN Series GPS 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Waypoint Track tool _ to view its hidden options Select the Waypoint tool 3 Create a new symbol set 4 Create a symbol 5 Under GPS click the symbol button the image on the button varies to open the PN Series symbol set 6 Click the PN Series symbol to which you want to map your symbol 7 Click OK 242 Using the Draw Tools
111. the Directions subtab in the Route tab Center on next turn Centers map on the next turn Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab What is the next stop Speaks the next stop name distance to stop bearing to stop and time to stop Displays the Directions subtab in the Route What s the next stop tab Next stop Show next stop F7 Displays current location and next stop Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Center on next stop Centers map on the next stop Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab After that Speaks the next stop or turn information depending on the previous spoken direction Are we there yet Speaks the finish name time to finish and distance to finish Show finish F8 Displays current location and finish on the map Center on finish Centers map on the finish Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Directions Speaks the next turn next stop finish name time and distance Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Where am I Speaks current route segment heading speed town county and state 299 XMap User Guide Coordinates Shush F4 Be quiet F4 Speaks the coordinate of your current location Silences GPS voice navigation but does not turn it off Voice nav on F2 Turns voice navigation spoken turn directions on Voice nav off F2 Turns voice navigation spoken turn directions off Show route Back on track Continue
112. the Sun Moon compass In the center of the compass a shadow grows and shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the compass similar to a sun dial e Sun rise set and Moon rise set information e Moon cycle information such as the day of the moon cycle and the phase About GPS What is GPS ae eee The Global Positioning System GPS applies modern technology to the ancient basics of navigation The U S Department of Defense has developed and launched a series of positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation These satellites are used as reference points much the same way stars have been used in conventional navigation Using these satellites a GPS receiver can determine your position anywhere on the globe GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position elevation speed and direction of travel Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for tracking vehicles recording routes and much more How Does GPS Work The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites each carrying several atomic clocks to ensure the most accurate time possible The satellites broadcast low power radio waves containing 294 Using GPS the satellite s identity code and the exact time to the nanosecond that the message was sent When a GPS receiver picks up a satellite signal it identifies the satellite and compares the signal time with its own clock The time difference represents the time it has taken for that r
113. the GPS tab to view the current satellite status Sat Info is a toggle button that switches to Status Click Status to return to the original Status dialog area Dilution of Precision Dilution of Precision The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of Precision PDOP 000 your Horizontal Dilution of Precision and your Vertical Dilution of HDOP 440 Precision For definitions of these terms see Glossary Terms YDOP 0 00 Satellite Listing Satellite Listing The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are currently visible in the sky The columns list the satellite number elevation azimuth and signal to noise ratio Satellite Listing information is only available for DeLorme receivers and NMEA compatible receivers Almanac Almanac When using a DeLorme GPS receiver the Almanac window displays the satellite number and its current status N Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation E Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite T Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your GPS receiver D I ndicates differential data is available for that satellite Notes e Differential data is available on WAAS enabled devices e Almanac information is available only for DeLorme receivers Skyview The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites their number assigned by the Department of Defense and their position in the sky relative to your current positi
114. the earth into account so line and polygon geometries that span long distances do not appear curved on the map e Spherical This geometry shape is best for large scale mapping and is more complex than Planar As a result spatial analysis operations may take more time It does take the curvature of the earth into account so line and polygon geometries that span long distances appear curved on the map Note Changing a layer to or from the Spherical Geometry type may lock up the database while you perform the operation e Unregistered dxf dwg and dwf layers only This geometry shape is used for imported layers dxf dwg dwf that have no spatial reference on the Earth Until these layers are registered with the Working With GIS Register tool you cannot perform spatial analysis Once registration is completed for a layer it is automatically assigned the Planar type e Geocode geocoded layers only This geometry shape is used for geocoded point layers and has special attribute properties When you edit the attributes of a geometry by which the layer was geocoded the spatial location of that geometry is repositioned accordingly e Redline redline layers only This geometry shape is used for the GIS Redline layer automatically produced in Enterprise databases GIS Redline layers are special layers that are the repositories of all redlines produced by the redlining sync process as part of an Enterprise database subscription
115. the length of the line segment leg and the total length of the entire line object on the map When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon draw object a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total area of the polygon on the map Draw objects such as routable roads routable trails tracks lines splines and polygons consist of shape points and end points Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object They give the object its shape When you select a draw object on the map Shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares The line object below was drawn with the spline tool End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line spline or polygon A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment Notes When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available when using the Polygon or Line tool and selected it displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the
116. then click Open Single click the file you want to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location start time start coordinate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log Log files have gpl extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 5 Click Open BRWN 6 Click the Play button CE to begin playing back your log OR Drag the slider in the Progress Bar see graphic at the end of this topic to the point in the log you want to play Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x which occurs in real time and takes the same amount of time as the original trip did for example if your trip took six hours the on screen tracking process also takes six hours You can also e From the Playback Speed drop down list select an option 2x 5x 10x 25x or 50x to increase the tracking speed accordingly e Click the Pause button H to pause the tracking of the log file The Pause button turns blue to indicate the file is paused Click the Play button to continue playing back the file e Click the Stop button OE to stop the play back To start the file over click the Play button again 290 Using GPS e Click and hold the Rewind button to rewind the log file to a particular point e Click and hold the Forward button be to fast forward the log file to a particular point e Drag the slider in the
117. time you can do it later Important If you do not relocate your address book the entries may not be accurately placed according to the latest DeLorme road data To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book Use the following steps to relocate address book entries except manual entries on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Relocate All A confirmation message displays 4 Click OK to relocate the entries Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map Once you add contacts to your address book you can show or hide the contact information on the map To Show Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map Use the following steps to show hide address book contacts on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and enable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar OR Clear the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and disable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar Notes 196 Using Address Book Contacts e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dial
118. to add reference data to a layer There will be multiple rows in the first set left side of dialog box that correspond with a single row in the additional set right side of dialog As a result of this duplication of right side values the data is read only and meant solely for reference An example is a counties layer that links to state based reference information There will be multiple counties linked to a single state linking Many to one linking requires an XMap 7 XMap 8 compatible database Once you link an attribute set to a layer you can unlink it by clicking the Options button clicking Manage Sets selecting the attribute set and then clicking Unlink To Link a Set to an Attribute Use 148 the following steps to link a set to an attribute 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Select a layer from the workspace list Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button Pal 4 5 Click Options 6 Click Link The Link Attribute Sets dialog box opens OR Click Manage Sets and then click Link The Link Attribute Sets dialog box opens 7 Under Layer Attribution select the existing layer or previously imported attribute set you want to link to the imported file from the Set drop down list Then select the attribute in the attribute set that has an identical field in the imported file from the Attribute drop down list 8 Under Additional Attribution select the
119. to bring into the draw file point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object in the list The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections Saving a Track as a GPS Log You can save any track as a GPS log with the right click feature To Save a Track as a GPS Log Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log 1 Place a track on the map 2 Right click the track point to Manage Draw and then click Save as GPS Log File 211 XMap User Guide Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C GPSLogs Docs GPSLogs Type the file name in the File Name text box Click Save The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created Viewing the Contents of a Draw File Once you create a draw file draw road trail waypoint or track layer you can view the contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To View the Contents of a Draw File Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw road trail waypoint or track file L 2 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a sel
120. total length of the entire line object on the map 201 XMap User Guide e When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon draw object a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total area of the polygon on the map Draw objects such as routable roads routable trails tracks lines splines and polygons consist of shape points and end points e Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object They give the object its shape When you select a draw object on the map Shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares The line object below was drawn with the spline tool e End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line spline or polygon e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment Notes e When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available when using the Polygon or Line tool and selected it displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total leng
121. transportation car bicycle or on foot e The route calculation road quickest road shortest direct or trail Special routing preferences such as establishing speeds for particular road types preferred roads roads to avoid and more You can also create a route on a map using the right click function or with the route buttons on the toolbar These two features let you create routes while using any tab in the program For more information on using these alternative methods see Creating a Route For more information about adding stops and vias see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias Note You must install XMap North America Topographic Data to use routes This tutorial provides steps for creating a driving route with one stop and one via Step 1 Set the route start Click the Route tab and type the start location for your route in the Start text box Step 2 Add a stop 2 2 Routing Assign your first stop by typing it in the Stop text box Since you are adding your stops in the order you want to reach them along your route make sure the Add option is selected and then click Add to assign the stop Note The Stop text box clears itself after you click the Add button This allows you to use the text box to add more stops idaho Springs CO Step 3 Add a via To use a specific road or go through a certain town type the place in the Via box Since you want the route to calculate based on the geographic location o
122. use as a data source for your current and future projects AND OR Click Add select a data folder from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK Click Done To Remove Base Data Use the following steps to remove base data from your current and future projects 1 2 3 J Click the Map Data tab Create a new or open an existing project Click Data and then click Base Data The Data Locations dialog box opens and lists each of the data sources on your system Click to select the data source you want to remove from your current and future projects Click Remove Click OK when the confirmation message displays The base data is removed from the list OR Clear the check box next to the base data you want to remove The base data is kept in the list but is removed from the current and future projects Click Done Setting Data as Routing Data The first dataset added to your project is the default routing dataset however not all datasets support road and direct routing If you are using more than one dataset in XMap you can determine which dataset to use for routing To Set Data to be Used as Routing Data Use the following steps to assign a dataset for routing 58 1 Click the Map Data tab In the Primary Map window the dataset that is currently set to be used for routing displays the routing icon ae to the left of the dataset name Under Primary Map highlight the dataset you want to assign as your r
123. you are importing the information area under Converted Boundaries displays Invalid Boundary Coordinates 12 Click Finish Append and Replace Examples This topics provides additional information about appending and replacing imported files Go to Replace Examples Append This import method is used to append or merge a new layer to an existing GIS layer The new layer must be of the same geometry type as the existing layer and attribute columns must have an exact name match in order to append to each other In addition like named attributes in the incoming layer must be of the same type family in order to append The importer will be as tolerant as possible within a type family allowing data to convert or widen For example a 100 character string column in the source layer will widen to match a 200 character string in the target layer and vice versa The following list shows which attributes are compatible and the direction of compatibility Boolean gt Byte gt Small Interger gt Interger gt Big Integer String lt gt URLs String gt Memo Float gt Double Datetime Document Currency Memo Notes e By definition any attribute is automatically compatible with itself and its precision if applicable can widen or narrow e The master attribute and changes tables of the target layer are not emptied The incoming data is written to the primary attributes table The changes table has an entry written to it for
124. you must initialize it before you use it The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the correct communications COM port and updates the current settings Use the following procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with your application d Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the on receiver if necessary Click the GPS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from the current map display Click the Options button E E on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the GPS tab in the Options dialog box OR Click the GPS tab and click the Options button EE Options From the Device drop down list select the type of GPS receiver you are using If your device is not listed select Generic NMEA Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default settings for the selected device From the Port drop down list select the communications port you are using to attach the GPS receiver to your computer See your computer manual for further information You can also change the location coordinates update the date time options set tracking options and select GPS options See To Set GPS Options above 287 XMap User Guide Notes Click OK to exit the Options dialog and return to the main GPS tab Click Start GPS on the GPS tab OR Click the Start GPS button
125. your map Work can be done on one draw file at a time while viewing other files beneath it You can select different draw files to be the active editable file from within the Draw tab For more information see Editing Locking Draw Files e Draw files created in a particular project are displayed only if that project is currently displaying For example if DrawLayer27 is created in a project named Yarmouth Zoom 14 only DrawLayer27 does not display if a project named Old Port is currently displaying e Routable roads and routable trails are not tied to a project they do not change even when a project is changed What Are Draw Objects Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the Draw tab Draw objects consist of line area or point objects You can copy move delete and add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another project e Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points such as e Routable Roads e Routable Trails e Tracks 199 XMap User Guide e Lines e Arcs e Splines e Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects such as e Polygons e Rectangles e Circles e Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symb
126. 0 and you click the Zoom Out 1 tool the left map displays at zoom level 5 0 and the right map at 7 0 The overview map in the tab area is always associated with the right map window Other tab functionality may be affected by use of the split screen function as follows Draw The line and polygon draw tools work in either map window The Select tool hy highlights the same draw object on both maps and you can then manipulate both objects at the same time Draw files are created for both windows in the same project Route You can create routes only in the right window routes display in both windows GPS You can log with GPS in the right map window log playback displays in both windows 3 D The 3 D map always displays in the left map window Showing or Hiding Tabs The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding individual tabs You can access Tab Manager Notes During installation After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu From the Start menu If you use Tab Manager while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes To show or hide the entire tab area panel click the arrow next to the Options button c ome on the toolbar If the tab area is showing and you want to hide it click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it If the tab area is hidden and you want to show it click Show Tab
127. 0 1 minute grids or 22 500 12 second grids A 5 minute grid 25 1 minute grids or 625 12 second grids A 1 minute grid 25 12 second grids 1 5 9 x 30 1 N A N A N A 4 20 degree minute 30 36x5 1 N A N A 6 20 minute minute 5 25x1 324 36 1 N A 8 20 minute minute 309 XMap User Guide 1 25x 8 100 900 25 1 11 20 minute 12 second 12 N A 202 500 22 500 625 25 13 20 second Data Zoom Level Scale Bar Translation Your DeLorme application and your Earthmate PN Series GPS device use different methods for representing the map s scale In XMap scale is represented as a data zoom level 1 19 The Earthmate PN Series GPS device uses a scale bar based on the measurement units chosen in Device Setup The following table describes the correlation between data zoom levels in your DeLorme application and the scale bars on the device Scale Bar Label 8mi 8N 8NM 8k Ami 4N 4NM 4k 2mi 2N 2NM 2k lmi 1N INM 1k 0 5NM 310 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices Syncing Maps and Data Sync Overview You can use Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box to sync waypoints tracks routes and maps in XMap with an Earthmate PN Series GPS device PN 30 and later models ae Click the Sync button on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box You can also open the Sync dialog box by clicking the Sync button on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab See the following Help topics for more info about synci
128. 177 182 183 187 191 194 196 238 FING OPON S vsctncevineertearemwidowrvineeteies 177 Finding a Custom Symbol 238 Finding a Symbol by Its Name 187 Finding Points Near Your Current Location EO T A O 183 PIO GU cher eis a a ae nena Oat 139 Flying Over a 3 D Map ceeeeees 262 Formatting a Text File to Import as a DAWG EWS pea coca acre cuca noasaumonaiats 210 PONS nerna 150 152 154 156 Frequently Asked Questions 006 7 PUG Sciam tel wide T Panes bei 271 Function DeSCriptions cceeeeeeees 141 G Game Management Districts 36 GEOCOO Cearn r A 91 106 Geometry SNape c ccc eceeeeeeeeees 106 GEO TIER vider ede unrated reaees 56 Getting Back ON Track cceee eee e es 289 GIS 30 75 81 90 91 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 117 118 120 121 122 123 124 126 128 130 131 136 138 139 141 147 149 156 159 161 162 Global Positioning System 294 GPS 33 183 285 288 289 290 291 292 294 GPS OPDUONS erea aa win anatase 285 GPS RAGA cirnu aie an a taken de 183 GPS Voice Navigation 296 303 GlaD ANG Pan tuitiicuiecarciwmeatevcrageacts 30 Grade sarrerek A 255 Eao E a e E EE ETT 69 Ea e e A E A E E E 36 H PICAGIING erar ea a ETE 292 Hidden Draw TOols cceeeeeeeeeeees 203 FIGS ROULE ccnwi ot susrhansedernsveduas Mi eivieniaes 282 Hiding Address Book Cont
129. 222 Labeling a Layer cc cece eee eeeeeeeees 130 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote 281 kana COVEN cerien earned eons 36 Large POI Symbols ccceeeeee eee ees 41 LIUU Gerania a aE 255 LAY ClING oseere N ATE 162 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map cceeeee cece es 172 Learning the BaSICS cccseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 LEJEN pectic eas E 24 103 LO EE EET E E E ities 224 Linear DIStANCe ccceeee eee eeeeeeeees 255 Linking a Set to an Attribute 147 Load Template ccccceceeeeeeeeeees 122 EOGI aaa a 87 89 338 339 LONGU G Greece eE EE 255 LOW DENSI marssiin a 68 M Magic Wand TOol ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 MaQnification cccccceeeeeeeeeees 40 285 MaKe STOD rerien ENR 280 Make Vie migreren en 280 Manage Layers cceeeeeeeeeeeees 30 101 358 Map Center Crosshair sssssserererrrrrer 36 Map COOS arne ana a a 40 Map Coordinates cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Map Data 55 56 58 59 60 61 62 65 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 Ma Ele wiriiiainistukieannarses ria 159 Map Features cccccceeeeeeeeeeaees 36 39 Map GGG G ainmne E 24 Map PONS aneti erete E 67 Map Rotation Tool cccceeeeeeeeees 21 MAD WANG rerna n a e nee ees 91 WIADINOQEC epia a eiteaeedenee 231 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and DeletUNG tics isdavatidsecitaommaiagavendies 191 Maximum Break cccccccseeeeeee
130. 3 70 16406667 43 48 4910 N 70 09 50 64 W 43 48 4910 n 70 09 50 64 W N 43 48 4910 W 70 09 50 64 434829 46 N 700950 64 W 43 70 Advanced Search W709 52 W 070 09 8440 W0700950 6400 N 43 48 30 N 43 48 4910 N434829 4600 N 43 48 29 46 434829 46 43 80818333 70 16406667 43 48 4910 N 43 48 4910 n N 43 48 4910 434829 46 N 13 XMap User Guide MGRS USNG 19TD 06354 51187 Same as QuickSearch 19TDJ 0635451187 NAD27 19TDJ 06355109 19TDJ 064511 19TDJ 0651 UTM UPS 19T 0406311E 4850964N Zone 19T Easting 0406311E Northing 4850964N 19T 0406311 4850964 Zone 19T Easting 0406311 Northing 4850964 19T 0406311 4850964 Zone 19T Easting 0406311 Northing 4850964 SPCS ME W 0500490 0355150 Zone ME W Easting 0500490 Northing 0355150 Use this example for USNG with non standard datum Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Locations In versions of XMap prior to XMap 6 and in other DeLorme products your projects draw files route files log files imagery and other DeLorme files were stored by default in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your computer s C drive unless you specified a different directory during installation For XMap 6 and newer versions e The DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is located in the Documents folder under your user name e The DeLorme Docs folder for NetLink downloads is located in the DeLorme Docs folder under
131. 4101 Avoid entering a period in your text Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop down list of previously used search words and examples The Search For drop down list keeps a history of your successful search words during a session and between sessions To delete your search history select Clear History from the drop down list Click No to delete the search history in the QuickSearch drop down list Click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book Entry preview a result on the Handheld Export tab or assign it a start stop or finish in a route Just right click a search result and click the option Performing an Advanced Search The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by controlling what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking for it using the Within field The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find selection 179 XMap User Guide Type text in the fields and use the drop down list to see examples and your recent searches The fill in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find and Within selections You can also search for more types of ite
132. 46 47 Template ei rra r aA ween 122 Terrain Distance ccceeeeeeee neces 255 TEXT LaNena Ta 231 Tips on Viewing Search Results 188 Toolbar 22 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 TODO COIG onein ena 40 Topological ccceeeeee cece eeeeees 106 108 Town Borders lt ndtarsicranensavearianerpriattere 36 Track 207 211 225 226 288 289 329 331 FracKEa y Cl a a E 204 I AULAY CF acrctettedene venue ieena A 204 360 Training the Speech Recognition Engine a E reece a aierewe a ane tea eaten yeae aces 297 MANS el File cirean eatumnawe 62 65 Transparent 124 126 128 159 Travel Package cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 TUA DCU lS ereina a 166 Tutorial 184 263 272 275 334 U WIMP G serrie en nie oa EET 35 36 Unigue V le cinei Ena 117 Unregistered ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 106 Urban Area Color ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Use Custom Map Features 05 39 Use High Contrast Colors 006 285 USGS Quad Line Connection 70 USGS Quadrangle Coverage 36 Using the Command Line 83 8 Using the Transparency Option 244 V ASEE E EA E endo E gears 67 Vertical RESIZE TOOL ccce cece iiien ea 44 MAS visio saredeotn devi eka aoe Saeed ed one ed es 268 Viewing a 3 D Map ccceceeeeeeeeees 261 Viewing a Layer on the Map 102 Viewing a Legend for all Visible Layers 103
133. 71 Changing the Radio Coverage Ellipses PrODErtIES urrina an i a 73 Changing the Raster Properties 71 Changing the Scale of a Geometry 112 Changing the Shaded Relief Properties 72 Changing USGS Quad Line Connection Propert leS nrscicdesienueemireliandekiiobetes 70 Changing Vector Properties 05 67 Changing Voice Output s sesererserern 303 Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats 12 355 XMap User Guide CINGIECS eaaa a a A 229 230 Classification TOOIS ccccecececeeeeeuees 30 Classifying a Layer with a Range 118 Classifying a Layer with a Single Value 120 Classifying a Layer with a Unique Value E EE eee hes epee AAA aed ee 117 Clear ERA hs cakies i sutaatava ware E AAEE 290 Clearing a Profile 2iciiien feciieindities 258 Climbing Distance ccceeeeeeeeeees 255 Climbing Elevation 0cccceeee eens 255 Closing Existing WorkFiles 246 COG O ware tanticcetete ae cece 30 115 Commit Changes ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 COMDaSS ROSE crean eo a A 21 Constrained fielder area 139 Contour Properties ccceee cece eeeees 68 COT POU S rane tens AOA 36 CONO PANE eenaa 21 Converting a Route to a GPS Log 284 Converting MapTags to MapNotes 191 Coordinate Formats ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 Coordinate Geometry Editing 115 Coordinate Preferences 65 42 69 COOMGINALES sicesiwiscerirerseanindew
134. 9 Click the single arrow button gt to move selected attributes to the Attributes in Form list If you want to send all the attributes you can click the double arrow button gt gt without selecting individual items Note To remove items from the Attributes in Form list reverse this process 10 To lock an attribute field so that it cannot be edited in the form click the check box next to it in the Attributes tn Form list A red lock icon appears next to the attribute You can select multiple items to lock at the same time 11 To view the form immediately after you create it select the Open form after editing check box This is not available for PN compatible forms 12 Click Create Note If you are modifying a form click OK OR If you are going to create a custom form click Export OR Click Cancel to exit the dialog To Modify a Form Use the following steps to modify a form 1 To open the Manage Forms dialog box do one of the following e Click the GIS tab and ensure the Workspace tab is selected e Click Tools point to Forms and click Manage OR e Right click a layer in the workspace table point to Forms and click Manage e Inthe toolbar click the Forms menu button 7 and click Manage Forms 2 From the Layer drop down list select the layer with the form you want to modify or select All Layers 3 Select the form you want to update and click Modify The Forms Designer dialog box opens This provides the sam
135. A and click the item on the map e To make graphic items added to your map the same size press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard or drag to select two items right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the menu e After you add text graphic items to your map you can align snap or layer them on the map To Add Text to Your Map Use the following steps to add text to your map 1 2 10 168 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Framed Text tool OR Click the Unframed Text tool Ti Click the location on the map where you want to add your text A text box displays When not in editing mode you can reposition your text by dragging the text box to the new position Type the text in the text box To type more than one line of text press SHIFT ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when finished typing your text Under Layout Tools select the font style and size for your text from the drop down lists U To underline your text click the Underline tool 1 To change the color of your text click the Font Color tool E From the Color dialog box you can e Click to select an alternative color Click OK when f
136. A on your keyboard 6 To increase the pitch press ALT W on your keyboard OR To decrease the pitch press ALT S on your keyboard 7 To increase the distance elevation press ALT Page Up on your keyboard OR To decrease the distance elevation press ALT Page Down on your keyboard 8 To pan the map to the right press ALT Right the right arrow on your keyboard OR To pan the map to the left press ALT Left on your keyboard 9 To pan the map forward press ALT Up on your keyboard OR To pan the map backward press ALT Down on your keyboard gt To Fly Over a 3 D Map Using the Pan Tool Use the following steps to fly over a 3 D map 1 View a map in 3 D 2 Click the 3 D tab to open it and drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the direction to view Tutorial Fly in 3 D The 3 D feature lets you fly over the 3 D map letting you simulate an upcoming hike or road trip This is great for when you want to get a feel for the elevation differences and Surroundings along the way Step 1 Create a route Create a trail route using right click options the toolbar or the Route tab For more information on creating a route see the Creating a Route tutorial or Creating a Route Help topic 263 XMap User Guide Step 2 Save the route as a GPS log file Right click the calculated route and click Save as GPS Log File THEA LET F e Tou NS DP a ee a va a e E w paea ae
137. Area Panel to select the check box To Show Individual Tabs 46 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Use the following steps to show tabs using Tab Manager 1 3 4 9 Open XMap click the arrow next to the Options button y on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click Tab Manager Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order Click OK Exit XMap Open XMap To Hide Individual Tabs Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of XMap Use the following steps to hide tabs using Tab Manager L 3 4 gt Open XMap click the arrow next to the Options button ca aie on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click Tab Manager Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program OR Click Minimum Only the required tabs will display in the program Note Find Map Data Info GIS and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be hidden Click OK Exit XMap Open XMap Importing Exporting Tab Manager Preferences Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager preferences with other XMap users To Import Tab Manager Preferences Use
138. Classification to a Template File sich ates nea Rateable below wate obese 121 Saving a Draw File cceeee eee ees 204 Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image sie shoe T nate E E E ihe emia meneame 17 Saving a Proj CCl si aranan aO 60 Saving a ROULEC cece cece cece eeeeeeeees 283 Saving a Track as a GPS Log 211 Saving Route Directions as Text 278 SCALE Bal inca tami e a aiar 21 Searching for Address Book Contacts 193 Searching for Attributes 000e 136 Searching For Commands 0008 53 Searchiho HDS aiicscsewiciinaeaswermimesnate sats 19 Selecting a Geometry to be Read Only 149 Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme 49 Selection TOObsicioitnscieeiwiesapinteteunciaes 30 Sending Route Information 328 Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device 329 Sending WaypoOints cccceeeeeeeeees 329 S COUCMUIAN nisreen 117 Server NAME cccceecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeuenaaes 7 Setting Data to be Used as Routing Data echo antes edt alana tee Reagents aa caeode 58 Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation Te a ee I E ee eee 257 Setting Units of Measure Preferences 42 Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences 266 Setting Your Routing Preferences 278 Shaded Relief iracunda 36 72 Show All Commands 0008 297 299 Show Attributes cece cece eee cere ees 135 Show Comments MapNotes 281 359 XMap User Guide Show GPS Bread C
139. Click the Select tool Al click the waypoint and click the waypoint again do not double click The waypoint text box opens Type the new name in the box and press ENTER on your keyboard OR click away from the box Deleting Draw Objects Once you place a draw object on a draw file you can delete the object You can also delete multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file To Delete One Draw Object Use the following steps to delete a draw object 219 XMap User Guide 1 Open the existing project that contains the draw object you want to delete 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click the Select tool Al and then click the draw object on the map to select it A box displays around the selected object 4 Click Delete in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then select Manage Draw Delete Draw Object Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted click the Undo button H to undo the last action You can undo approximately 200 events in a single project Note You can also delete a draw object using the right click feature in the draw file list Click the File button in the Draw tab click to select the Draw File that contains the object you want to delete click More right click the object and then click Delete To select multiple draw objects in the file list press and hold the CTRL key and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files press and hold the SHIFT
140. Color button and select a standard fill color or create a custom fill color To change the fill style for your feature using one of the many hatch fill options click the Fill Style drop down list and select a style OR To hide the fill color on the map clear the Show Fill check box To change the outline color of your feature ensure the Show Outline check box is selected click the Outline Color button next to Outline under Polygon Features and select a standard line color or create a custom line color Then select how wide you want your outline to display from the Width drop down list OR To hide the outline color on the map clear the Show Outline check box To change the properties of your label ensure the Show Label check box is selected and then e Select a different font from the Font drop down list e To change the font style click the Bold button e I talic button E U or Underline button l You can also click More Styles for additional font style options e To change the font color click the Font Color button L and select a standard line color or create a custom line color e To change the font size select a size from the Size drop down list e To hide the label on the map clear the Show Label check box 129 XMap User Guide 6 7 Notes Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels the text may appear cluttered on the map If this is the case ensure the Declutter Text check box is sele
141. Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Using the Draw Tools Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab Editing a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image Once you add a point object to a draw file you can edit name only copy move or delete it at any time You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by dragging a box around the objects you want to edit Any changes are made to all of the point objects included in the box To Edit a Point Object Use the following steps to edit a waypoint symbol MapNote text label or image 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool es and then click the point object on the map twice 3 Type anew name or phrase in the Label field change the name s font style size or color select a new symbol or click the Hyperlink button to change the URL address 4 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point object s active area when you are finished Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes You can add your own MapNotes to a map MapNotes have a white background that make them highly visible on the map They can contain multiple lines of text and can be moved off o
142. Draw Layers to Another XMap User You can package projects including their routes and draw layers into one transfer file for convenience The transfer file facilitates e mailing copying project information to other computers and copying projects between DeLorme programs Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Locations In versions of XMap prior to XMap 6 and in other DeLorme products your projects draw files route files log files imagery and other DeLorme files were stored by default in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your computer s C drive unless you specified a different directory during installation For XMap 6 and newer versions e The DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is located in the Documents folder under your user name e The DeLorme Docs folder for NetLink downloads is located in the DeLorme Docs folder under Public Documents This allows all users on the computer to access NetLink downloads What is Migration The migration process does not move your files it copies them to the new locations When you are sure your files are working correctly in the new locations you can delete them from the old locations as long as you are not using them for another DeLorme program For example if you have an imagery file you use in Topo USA or XMap 5 x or earlier keep both files Because all new information you add to a project will be saved to the new file location even if you open it fr
143. E LAT LON 43 807801 70 164440 LAT LON 43 807629 70 163801 LAT LON 43 807211 70 162746 LAT LON 43 806 707 70 163400 END 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END Arc BEGIN ARC BEGIN ARC LAT LON 43 807801 70 164440 LAT LON 43 807704 70 162775 LAT LON 43 807211 70 162746 LAT LON 43 807430 70 163644 END END Polygon BEGIN POLY BEGIN POLY Rectangle LAT LON 43 808692 70 165392 LAT LON 43 808692 70 162493 LAT LON 43 806621 70 162493 210 Symbol MapNote Text Label LAT LON END BEGIN CIRCLE LAT LON Radius END BEGIN SYMBOL LAT LON Name Symbol Name END BEGIN NOTE LAT LON Text END BEGIN TEXT LAT LON Text END Copying a Map Line to a Draw File Using the Draw Tools 43 806621 70 165392 43 808692 70 165392 END BEGIN CIRCLE 43 807662 70 163935 0 114611 END BEGIN SYMBOL 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme Blue Pin END BEGIN NOTE 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme END BEGIN TEXT 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme END Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads and highways railroads power lines pipelines rivers or streams Zip Code boundaries and grid lines To Copy a Map Line Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file 1 Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level OR Open the project with the map view you want 2 Right click the object on the map you want
144. E E E A ETT 195 Editing a Route sssssssesererererereren 280 Editing a SYMDOI cc cece eeeeeeeees 237 Editing Draw Objects 226 230 233 Editing Points in a Polygon Line Layer 109 Editing RoadS viiictisaesvsaeiivevnispiaceeaes 280 Editing the Attributes of a Layer 131 Editing Locking Draw Files 206 Elevation cccceeeeeees 21 73 257 292 EIEVOLION Galanes aoas 255 Elevation GraphS sssesesrerererrereren 253 Elevation Properties ccceeeeeee cence 73 E mailing a Transfer File 05 65 Embedded document seeeeeeees 134 Enable GPS Voice Navigation 285 Enable LED on GPS Device 285 Enable Stationary LOgQINg 5 285 Enable WAAS Use ccccceeeeeee eens 285 Entering Address Book Information 194 Equal Interval ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 118 ES Ri aaauuter vous vaca A a pr unainas 91 Exchange Wizard 328 329 330 331 Exporting a Custom Scheme 5 52 Exporting a Layerlr cccceeeeeee ees 104 Exporting Draw Files to Text Files 206 Exporting Tab Manager Preferences 47 Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX PINGS wail eunua se radad cad T 207 Exporting Your Address Book 197 F FAO Six cbitadduVecsusiccdoriee obudeviveasiaueuenn 7 File PreViCW cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 291 PILED anena a N 159 161 Index Find
145. Enterprise You can preview a layer you want to export to an Earthmate PN Series GPS device in the Handheld Export tab To Preview a Layer in the Handheld Export Tab Use the following steps to preview a layer for export Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer to preview Click Tools and then click Preview in Handheld OR right click the layer in the workspace table and click Preview in Handheld The Handheld Export tab opens and map area for the layer is highlighted You can create a map package to send GIS layers to your device see Adding GIS Layers to a Map Package for more information From the Tools menu or the toolbar you can also export or import a point layer to a PN Series device BRWN Refreshing Your Database Connection This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise XMap has a Refresh View option that refreshes the data connections for each selected layer in the workspace getting the latest updates from the server This is especially helpful when multiple users are accessing the same layers in a database To Refresh Your Database Connection 105 XMap User Guide Use the following steps to refresh your database connections and get the latest update from the server 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the Layers button and then click Refresh View
146. GIS layer can review all of the redlines 1 Add the redline GIS layer to your workspace 2 Once the redline layer is in your workspace select the check box next to the layer in the Workspace view Outlined boxes display on the map red indicates incomplete redline edits and blue indicates completed redline edits depicting the map bounding rectangles for each redline record 3 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Datasheet View button E The attributes of the layer display Each record in the redline layer has the user s name date and a copy of the original redline file an1 4 To view a specific redline draw layer Click its hyperlink in the Redline Layer column A message asks if you want to save or open the file OR Hover your cursor in the specific cell in the Redline Layer column A floating arrow displays Click the arrow and then select Open A message asks if you want to save or open the file 5 Click Save to save the file to your hard drive ensure that the Open in XMap check box is selected The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map OR Click Open to open the file from its current location ensure that the Open in XMap check box is selected The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map 6 Use the notes and annotations in the draw layer to make the appropriate edits to the corresponding GIS layers to which the user was subscribed Searching for Attributes This Help
147. Hrs and Mins drop down lists and then click Done Note It is not necessary to allocate a fuel stop duration 2 1 XMap User Guide Viewing Route Directions After you create a route you can view the accompanying route directions To View the Route Directions Use the following steps to view the route directions 1 Click the Route tab and then click Directions to open the Route Directions dialog area The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left A selected check box indicates the route is displaying on the map 2 Click a route to select and highlight it OR Double click a route to center it on the map 3 The route directions for the selected route display in the right window Adjust the size of the tab area to expand the view Tip Click the header of a column to open a menu from which you can select the type of information you want to display in each column 4 Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg OR Double click a leg to center the map on the leg Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver select the GPS Track check box to follow along with the route directions in real time as you travel Click Show Turns to display the current distance and time to your finish Tutorial Create a Route There are several different methods for creating a route on the Route tab You can designate a start stop via and finish for your route You can also designate e Your method of
148. ICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE LICENSED SYSTEM The System consists of DeLorme s patented U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 and 6 321 158 other patents pending processes for the formatting storage retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data DeLorme s copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related functions and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to DeLorme or its licensors The entire System including the software documentation data compilations screen displays and map printouts are protected by U S and foreign copyright You have no ownership rights in the System Rather you have a license to use the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM Permitted Use This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a non exclusive basis for personal reference or business purposes on a single computer at one time You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal computer However one of these two computers must be portable and the software may not be used simultaneously on both computers Otherwise once you have installed the System on one computer you may use the System on a second computer only if you delete the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license Installation of any part of the System on a network is prohibite
149. If you selected the Coordinates option in step c click Next and go to the next step If you are importing a layer that contains a relative coordinate system a Select a transform from the Solution drop down list For more information about transforms see Registering an Image If you select Bilinear or Linear Conformal you must also provide rotation and distance unit information b Click the Select tool IS and place one point on the image and a corresponding point on the map OR If you do not know the rotation or units of the imported file click the Select tool and place two pairs of points on the image and the map XMap automatically calculates the rotation and scale automatically when you place two pairs of points Notes A e f you want to delete a pair of points you have placed highlight the point information in the Point list and click the delete button x e You cannot pan or zoom the map when the Select tool is enabled e When you place a point on the image the coordinates for that point display in the ImageX and ImageY columns of the Point list the coordinates are based on the coordinates in the imported image file When you place a point on the map the coordinates for that point display in the Latitude and Longitude columns e The X and Y values for the image update as your cursor moves over the image Move your cursor over the image to view the X and Y coordinates for a point in the image for the image at a
150. LL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE GDAL gtiff Format License Copyright 2002 Industrial Light amp Magic a division of Lucas Digital Ltd LLC 346 Legal Information All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Industrial Light amp Magic nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
151. Layer for a point layer dialog box The Add Symbols dialog box opens Under Add New Symbol Set click Browse Browse to the location where your dim symbol set file is located select the file and then click Open Click Add to List The symbol set displays under Existing Symbol Sets Note Select the new symbol set in the Existing Symbol Sets list to preview the symbols it contains Click OK to return to the Symbolize Layer dialog box Deleting a Symbol Set from the List of Available Symbol Sets Use the following steps to delete a symbol set from the list of available symbol sets L 2 130 Click the Add button in the Symbolize Layer for a point layer dialog box The Add Symbols dialog box opens Under Existing Symbol Sets click to highlight the symbol set you want to remove Click Delete From List Click Yes to confirm the deletion 5 Working With GIS Click OK to return to the Symbolize Layer dialog box Labeling a Layer You can use the attribute information in your layer to label the features on the map using the Set Label dialog box Note To view labels created using these steps the Show Label check box on the Symbolize Layer dialog box must be selected Labels have a 1000 character limit To Label a Layer Use the following steps to label a layer e W Ne Tips Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Select highlight the layer you want to label Click the To
152. Map User Guide When you use the Quick Search subtab on the Find tab or the Route tab to search for a location you must enter the information in a specific format Tips e Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below e Do not use periods e Search with the minimum amount of information to increase the number of results For example if you are searching for a road and you are not sure of the spelling type in part of the name and then scroll through the list of results until you find a match This table shows formats for search types For this type of search Use this format Address Street address City State 100 Baxter a Portland ME Street address ZIP Code 100 Congress St 04101 Street address City State 100 Congress St Portland ZIP Code ME 04101 ZIP Postal Code Within the U S 5 04096 digit ZIP Codes only J8E756 Within Canada 6 digit Postal Codes only For more information about the Find tab see the Help topics under Finding a Location on the Map About the I nterface Tab Area You can access most of the application s functions from the tab area at the bottom of the screen To access Help for a specific tab click the Help button 2 on the tab You can also reorder the tabs show or hide individual tabs or show or hide the tab panel e Map Data e GIS e Print e Find e Info e NetLink 20 ImageReg Draw Profile 3 D Route GPS Voice Getting Started Ha
153. Maparen aa a Sede a eae 30 TONS SA VeUG ls OOS sy sank eterna sta eet oie cei tet oben E E ata ree ar ree eniate 30 TOC e ARON Oae aa a a newdsen nin see e paar ea 32 TO Star StOp YOU GPS CONNECTION corrieri a E EAA 33 To Exchange Information with a Handheld GPS sssesesesessnsrrrrerrrrrererersrsrsrsrererrere 33 TO Measure DI Stan Cenere anaick seianiwar hori nendtinetsgrenicidinawetuate inet EE E ns saaner ennai 33 To Get Information About a LOCAtION c erei rerea eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegggereeneenes 33 O Chale a PROT C wicarniiince teantaaiaareaid a ale tab ance bere ine anar ane ane rear ham 34 TO CMOOSE ODUIOINS arrra n a a a taka aaa na tahoe ae ue eae ne tages ents 35 Customizing the Map and Lab DISPIAY iicdtindintenciteRerieaciias heeds EEE eka 36 CustoMiZing the INterface ccccccc cece cece eect sense ee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeetenanagaaes 36 Displaying Basic Map Features c cc cccccc cece ee eeeee cee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetegeeeetesageneeteagaes 36 Customizing the Map Feature Preferences cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeneeetegs 39 Table of Contents Changing the Map COlOlS airera ces siatanerentaamine T vera O E wwe ates 40 Changing the Map Magnification Level cc cece cece cece a aA EE Naaa 40 Changing How POIs Display on the Map c cece cece cece cee ee eee eeeeeee sees eeeeeeeeeeaeeeneengs 41 Setting Units of Measure Preferences
154. OOK serorei enak A tip bnereintinneesa usa a ea araa 197 Table of Contents USING The Draw TOONS aiisexdaeeintaaiund e A idan arb eea ane EO E 199 Draw OVERVIEW sia cscnreotetencnnetieeaseanenetadenituby a A aN 199 Viewing Piddenm Draw TOOS inre E E 203 Draw File Management cscs iy cis tows a a a E A A bade 204 USING Draw ODJeCl Sorire a arar e a aira are ae 217 Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs and SDPLINGS cc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 223 Circles Rectangles ANd PolygonS ccccccc eee e eee eee eens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeestageeeneeeagennes 229 Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and IMAGES cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 231 CUStOM SYMON aver beeen da ne acteara E T a ose eats aed 234 REGISTEFING IMAGES ussenia cedar eansaeshutiaumagea hiaresiaasaan a DiaAagon 246 Mag eRe OVElVIEW twiaiannivsiaheon vere A ner naa aed tan eanpewaranec wee 246 Creating Data for a Registered IMaGe cc cccccce cess cece E E a E E 246 Opening and Closing Existing WOrkKFil S cccce cece cece ee eeee nsec eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeetetanaees 246 Registering an IMAO Cieee EE E a Ra 247 Modifying Existing WoOrKFileS wiiviniivesiastisav ienaa aa iaa aaa r aaa iaaa 249 Deleting an EXIStING WOrKFIIG ear E A ee aed Bee ee 249 HINS FOR PlACIAG POINTS orere runnin ne Nava dha dan nays E row aaannE aaa 250 Pronino LinearO Di CCts is viniiatershal teavureshineoaent chiens lanai aie saat ee aden eel 252 Creatin
155. Progress Bar to view a particular point in the log You can atl Yo tis fl giL ee et ee J mr W Previewing a GPS Log File There are two ways to view an existing GPS log You can play it back and watch it in real time point by point or you can preview it and view the entire log area without waiting for the playback to finish To Preview a Log File Use the following steps to preview a log file Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Single click the file you want to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location start time Start coordinate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log Click Open 6 Click File and then click File Preview The map centers on your log location Viewing File Details for a GPS Log oe a If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you ve been on the map the File Details option in the GPS Log subtab can give you a variety of information about your journey For even more specific information about your log simply play back or preview your log and then right click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time the point was obtained as well as the speed bearing elevation and GPS status for that particular point To Vi
156. Public Documents This allows all users on the computer to access NetLink downloads What is Migration The migration process does not move your files it copies them to the new locations When you are sure your files are working correctly in the new locations you can delete them from the old locations as long as you are not using them for another DeLorme program For example if you have an imagery file you use in Topo USA or XMap 5 x or earlier keep both files Because all new information you add to a project will be saved to the new file location even if you open it from the old location we strongly recommend that you migrate your files If you do not you could have project data in two DeLorme Docs locations your project will work correctly but your data will not all be in the same location 14 Getting Started Project Migration When you migrate a project all associated files routes draw layers and connections to GIS layers in a database are moved with it To Manually Migrate a Project Use the following steps to migrate a project at any time 1 Click the arrow next to the Open button on the toolbar and then click Migrate Project OR Click the Map Data tab click File and then click Migrate Project The Migrate Project dialog box opens 2 Browse to the project you want to migrate click the project and then click Migrate 3 The Migration Completed dialog box opens Go to step 5 OR If a file with th
157. RIGHT HOLDERS THAT THE SOFTWARE DOES NOT INFRINGE THE PATENT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF ANY OTHER ENTITY EACH COPYRIGHT HOLDER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF 345 XMap User Guide INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE AS A CONDITION TO EXERCISING THE RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER EACH USER HEREBY ASSUMES SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO SECURE ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS NEEDED IF ANY THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN MISSION CRITICAL SYSTEMS SUCH AS THOSE USED IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SYSTEM COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH PERSONAL INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES ShapeLib License Copyright 1999 Frank Warmerdam Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
158. S position as your stop or via location Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list e Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names e Right click the map where you want to insert the stop or via 1 Right click the map where you want to insert the stop or via 2 Point to Create Route and then click Insert Stop or Insert Via e Use the toolbar to insert a stop or via 3 If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via 270 Routing OR Click the Calculate button Go on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route and click Calculate Road Quickest Calculate Road Shortest Calculate Trail or Calculate Direct Note Ifthe program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK 4 Click Directions to view the route
159. Source drop down list or click the Browse button to browse to a new location 5 The list of GPX files on the device and their associated layers displays Select the check box for each file you want to merge 6 If you want to delete the GPX files from the device or other location once they are merged into XMap select the Delete GPX files from source after merge check box 7 Click Merge The files are merged into the GIS layer 324 Using Third party GPS Devices Sending Route Information Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your device 1 2 os ae aa ods 11 12 13 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Cay Click the Sync button on the toolbar Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device To av
160. Symbolize Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Symbolize OR XMap GI S Editor and Enterprise only Right click a polygon on the map and click Symbolize Under Symbolization each row in the table displays each of the classes in the layer Each column in the table indicates 128 Working With GIS This Column Displays Field Sample The minimum and maximum or unique values of each class name Feature The current visual property for each class Legend Label The current label for each class The Null Class indicates any object whose attribute value falls out of the classification The Highlight Features label lets you visually identify which records have been queried The field you chose while classifying the layer displays each of the features for that layer Each of the features are selected to be shown on the map by default 5 Click the feature for which you want to change the properties To change the opacity of the color of your feature from the Opacity drop down list select Opaque 0 transparent Transparent 100 transparent Blended 50 transparent or XOR combination of the source and background pixels most useful when records with the same symbolization overlap Tip The Blended option is very useful for viewing polygons and map data Type your drop down text here To change the fill color of your feature ensure the Show Fill check box is selected click the Fill
161. TABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE No Consequential Damages N NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES No Implied Right of Use Please note that there may be private in holdings within the boundaries of land indicated or designated by the data included in the System as public Nothing in this Agreement grants the use of or is intended to imply the right to use private property You should respect all landowner restrictions You are responsible for your own safety and for the consequences of your actions in your use of the data TERMINATION AND TRANSFER DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason including but not limited to if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way Termination will be effective upon written notice to you Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to 342 Legal Information promptly return all copies of the System documentation and other materials furnished to you or made by you including unauthorized copies Termination is in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme All provisions relating to property rights Shall survive termination You are not authorized to transfer your
162. Tags click the Delete Tag tool kal A message box displays Delete all MapTags Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to retain all MapTags To delete MapTags from other tabs 192 Right click the MapTag and click Delete MapTag Using Address Book Contacts Searching for Address Book Contacts You have several ways to search for address book contacts e Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a contact browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start stop or finish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact With these functions you can select the lt From Address Book gt option from the applicable drop down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text box to find the entry If you type the name of the contact you must select the Book check box in the Find tab underneath the Address Book buttons To disable the address book search functionality clear the Book check box Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Importing Existing Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new addres
163. The following displays 335 XMap User Guide API Help for the findshortcut command Searches the keyboard shortcuts for all commands with a specified search term Example Type GIS as the search term The list of shortcuts appears in this format GIS Show Check out in GIlS Layer Properties etc A description is provided Commands and Parameters These commands are available in the XMap API Command Window Notes J J All commands begin with xmapi Parameters are separated by a space An optional parameter is indicated with brackets Example data zoom step If your parameter includes spaces use quotation marks Example 2 delorme dr yarmouth me You may have to complete further actions within the application For example if you run the quicksearch command with the parameter of Boston the Find tab will open with a list of matches Select one to center the map on that location To send the results of a command to a logfile type gt path filename log 2 gt 1 at the end of the command Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear in the command line If no path is specified the logfile will be created in the default target directory refreshmap Refreshes the n a n a current map view zoompoint Positions the latitude longitude 4348 7009 12 0 map on the data zoom level OR specified data zoom step N 43 48 30 location W70 9 52 12 4 Use formats in the Latitude Longitude sect
164. The map view centers on the item If you assigned a name for the symbol under the Draw tab a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location If you did not assign a name for the symbol a MapTag displays the Symbol Name at the symbol location Notes e f you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym you can locate it with the generic keyword of symbol or by the name or phrase given the symbol in the Draw tab For more information see Finding a Symbol by its Name e f you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the symbol on the map the Symbol Name displays in the demographic information area when you right click the symbol and select Info Importing a Bitmap You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol but any bitmap you import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Import a Bitmap Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol 1 Click the Draw tab T Pp 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool rl 3 Under Symbols click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 4 Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 238 Using the Draw Tools 5 Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box Browse to the location of the bitmap and click Open Th
165. The routing preferences allow you to favor or avoid various road types when calculating your route You can also set your speed preferences e The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating the route e To change your route calculation method see Changing the Routing Methods 278 Routing To Set Your Routing Preferences Use the following steps to set your routing preferences BRWN FE 10 ds 12 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area Select the route type Direct Trail or Road from the Route Type drop down list From the Road Type drop down list select the road type for which to set preferences If you selected Trail or Road as your route type in step 3 select Preferred Standard or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop down list Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible Standard is the default level and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible An avoided road may be used when no other road is available In the Speed text box type your average driving speed for this road type These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route If you selected Road as your route type in step 3 type your average driving speed within an urban area for this road type in the Urban Speed text box These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route The Urban Speed text box Is
166. The symbol selection for the new symbol set displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid displays the first symbol of the new symbol set Creating a New Symbol Set Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set dim file which can contain up to 250 symbols 235 XMap User Guide To Create a New Symbol Set Use the following steps to create a new symbol set L Click the Draw tab u T e Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool e Under Symbols select New from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set The default name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet Import a bitmap into your new symbol set OR Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set To Create a New Symbol Set from an Existing Symbol Set You can make a copy of an existing symbol set and save it as a custom symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab u T e Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool e Under Symbols select the symbol set you want to copy from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set You can edit symbols create symbols or import bitmaps for your new symbol set Creating a New Symbol With DeLorme XSy
167. Then select Both Primary or Secondary Note If you want to hide multiple layers on the map hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click each of the layers you want to hide or hold the SHIFT Then click the Layers button and click the Clear Selected option eA W NBE Viewing a Legend for all Visible Layers This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Legend feature to view a legend for all of the visible layers in your workspace The legend title is the name of the layer s active classification which is set to match the layer name by default Use the Symbolize dialog box to modify the Legend Class labels To View the Legend Use the following steps to view the legend for all visible layers 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace tab if it is not selected 3 Select the check box next to each layer you want to make visible in the legend Note To select multiple layers hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys on your keyboard while you click each of the layers you want to include in the legend Then click the Layers button and click Check Selected 4 Click Tools and then click Legend to view the legend information OR Right click the layer s for which you want to view legend information and click Legend 5 Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the legend to close the Legend window Deleting a Layer 103 XMap User Guide Th
168. To sort results by another column click the column header An arrow identifies the sort column Click a second time to reverse the sort order Note This feature is not available when in browse mode see last item in this list e To copy the information for the selected item or items press CTRL C on your keyboard You can then paste the text into another program such as a word processing program e Right click an item in the results list to display the following options 187 XMap User Guide Copy to Clipboard Copies the detailed information for the selected item or items and is available for pasting into another program Go To Centers the map on the selected item Select All Selects all items in the list and highlights up to 350 on the map If you right click again with all items selected you can select Copy to Clipboard point to Add and then click MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint or point to Route and click Insert Stop You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag Add Adds a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint for the selected item or items You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag Route Places a start stop or finish point at that location on the map based on your selection The location is listed in the Start text box Stop text box or Finish text box in the Route tab e To locate an
169. To undo redo a transparency selection click the Undo tool E or Redo E tool Click Reset to clear all transparency edits to the image Modifying Existing WorkFiles You can modify an existing image by adding or deleting points To Modify an Existing WorkFile Use the following steps to modify an existing WorkFile L 2 ns 7 Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Open to load the image The registered image and the points you created display in the image window on the left side of the screen You are now in Register mode and the Point Box displays your point information Modify the points as appropriate To change a specific point enter new coordinate information by clicking and typing in the point information boxes in the Point Box or click the point number in the Point Box and then click the highlighted point in the image or map window and drag it to a new location Note If you must move the same point in each window the best method is to delete that point and then add a new point To delete a point click it in the Point Box and then click Delete Click Done when edits are complete Click WorkFile Change the WorkFile name in the WorkFile text box if you want to save your previous point information Click Save Deleting an Existing WorkFile To Delete an Existing WorkFile 249 XMap User Guide Use the following steps to delete an existi
170. Tutorial Add a Map to an Earthmate PN Series GPS Map Library Imagery and Data e Download imagery and data to layer over the device s topographic and street maps e Use Earthmate GPS Sync to send a downloaded map package to your device or an SD card Note You can create a custom map package if you want to control the zoom levels at which the map displays or include GIS layers or draw layers e Click the Help button Wn the Map Library subtab to access the online NetLink Help Step 1 Activate your certificate or subscription If you already have an active subscription go to step 2 1 Click the NetLink tab OR click the Map Library button in the toolbar 2 Type the download certificate or subscription key in the Validation Key box to activate it Activate Download Certificate or Subscription Subscribe Type the key in the Validation Key text box and click Activate Key Register Device FAQ Validation Key Activate Key Goto Map Library MapLibrary 314 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices Step 2 Select the coverage area and submit your selection 1 From the drop down list select the data type you want to download 2 Click the Select button and then click each grid on the map or click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor on the map to quickly select multiple grids 3 When you have finished selecting grids click Submit Submit T DeLorme Topo Horth America 9 0 Topo Project 1 T 5 m Mep
171. Use the Measure tool lt on the toolbar to draw a polygon location on the map on the map and determine its area and perimeter J ust click point by point to draw the polygon on the map and then double click to close the polygon The area and perimeter display in the center of the polygon Print Stop a page in a multi If you do not want to print all the pages in a multi page page map from printing map on the Layout graphic click each page you do not want to print Route If you want to Reorder inserted stops Reorder your inserted route stops using the Advanced features in the Route tab Create a route quickly For quick route creation right click the map and select one of the Create Route options or use the Route buttons on Getting Started the toolbar Reorder the columns in the Click the Directions list column headers to change the Route Directions list column order Determine the difference Added stops vias are placed in the order you add them to between adding and the route Inserted stops vias are placed in the order you inserting stops and vias would approach them between the Start and Finish points of the route View information about Click the Show Turns button when GPS tracking to view your second turn information about the following turn Tab Area if 1f you want to want to Adjust the size of the tab Adjust the size of the tab area e dragging the top or right area side of the tab ar
172. Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual Bo 3 Click the Sync button on the toolbar 4 Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 5 Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device 6 Select Receive from Device 7 Select Track from the Object drop down list 8 Select User Map Data Track from the Save As drop down list 9 Click Next 10 Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to receive Not all devices support downloading individual track logs See your device manual for more information 11 Select the track file you want to add the track information to To create a new track file select New from the Track File drop down list and type the new track file name in the New Track File text box 12 Optional Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box 13 Click Receive from Device 14 Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device 15 Click Finish Receiving Waypoints Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS device you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your devi
173. User Map Polygons 1027 Folygons amp contours 15 163 XMap User Guide The graphic below depicts what the table looks like once the custom layer has been moved and assigned the same Z level as the existing layer Laver Mame 7 Level parcels 12000 User images 4020 Rasters 4019 metwp24 3029 b Major points of interest 3029 Exits 3026 Road labels 024 Route shields 3013 Business Pols 3001 User Map Lines 2009 Roads 1039 User Map Polygons 1027 Folygons amp contours 15 164 Printing Printing a Map You can print a 2 D or 3 D map based on your paper size or screen size If you choose to print a map based on your paper size you can also print a multi page map that you can assemble using the Manually Assembling a Multi page Map instructions To Print a Map Use the following steps to print a map e W Ne Locate the area you want to print Click the Print tab Click the Map subtab Under Map select Left map Right map or Both maps Note f the left or right and or both options are unavailable it is because only one map view is displayed To make all selections available use the map resize tool to expose the left and right map views To print a full page 3 D map use the map resize tool to expose only the left map window Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size you have specified in the Setup options or Screen the map print area is based on the screen size The print
174. Vary By option will change to Custom automatically and any new classes that are added to the classification will be assigned the default symbols for that layer s geometry type for example green in color If you selected a color option in step 12 from the Scheme drop down list select a color scheme e Qualitative Displays colors that vary in color hue to represent different legend classes e Sequential Displays a color that progresses from low to high or high to low in color value e Diverging Puts equal emphasis on mid range critical values and extremes at both ends of the data range Then select a color pattern from the Pattern drop down list 14 15 16 17 18 t Optional Click the Reverse Order button to reverse the style for how your ranges are varied For example if you selected to vary your range by color and the color represents the lowest value as the lightest color and the highest value as the darkest color you can click the reverse button to have the darkest color represent the lowest value and the lightest color represent the highest value or vice versa Optional If you are editing an existing classification click the Recalculate button to recalculate the row counts for each class Optional To add a class to your classification click the Add Class button Double click in the Min Max Legend Label fields to edit the values Optional To remove a class from your classifica
175. Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a ANENE e Ea 53 Viewing File Details for a GPS Log 291 Viewing Hidden Draw Tools 5 203 Viewing Layer Information in the Workspace Subtab cece ee ee es 100 Viewing Route Directions 55 272 Viewing the Attributes of a Geometry on the MG wisriin tied Sa npa a ia 135 Viewing the Contents of a Draw File 212 Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs 253 Viewing Two Maps Simultaneously 45 VOICE iaie ieat 296 297 299 303 W Way PONE rakke kae 231 Waypoint ID rra ai 242 WaypointLayel enseia 204 WIA Careri fs 83 Workspace 7 78 90 91 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 117 118 120 121 122 123 130 X XMap Bulk Importer Exporter 83 87 XOR ei r e 124 126 128 159 XSym 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 Z ZONE ate ie eet a a ee 255 ZIP Postal Codes s 36 ZOOM TOOIS seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee nens 15 21 Z level ccc tres bones ate eta ethene St 162 Zooming IN ANA Out 15 361
176. XMap User Guide Table of Contents CENO S Calle narri Tna a eae ter wom alia anmieade E E a rea nae es 1 VV CIC ORNS TOA dO yiena nt seneeeuns isin none tan E E 1 Whats NEWT AMG serswrsoresretntwnicesinaen tine r ee tubonr eae eE EN O 2 POW OO nce tune a ea eile taba shad ease ene Bie Petey a e aa eee a eas 3 FIDE TOS risa utd tras ake ara e a oes inde rar e tid Ae uep eee oes 4 Freguenti y ASK Cd QUESTIONS ere eieae ae tedious N tis inbaneauesmaaule A a eins 7 Chart of Supported Coordinate FormatsS sssesesersrsrsrsrsrersrerererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerererne 12 Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs LOCATIONS sesesrererrerererrerrrerrrrerrrrrrerrne 14 Ba SIC FUNCHUONS cerina eoa r A A O 15 ADOUE NEINNI C aiaa e a a a a ATE a a S ee ney eee aoe 20 Mam legendist e a E A A A a A T ele 24 Map LEGEN nnr EEA E E E A aaa ARE E 24 USINO TNS TOODA reiasa oe aa a a a a a aei 28 Showing Hiding Toolbar Options c a a a oaa 28 Reordering the Toolbar Options ccceeceee aaa a A TE V A A AAN 28 To Create New Projects croicne a a O a E kaidveneeee 28 TOLEN av Proe CE nerra a E A E E AE E 29 TE MOr a PrO E epena e a E E e E a T A E 29 LO SaVe a Projo Eerste e Aaea 29 TOPNE rerea E A E Aa lean O A N E O A 30 TO Pring the Map Seen anae a lau aa a e ee E NAAA 30 TFOOpen the Map LIDA Y eree AE E AAO 30 To Use the Map Navigation TOON iis sincinececiis aian ia e A nee aie aes A oa nan aw ev a ae es 30 TO Gtab anG Pani he
177. You can permanently delete routes To Delete a Route Use the following steps to delete a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 2 Select the route from the Name drop down list 3 Click File and then click Delete OR Right click the route point to Manage Route and then click Delete Route Importing Routes Routes can be imported from many other DeLorme mapping programs using the Route tab To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab 1 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 2 Click File and then click Import The Import dialog box opens 3 Browse to select the route file and then click Open The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name drop down list Converting a Route to a GPS Log You can convert any route to a GPS log file gpl To Convert a Route to a GPS Log File Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file 1 Create a route 283 XMap User Guide 2 Right click the route point to Manage Route and then click Save as GPS Log File The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box opens 3 Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 4 Type the file name in the File Name text box 5 Click Save 284 Using GPS GPS Overview Using your DeLorme application a portable computer
178. You can use a single value or unique value classification e You must symbolize the null value for a unique value classification Symbolization is not required for a single value classification e Each PN compatible form allows only one classification If multiple classifications exist you can select the one you want to use when you create the form Symbols You must use Earthmate PN Series symbol set for symbolization when using a PN compatible form Important Do not use the following geocache symbols or the objects will be sorted to the Geocaches Page on the device O 4 Hw Pe AG TG CRAON Linking PN compatible forms support only one to one linking Creating or Modifying a Form This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS s Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The functions available in a form depend on the permissions set by the database and Forms administrator You can create forms to use within a GIS layer in XMap and on PN Series GPS devices You can also modify forms as your organization s needs change For more information about XMap Forms see the Forms Overview To Create a Form Use the following steps to create a form 152 Working With GIS 1 To open the Create New Form dialog box do one of the following Click the GIS tab and ensure the Workspace tab is selected e Click Tools point to Forms and click Create OR e Right click a layer in the workspace table point to Forms
179. a FPrONIE eaan a E Aaa ee eek A E 252 Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs eserrarsri aide a a a A i 253 StatiStiCal Data eiroet ia eea arera eaaet 255 Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenas 257 Clearing a PLOTE oaren E E EE E 258 user Prone Dalari AEO E E T a een cee EEr 258 Viewing Your Map M3 D iriiria ona a a a a A E een 261 MICW ING a DB Mo Dirree an a AE E A AS 261 PSI GOV CP aS D MaD rra e E E N ean 262 TUONA FIY 132 rrei r a a e treniarsanrtetteeaeerraceauliss 263 Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences sssssssrererersrsrrrrrererererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrererererrrrrrre 266 ROUCO sereta a tena a Dhaene ote A Catarina oe edeaa eam nies 267 Creatine ROUT easair a a deat nine esi bledend eer e er ela 267 Adding and Inserting Stops and VIAS ccc cece ceee esse eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenegaaeeeeeeeegs 268 Chahging tAE ROUNO MENO recorrida E a A aA 271 Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route ssesesersrrrrrrrrsrsrerrrersrerereren 271 VIEWING ROUTE DIrectONS i resiserrienne seriean ieper eea aare ie 272 T tonalk Create a ROUT irunia a E E E 272 Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing sessssssssrrerrrrrrrrrrsrrrsrsrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 274 TUtOKal Create Route AVOIOS ccs eva vinnie ciGu sade heat ma bnhe ee a a aa aiai 274 XMap User Guide Saving Route Directions as TeX secto A eens ria saad eed A 278 Setting Your Routing Preferences rrii a
180. a a 278 EGIUINGa ROUCO ena E EE E EA ET 279 POM ROJO S serii a a a A ats 280 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote ssesesesssrererrererrrrererrrrrrsrrrrererrererrrrrrererre 281 Moving Route MapNOtES srren rE EE ATAARE E A EE A 281 Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map s sssessrersrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrerersrsrsrererrrerrrre 282 SO Cal ROU Oae r ean Ar E E E AE O 282 Deleting a ROUL CS 2 sense aE EAE AA A AAA aa ATEA aa 283 IMPONE ROULCS airen n a T E a E E A 283 Converting a ROUTE toa GPRS LOG orori e e E E a 283 VSN SI ara T E E E E lcm renee 285 GP ROVEN E Witir ea ai ra eria a aara rarr r e aea eae 285 GPS Options Initiali ZiNno GP S ssccnininetieweinteasonedniniei a A E E ies 285 TracKNO a ROUSE WIEN GPS vrese riri a aE OO a OETA 288 Getting Back on Track When Off Course ssessserrenerrrrerrrrrrsrererrererrererrrrrrerrrrerrrrne 289 Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking esserererrererrrrererrrrerererrererrere 289 Playing Back a LOG File rsiitrnaceresin a a A a a a aa bbs bate a a 290 Previewno a GPS LOG Fil Encar enei O a E ee eo 291 Viewing File Detalls fora GPS8kOG mised a A E ET aaeaiaeie 291 MONIEOFING Your GPS Status ersero reee r a E e ra a Eeee 292 Monitoring GPS Satellite INFOrMAtION ccc cccecc cece cece eee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeanaes 293 Viewing Sun and Moon INformatiOn ccc ccc cece cece ee eee e eee eeee sees seeeeeeeeteeeeeeeesnages 294 POO UTES hae
181. a eed bere ac ee a a a Arae 321 RECEIVING a TACK piana AE RTO A 328 RECEIVING WaypPOlNtS ossiipirreni eiee ia a aa a A A eea 328 Yono NECIK areta EE E E EE T cute 330 NeTEINK OVERVICW erario iE EOE A EE A E E EEA 330 Tutorial Ada Maps and Mage ers E E 331 Using the XMap API Command WindoW ssssssssssssrsrrerrerrerrrrsrrsrrsrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrerrereree 335 XAMap APF COMMand VWING OW ionnas e a E E E a T a 335 AP Commands and Parameters srs cciocvierciseaecssereeripaernirterteetrasir aries Reseereds erento 336 Legal TATORMAtON serria ncaiersters eect ena a a a 340 DeLorme XMap GIS Single User License Agreement cc cccce cece eee eeee ee seeeeeeeeeeeaaes 340 ADONAN NOTICES 825 5 ia tincsta tenure a vam idagiaanin aia peri EA ANO 343 Apache License Version 2 0 sito risisaayyevacein sir ielbid ieanis vid igen ides spe sta te Pad iaaeee eae 350 lee E eer ee ee ee re he ee eer een E ra ree erent 355 Vil Getting Started Welcome to XMap For more information about XMap visit our website at www xmap com XMap GIS Enterprise XMap GIS Editor and XMap Professional provide a three tiered GIS solution for efficiently creating importing editing classifying querying and sharing your GIS data in an enterprise environment XMap is equally suited as a standalone GIS software solution or as a Supplement component to your existing GIS infrastructure In addition to GIS XMap includes powerful routing and in vehicle navigation tools
182. a type default colors or change from a user defined color back to the default 1 Profile a track with user data The data types display in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph 2 To change the default data type color 3 To anew color on the toolbar click the arrow next to the data type click Choose Color and select a new color in the color dialog box OR 4 To the default color on the toolbar click the arrow next to the data type and click Use Default Color 259 XMap User Guide 260 Viewing Your Map in 3 D Viewing a 3 D Map On the 3 D tab you can view your map data in 3 D and change the look of your 3 D map using the tools on the tab or keyboard shortcuts Notes e You can view 3 D maps only in the left secondary map window however you can expand the left map window to fit the entire map area For more information see Resizing the Map and Tab Areas e You can customize how a 3 D map displays with the 3 D tab in the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences e The 3 D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme is for 3 D use When you select the scheme you can use keyboard shortcuts to perform all of the same functions that you can complete on the 3 D tab For more information see Flying Over a 3 D Map e Ifthe 3 D tab does not work properly it may be because you have turned off hardware acceleration in you
183. abase layers with source layers when both name and type match Additional parameters required when spatial reference information is not included File Types That Do Not Contain Spatial Reference I nformation Supported spatial file types that do not contain spatial reference information include e ESRI Shapefiles shp that do not have an accompanying Projection file prj e All file types marked with above Required parameters for this file type xMapimport target server SQL Server target db OpenSpace DB source file file and path datum datum coordinate system coordinate system If the coordinate system is UTM you must specify two additional parameters in the command line utm zone number zone number utm band letter band letter If the coordinate system is SPCS you must specify two additional parameters in the command line Spcs zone zone 86 Working With GIS Spcs units units obtain valid options for these parameters by running a separate command in the command prompt valid options for these parameters are listed in the instructions that display when running xmapimport in the command line Optional Parameters include layer name name of the layer to be created replace layer name of the layer to be replaced append layer name of the layer to append to replace all replace database layers with source layers when both name and type match Viewing a List of Supported C
184. ach line segment that you want to place OR For polygon layers type the coordinates angle bearing of a corner of the polygon in the applicable text boxes and then click Apply Repeat this step for each corner of the polygon that you want to place Click Finish to close the COGO point line polygon Click the Close button gt in the upper right corner of the COGO Editing dialog box to close the dialog box You can also center single multiple geometries with the COGO tool r From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit Click the Edit tool Ea on the toolbar and then on the map click the geometry or geometries that you want to center EEU on the toolbar The COGO Editing dialog box opens Adjust the coordinates angle bearing values to center the geometries at that location Copying Cutting and Pasting Geometries This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can copy cut and paste geometries in a layer or between layers To Copy Cut and Paste Geometries Use the following steps to copy cut and paste geometries in a layer or between layers t A 116 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer that includes the geometry or geometries you want to copy Click the Edit tool on the toolbar Be On the map right click the geometry that you want to copy cut To copy the
185. ach trip For more information see the following Help topics e Creating a Route e Adding Waypoints to the Map e Drawing a Track on the Map Step 2 Connect your device to your computer Connect the device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on Then click the or Sync button s on the toolbar e The connected device displays on the right of the dialog box e The left side of the dialog box shows the Topo North America project that you have open on your computer T Earthmate GPS Sync DeLorme Topo North Ai Project summary Device SD card Pawtuckaway NH asic maa g Date Created May 20 2010 3 53 PM Last Modified May 25 2010 4 24 PM Q Not all files on GPS Q Not all files in Topo North America SYNC PREVIEW SYNC PREVIEW 3 File s will be synced 10 File s will be synced 2 Map Package s will be synced 2 Map Package s will be synced Project Contents GPS Contents See more detail and make changes f See more detail and make changes 318 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices Step 3 View what will sync To view the contents of the project click Project Contents To view what is on the device SD card click GPS Contents To view a detailed list for a category with contents click it T Earthmate GPS Sync DeLorme Topo North America 9 0 0 Waypoint Layers 0 Selected 0 Cumently on GPS 0 Waypoint Layers 0 Total Waypoints Device SD card 0 Geocache F
186. active 79 XMap User Guide only when at least one layer in the active subscription has been removed from the workspace Redlining Creating Redline Edits This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Redlining refers to the process of adding MapNotes symbols or drawing shapes to mark up GIS layers without actually editing the layers themselves Redlines utilize the draw Capabilities of the Draw tab and are saved in a draw layer that is created when redlining begins Redline draw layers have connections with a special type of GIS layer called Redline Layer on an Enterprise database that the user has a subscription to After redlines are made on the map they will be synchronized with the redline GIS layer during the subscription synchronization process The layers are stored as attribute records within the redline GIS layer with the draw file imbedded in a column with a document link that opens the draw file when clicked To Create Redline Edits Use the following steps to create redline edits 1 View a layer that is part of a subscription E gi n 2 Click the Redline tool on the toolbar The Redline toolbox opens 3 If you want to place a symbol on the map click the Symbol tool select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want from the Set drop down list and then select the symbol from the Style drop down list Then click the lo
187. acts on the Map sas sia canna EATA E EE E E T A 196 Hiding Attributes in a Layer 138 Hiding Draw Files cceeeeeeeeeeeees 205 MANO TADS oria a aA 46 Hiding Toolbar Buttons 00000e 28 High contrast COlors ccccceeeeeeeeees 40 HIGHNOMGrssranmnasadeubiaaraseerieen 159 161 Hints for Placing Points seeee 250 Horizontal Resize TOOl cceeeeeeees 44 357 XMap User Guide I NMAC Cc cvecteeiaseesn 17 231 238 240 241 IMAaGeReg 00 eee 246 247 249 250 LINDON LAY CNS cstcs nice E TA 30 Importing a BitMap ccceeee eee 238 Importing a Custom Scheme 52 Importing a Layer Into a Database 91 Importing a Set to Link to an Attribute 147 Importing Existing Address Book INO MaN eniu n NA 193 Importing Files to Draw Files 208 Importing RouteS sssesererersrsrsre 283 Importing Tab Manager Preferences 47 Importing Transfer FileS 0000ee es 65 LT ONiaeai tears Ge earn A A total 33 LMiANZING GPS nana a 285 Inserting Stops and ViaS 00ee eee 268 TALEO CN re dewa teenie seth att tern oe eiceenneete 139 International Labels 0ccee cece es 36 LLG V al EEE A A AEEA 21 J Joining Linear ObjectsS sssesereesen 228 IPE G cor een ey E 17 K Keyboard Shortcuts 49 51 52 53 262 Keywords for Category Searches 189 L Labeling a Draw Object 05
188. adio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver Since radio waves travel at the speed of light the time difference can be used to calculate the distance from the satellite to the GPS receiver The satellite s identity code provides the location of the satellite and the distance to the receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver Without more information the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that sphere Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver s possible position Each of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and identity information The GPS receiver checks the orbital location of each satellite and uses the elapsed time to create two additional spheres of possible locations These three spheres intersect at two points however one of these points is eliminated because it is far away from the earth s surface Therefore the second point is assumed to be correct The data from these three Satellites provides the receiver with a two dimensional location Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver s exact location This additional positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation which is particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations GPS Position Accuracy The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many factors including the quality of your equipment A low q
189. aerial imagery over the country s largest metropolitan areas with a resolution of approximately 1 3 meter or about 1 foot Click Use Defaults to return the slider controls to their default minimum and maximum values Raster imagery such as USGS Quads aerial imagery NOAA nautical charts and satellite imagery includes color coded data zoom level suggestions under Zoom Range e Green indicates the data zoom levels at which the data is best viewed on the device The default values are set to only export data zoom levels that are in the green area Red indicates zoom levels at which the data is available but not necessarily the best viewed Maps with multiple data types have large file sizes To decrease the file size when exporting multiple map data types try exporting raster data with small data zoom level ranges For information on how data zoom levels display on Earthmate PN Series GPS devices see Data Zoom Level Scale Bar Translation Grid Size Comparisons When you use the Handheld Export tab to export maps you can choose a grid size A grid of the same size gets progressively larger in coverage square area the closer it is to the equator This is because the grid system is based on the latitude longitude coordinate system 60 seconds 1 minute 60 minutes 1 degree A 1 5 degree grid 9 30 minute grids 324 5 minute grids 8 100 1 minute grids or 202 500 12 second grids A 30 minute grid 36 5 minute grids 90
190. after selection 1 Click the Options button c Se on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Map Features tab 3 Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the map OR Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map Shaded Relief Shaded relief becomes visible at data zoom level 6 0 or greater It simulates the effect of sun shining on terrain features and casting shadows providing greater depth perception of the image Lighter shades of gray indicate gentle terrain and darker shades indicate steep terrain Using shaded relief may slow down the draw time of the map screen as you pan Contours Contour lines are available at data zoom level 6 0 or greater Contour lines show the elevation of the land in feet or meters The closer the contour lines the greater the slope The distance between the lines is the contour interval which is indicated in the Control Panel distance units are controlled in the Options dialog box Land Cover Land cover colors are available at all data zoom levels Colors indicate vegetation and land cover areas on the map such as rock and sand forests transitional areas and wetlands Grids The Grids option can be used to identify coordinate points on the map Grid lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of your map Parks or Reserv
191. ageReg tab and then click WorkFile 2 Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Open to load the image The registered image and the points you created display in the Image Window on the left side of your screen You are now in the Register mode and the Point Box displays your point information To Close a WorkFile Use the following steps to close a WorkFile 1 Click the I mageReg tab and then click WorkFile 2 Click Close The image window closes and the registration control point values are cleared 246 Registering Images Registering an Image You can register any image to a map by placing control points on both the imported image and the previously registered map Note Registration is the process by which you identify matching locations control points on the image and the referenced map To Register an Image Use the following steps to register an image ds Locate an area within the source raster image or vector image on your map window to which you want to register Click the I mageReg tab and then click WorkFile Note The source raster can be a base map aerial photo or satellite image that has been previously registered Click Load Image to open the Open File dialog box Select the image file you want to register from its directory and click Open The source image loads and the Image Window displays on the left side of the screen and the map window is on the right You are now in Regist
192. all geometry types Returns the inverse of INTERSECTS for the selected source layer e DOES NOT CONTAIN Available only for polygon layers Returns the inverse of CONTAINS for the selected source layer Note If any portion of a polygon or line is outside of the polygons in the source layer the polygons are returned in the query results e IS NOT CONTAINED BY Available for all geometry types Returns the inverse of S CONTAINED BY for the selected source layer e WITHIN A DISTANCE OF Available for all geometry types Returns any geometries in the source layer that are within the user specified distance of the geometries in the specified layer criteria If you select this option the Edit Query dialog box opens and you are prompted to specify the distance parameters e IS NOT WITHIN A DISTANCE OF Available for all geometry types Returns the inverse of WITHIN A DISTANCE OF for the selected source layer If you select this option the Edit Query dialog box opens and you are prompted to specify the distance parameters e EQUALS Available for all geometry types Returns any geometries in the source layer that equal the criteria specified in the Criteria column e DOES NOT EQUAL Available for all geometry types Returns the inverse of EQUALS for the selected source layer Click the cell under Criteria A drop down list displays all applicable layers that are loaded into Workspace the list varies depending on the source layer and operator chos
193. ams on your computer This is equivalent to the same adjustment in the Windows Control Panel Voice Prompts Directions spoken first or alone Proceed Continue straight Bear right Bear left Turn right Turn left Turn hard right Turn hard left Go east 304 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Go west Go north Go northeast Go northwest Go south Go southeast Go southwest Direction distance modifiers spoken second 1n distance in tenths of a mile Other spoken alone At finish was Destination reached Last leg Approaching finish Off route 305 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices PN Series GPS Overview This section of the Help explains how to use XMap with your Earthmate PN Series GPS device For help with using the device see your User Manual In addition the DeLorme Forums is a great resource for using your device The latest versions of the device s documentation are available there Creating Map Packages Creating a Custom Map Package You can export maps that you create in XMap to use on a DeLorme Earthmate PN Series GPS device You can customize Custom map packages are created using the Handheld Export tab The data that Is included in a custom map package depends on the data that is available for the export area your map with imagery and data from NetLink s Map Library GIS layers draw layers and user raster data
194. and your GPS receiver you can display a bread crumb trail to track your progress as you travel e GPS tab view This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking By default the tabs and Control Panel are visible but you can opt to hide them a vehicle Safety Do not use this application with automatic navigation guidance Warnin systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance gs or direction Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving GPS Options Initializing GPS Before beginning your GPS setup read the user manual for your GPS receiver Also ensure you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your GPS receiver to the communications port of your portable computer If you have an Earthmate GPS device it is automatically enabled when it is connected J ust click Start GPS to begin tracking To Set GPS Options e Manually change the location coordinates Each time you track with GPS the initialization process uses the coordinates from the last initialized location Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your choice 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your owner manual and then turn the receiver on 2 Click the Options button c ma E and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 Under GPS Options verify that the Automatically detect GPS check box
195. ap None Does not show any visual cue of the query results on the map but shows how many records were affected if the Count option is enabled Selecting this option makes the query process run more quickly To Change How Query Results Display on the Map Use the following steps to change how query results display on the map L 2 3 Click the GIS tab Click the Query subtab Click the Manage button click Map Effect and then select Highlight Filter or None The option with a selected check box next to it is the currently selected option Proceed with the steps below if you chose Highlight in step 3 4 160 Under Query Results click Edit The Symbolize Highlight Query dialog box opens Right click in the Symbolization table and click I nsert Feature You can change highlight options the options available depend on the type of layer e To change the opacity of the color of your feature From the Opacity drop down list select Opaque 0 transparent Transparent 100 transparent Blended 50 transparent or XOR combination of the source and background pixels most useful when records with the same symbolization overlap e To change the highlight color design for a polygon layer e To change the fill color of your feature click the Fill Color button next to Fill under Polygon Features and select a standard fill color or create a custom fill color To change the fill style of your feature click the Fill
196. ar the nearest search result Once you find the waypoint GIS point or POI you want you can use the GPS Radar subtab to center the map on the route on that point or POI and get directions to it What you need to know e Before you start set your Find preferences in the Options dialog 183 XMap User Guide e A GPS Radar search finds items that are the shortest driving distance from your current location within just a few miles Unless you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box some of the search results may be behind you GPS radar calculates a route to each point and the fastest destination for you to drive to is listed first If you are on a one way road or freeway GPS Radar takes into account the fact that you need to drive further to get off at an exit You can click each item in the result list to see each option to highlight the route to each destination and to see a description of each one as well as driving directions This should help you choose the best one for your needs e The time required for a GPS Radar search varies by the distance density of objects in the area the categories chosen and whether you are searching only in the direction of travel In GPS tab view click the Stop Search button to interrupt a long search and see a listing of the nearby points Driving directions will not be provided Voice reporting will stop To Find Points Near Your Location Use the following steps to find points near your
197. arch may take longer than others because a lot of data is being searched to obtain a result Current Map City Searches for the specified name within the boundaries of all ZIP Postal Codes associated with the city at the current map center Current Map Rectangle Searches for the specified location within the currently visible map area 181 XMap User Guide Tips e Distance from Map Center Performs a search in all directions from the center of the map using the Specified distance Also called a radius search The minimum distance you can use is 50 feet the maximum distance is 100 miles e Current Route Searches for objects within the specified distance from your currently active calculated route The minimum distance you can use Is 500 feet the maximum distance is 10 miles Results are listed in the sequence they occur along the route from start point to finish point Note This search may take longer than other types of searches Type information in the text boxes to the right of the Find and Within fields The text boxes available are based on the selected Find and Within fields Tip A few text boxes are optional and you may get more results by leaving them blank To see if a text box is optional hold your cursor over the text box label or down arrow and read the ToolTip for that text box Click Search or press the ENTER key on your keyboard The Results list displays your search results with closest matching items at the to
198. area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map which may not always be visible The overview map and the print area for a Screen map display as a blue box on the overview map If you selected Screen in step 5 go to step 7 If you selected Page in step 5 select your options and then go to step 7 e Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the map and the overview map e If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 on the map layout graphic and you do not want to print all the pages in the multi page map click each page you do not want to print The page appears dimmed or gray You can click a dimmed gray page again to print it Note In the example below page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map B e Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print e If not pan the map to a new location and zoom to the correct level OR e To change the photo zoom select an option from the Photo Zoom drop down list or type the photo zoom in the text box Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map features and changes the map print area If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc display larger and your map print area is reduced If you decrease the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc display smaller and your map print area is enlarged The reduction enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop
199. as well as comments Notes When you import a GPX file all the waypoints tracks comments and routes found in the file are imported at the same time When you download a GPX file from www geocaching com the hints on the website are added to the Comments column of the file When you export the file to an Earthmate PN series GPS device the comments are included Location File loc Waypoint file from Coordinate information name www geocaching com and URL link Magellan Track File Magellan Track Log Latitude longitude elevation log name and date time if Specified Magellan Waypoint Magellan Waypoint File Latitude longitude elevation File upt name comment and symbol are imported 209 XMap User Guide Draw Layer Files Topo USA 2 0 ano Draw objects display with the current symbol and line style selections MapDocs sa7 sa8 Street Atlas USA 8 0 Draw objects display with the sa9 mn5 mn6 8 0 and 9 0 current symbol and line style mn7 AAA Map n Go 5 0 6 selections and 8 0 Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File These are the formatting conventions with examples for creating a text file to import as a draw file Line BEGIN LINE BEGIN LINE LAT LON 43 807801 70 164440 LAT LON 43 807629 70 163801 LAT LON 43 807211 70 162746 END 43 806 707 70 163400 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END Spline BEGIN SPLINE BEGIN SPLIN
200. ase display under Layers in the Database 5 Under Layers in the Database click the layer that you want to add to your workspace and then click the Add button el The layer displays in the Layers tn the Workspace list OR Under Layers in the Database double click the layer that you want to add to your workspace The layer displays in the Layers tn the Workspace list Note You can also click the Add All button gt to add all of the layers in the database to your workspace 6 Click OK To Remove a Layer From Your Workspace This process removes the layer from the workspace but does not remove it from the database For information on removing a layer from a database see Deleting a Layer Use the following steps to remove a layer from your workspace 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the Layers button and then click Manage The Manage Layers dialog box opens OR Click the Manage Layers button E on the toolbar The Manage Layers dialog box opens 4 From the Source Database drop down list select the database that contains the workspace you want to remove or select Other to attach a new database you want to modify The available layers for that database display under Layers in the Database and the layers in the workspace display under Layers in the Workspace 5 Under Layers in the Workspace click the layer in the workspace that you want to remove and then click the Remo
201. ate your data positioning selections to the map Note You must perform this step to apply any change Optional Click Use Default to use the default zoom range and data positioning options Click Next Review the dataset information and click Next if applicable Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your raster properties Click Finish The Raster Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The raster property changes are only made in the current project You must Save your project to retain the property changes Changing the Shaded Relief Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as rasters vectors shaded relief contours points etc Note You must select to show shaded relief in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the shaded relief properties on the map See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing hiding shaded relief To Change the Shaded Relief Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of shaded relief L 2 10 11 12 72 Click the Map Data tab Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties Click the plus sign next to the sub data category Right click Shaded Relief and click Properties The Digital Elevation Model DEM Propert
202. ategories Select or clear these categories depending on what you want to locate 190 Finding a Location on the Map e Inthe Keyword Category samples below some keywords are used together to narrow the search The following two examples provide information on how results may differ using words together and separately e Example 1 Using Local Road provides many category results such as Ferry Crossing Local Road Local or Rural Road and Railroad Local Line e Example 2 Using Road provides over 100 results from more categories e Partial words are recognized when performing a search e You can use keywords in any order You get the same results using Local Road as for Road Local e A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the word e Use the word or in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories For example pizza or fast food MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting When you search for and go to a Find search result a yellow MapTag displays at that location if the MapTags check box on the Find tab is selected If MapTags are cluttering your view of the map you can move the text area of the MapTag hide them from view or delete one several or all MapTags To Convert MapTags to MapNotes To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes which can be retained when you save the project right click the map click Manage Draw and then click Convert All MapTags to Ma
203. attribute set that contains the attribute selected in step 8 from the Set drop down list Then select the attribute you want to link from the Attribute drop down list If you do not choose a compatible attribute type you will be warned 9 Under Linkage Type select One to One or Many to One 10 The results display in the link table The table below describes the tabs in the link table To copy results displayed in the table to your computer s clipboard click Copy Working With GIS Results Displays all of the records that were successfully linked Unmatched in Displays all unmatched records in the Layer Attribution Set lt Layer Attribution Unmatched records can be edited so that they can be Set gt successfully linked Unmatched in Displays all unmatched records in the Additional Attribution lt Additional Set Attribution Set gt Duplicates in lt Layer Displays any duplicate records from the Layer Attribution Attribution Set gt Set Duplicate records can be edited so that they can be successfully linked Duplicates in Displays any duplicate records from the Additional lt Additional Attribution Set Attribution Set gt 11 Click OK Selecting a Geometry to be Read Only This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can use the Design View in the Attributes subtab to save existing geometries to be read only ensuring that the geometry will not be edited Read on
204. awes 42 292 Copy Symbol to Waypoint 214 Copy to Active Road Layer 214 Copy to Active Track Layer 214 Copy to Active Trail Layer 214 Copy to Draw Object ccc cece e eee es 214 Copy Track to GPS Log eee 214 Copying a Classification eeee es 122 Copying a Draw File ccee cece eens 213 Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to ANOther cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 216 Copying a Map Line to a Draw File 211 Copying and Pasting ccceeeeeees 239 Copying and Placing Draw Objects 217 Copying Your Map to the Clipboard 17 County BoOrderss cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Create a Layer From Current Selection 99 Create a Layer From Query Results 99 Create an Empty Layer 005 99 Create Route from Line 215 224 Creating a Buffer Around a Geometry 107 Creating a Classification From a Template PUG teehel ads faba E E E A 122 Creating a New Custom Scheme 49 51 Creating a New Draw File 065 204 Creating a New Layer ccceeeeee ees 99 Creating a New Symbol 0085 236 Creating a New Symbol Set 235 Creating a Prole reirse 252 Creating a Query ssssesssrrrrrrrerrrrrne 156 356 Creating a ROUtEC cc cece cess eens 267 Creating an ini File 85 83 87 Creating Data for a Regis
205. ay area and radius information for circles on the map as you draw the object 9 To draw a circle click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area OR To draw a rectangle click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want The coordinates of the upper left corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of the final corner point from the first corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options gt 2 A O To draw a polygon click the map to enter each point of the polygon The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point 229 XMap User Guide display in the corresponding text boxes Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected 10 Click the Select tool A and then click the area object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it
206. ayer Use the following steps to add stationing attributes to a layer 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 View an existing line layer create a new line layer or import a line layer 4 Highlight the layer to which you want to add stationing points 5 Click the Attributes subtab 6 If it is not already in Design View mode click the Design View button E 7 Add fields Fr_Station and To_Station to the line layer From the Data Type drop down list select any numeric type Integer Big Integer Byte Double Float or Small Integer 8 Click the Datasheet View button 9 Type numeric values in the Fr_Station and To_ Station records for the layer The Fr_Sation value is automatically assigned to the start point of the line and the To Station is automatically assigned to the end point of the line The station value for every location along the line is calculated based on the start and end point values To View Stationing Attributes Hover over a line on the map that includes stationing data Stationing values display in the Info bar at the bottom of the map Seien TEES PEIRA MEMBER Gar Hs 82 Working With GIS Bulk Importing and Exporting Bulk Importing This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise XMap includes a command prompt utility that allows you to import multiple files from potentially different locations into a
207. bled on the map area primary secondary or both where the layer is displayed To return to the default map mode click the Navigation tool on the toolbar Working With GIS To undo your last action click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo your last action click the Redo button gt To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool 9 md if you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to ite the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool automatically commit your changes Many right click options are available when editing topological lines including e Deleting points e Joining splitting lines e Breaking the selected node breaks the selected node from the nodes it is connected to but keeps the other nodes connected Breaking multiple nodes breaks all nodes away from each other at the selected point of connection Extending a line Deleting an object Matching Edges for Polygons Lines This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Edge Matching tool amp 3 those in another polygon line To Match Edges Use the following steps to match the edges of a polygon or line to another polygon or line by matching two anchor points on one object with two anchor points on another object
208. c and Custom e Display e Keyboard Shortcuts e 3 D An Options button that opens the Options dialog box is also available on the 3 D Find gt GPS Radar and GPS tabs To open the Options menu click the arrow next to the Options button ca sanii on the toolbar The following menu options are available e Options Opens the Options dialog box e Tab Manager Opens the Tab Manager dialog box where you can show or hide individual tabs and reorder tabs e Netbook Mode Allows you to turn the Netbook Mode on or off If the mode is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click Netbook Mode to turn it on or off For more information see Using Small screen Devices You can also customize your interface e Show Tab Area Panel Allows you to show or hide all the tabs If Show All Tabs is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click Show Tab Area Panel to show or hide the tab area e Show Control Panel Allows you to show or hide the Control Panel If Show Control Panel is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click Show Control Panel to show or hide it 35 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Customizing the I nterface You can customize the interface for your application by hiding the tab panel area and the Control Panel To Customize the I nterface 1 eae E fe J z i R 1 Click the arrow next to the Options button A T on the toolbar 2 To turn on an option when it is not selected cl
209. catiarecichiader atti a a aaa 187 Tips on Viewing Search Results n sesersrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerene 187 Keywords for Category Searches ccceeee cece a a a a a r 188 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 191 Using Address BOOK CONICS nirai eena ey eitabia ey one ental E RS 193 Searching for Address Book Contacts cc cece ce cee eee e eee eese eee eeeeseeeeseeeaaeeesesenaeenegs 193 Importing Existing Address Book Information ccccc cece cee eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaaes 193 Manually Entering Address Book INformatiOn cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeegs 194 Centering the Map on an Address Book COntact s ssssrererererrrrrrrrrrrrerrrersrsrrrerrne 194 Editing a Contact In Your Address BOOk ccccccceeee cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 195 Manually Moving a Contact ON the MaP ccccccccces eee ee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenas 195 Relocating Address Book Contacts oian tie inkl rated eee ad aetna a A nine 196 Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts On the Map ccccccccceee cece eeeeeeeeseeeneeeeees 196 Deleting a Contact In Your Address BOOK ccccce cece cece cece eeeeeee sees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 197 Deleting Your Entire Address BOOK cccceceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeggaeeeeenennas 197 EXPONO VOU AGGECSS B
210. cation left right up or down You cannot move a toolbar segment above the top most line on the toolbar customize toolbar groups or remove toolbar groups from the toolbar Exchange e Exchange GIS layers draw layers maps routes waypoints or tracks with an Earthmate PN Series GPS device e Export and import GIS points to and from an Earthmate PN Series GPS device See the Help topics under Using Handheld Devices for more information GIS Layer Management See To Use the GIS Tools GIS Tools See To Use the GIS Tools 22 Getting Started GPS e Start or stop your GPS connection also available on the GPS tab Info Profile e Get information about a location on the map You can also right click a location on the map and click Info e Profile a linear object on the map You can also select the Profile tab right click the linear object on the map and then click Profile Map Library e Open the NetLink tab to download or purchase data and imagery Map Navigation e Recenter the map and zoom it in and out e Grab and pan the map in any direction Measure e Measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Options Help e Open the Options dialog box to set GIS GPS display map feature voice navigation 3 D search and keyboard shortcut preferences e Open the Help menu to access the XMap Help topics Map Legend and more Print e Print y
211. cation on the map where you want to place the symbol OR If you want to draw a line on the map click the Line tool A select the line color and line style and then draw the line at the map location OR If you want to draw freehand on the map click the Scribble tool E select the scribble color and style and then draw the scribble at the map location OR If you want to place a MapNote on the map click the MapNote tool w select the font color and size and then click the location on the map where you want to place the MapNote OR If you want to draw a polygon on the map click the Polygon tool J select the polygon fill color and fill style and then draw the polygon at the map location 80 Working With GIS 4 Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the Redline toolbox to close the toolbox Note You can access the full range of draw options for each symbol type in the Redline toolbox by selecting the same option in the Draw tab Sending Redline Edits to the Enterprise Database This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Once you create redline edits in the GIS layers included in a subscription you can send those edits to the Enterprise database on the server by clicking the Synchronize button T on the toolbar This also refreshes the layers that were part of your subscription and retrieves the most recent changes Viewing Redline E
212. cceeeee eens 303 Rectangle cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 230 Redline 30 78 80 81 106 135 Reference Card cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 53 Refreshing the Layers in a Subscription 79 Refreshing Your Database Connection 105 Registering an IMAGE cc cece cece 247 Relocating Address Book Contacts 196 Removing a Symbol ccee cece ees 241 Removing Layers from your Workspace a ici ill EA aa A T E E E 101 Renaming a Classification 123 Renaming a Custom Scheme 5 51 Renaming a Draw Object 5 219 Renaming a Project cccceeeeeeeeeeees 62 Reordering Layers cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 162 Reordering the Tabs ccceeeeeeees 48 Reordering the Toolbar 00e 28 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas 44 Reverse ROULC cc cece ec ee sence eee eeaes 280 ROAGLAY CF erir a AAE 204 Rotate Map in GPS Direction 285 Rotating a Geometry c cece ee ees 113 Routable Roads 223 226 227 Routable Trails 223 226 227 Route 32 215 268 271 272 280 281 282 283 Route Avoid ccc ccee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 274 Route DIrectionsS 4 4icchiiiide eines 272 Route Prefs ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 278 281 ROUUING Data wriciiicatie tutors ANEA 58 S Satellites sons jayiannaeaaenueeaavaden tones 293 294 Save as GPS Log File 211 284 Saving a
213. ce and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File 328 Using Third party GPS Devices Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device L 2 p A R Li L2 13 14 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual fey E Click the Sync button on the toolbar Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Receive from Device Select Waypoints from the Object drop down list Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list To create a new Waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the New Waypoint File text box If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set optio
214. cific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR 347 XMap User Guide CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE GDAL grib Format License The degrib and g2clib source code are modified versions of code produced by NOAA NWS and are in the public domain subject to the following restrictions http www weather gov im softa htm DISCLAIMER The United States Government makes no warranty expressed or implied as to the usefulness of the software and documentation for any purpose The U S Government its instrumentalities officers employees and agents assumes no responsibility 1 for the use of the software and documentation listed below or 2 to provide technical support to users http www weather gov disclaimer php The information on government se
215. ck Sleep Pause Break O O O O O Using Keyboard Shortcuts Enter Caps Lock Num Lock Spacebar Insert Backspace Multi media Keys o You cannot assign a letter or number on its own For example you cannot assign a keyboard shortcut with the number 3 you must use a modifier such as CTRL or ALT with letters and numbers Customizing a DeLorme Scheme You cannot edit DeLorme schemes however you can create a copy of a DeLorme scheme that you can modify to fit your needs To Customize a DeLorme Scheme Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme 1 ad 5 6 Click the Options button E oe on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Copy The active scheme changes to Copy of Desktop Mapping Copy of In vehicle Navigation Copy of 3 D Navigation etc depending on the DeLorme scheme you chose to copy Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme Optional Rename the scheme Renaming a Custom Scheme Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you choose You cannot rename DeLorme schemes To Rename a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme 1 w Click the Options button B BSR on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the
216. ck a GIS object geometry on the map point to Documents point to Upload and then click the option you want to use you can upload a document or replace a document that you previously uploaded If there are multiple documents or multiple objects on the map where you click then all of the options available are displayed From the Upload File dialog box browse to the file that you want to embed and then click Open A hyperlink to that document displays The document is embedded in the source database To Embed a Document from a Form 133 XMap User Guide When a form contains a document field created from a layer with a document field you can upload a document when you have the proper form permissions 1 Open the form and select the geometry or geometries for which you want to upload a document 2 Click Upload next to the document field on the form and browse to the document s location on your computer The document displays in the form and a hyperlink to that document displays in the Attributes table The document is embedded in the source database Working with Embedded Documents This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise XMap Professional users can view and edit embedded documents Embedded documents give you the ability to store images rich text documents spreadsheets and other files in a record of your GIS layer You can view edit or replace embedded documents
217. ck box on the Voice tab only when you intend to use it If you exit the program with the Microphone check box selected the program will start soeech recognition again when you restart the program Voice recognition requires a lot of disk space and slows down the system if you are not using it Remember the Voice tab displays with red font whenever the microphone is listening e Use the Commands Start With feature in the Voice tab in the Options dialog to clearly distinguish commands from other noise and speech Set the Commands Start With phrase to something like computer or Simon Says to reduce the chances of an unexpected command recognition When choosing a phrase make sure that it is more than one syllable The phrases computer or Simon Says work well But the simple word map probably will not e Train the speech recognition system in the environment in which you will use it for example in a noisy car Note To find out the proper position for your microphone model or to find tips on how to purchase a microphone click the Options button c E on the toolbar or click the 302 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box click the Voice Settings tab and then click Microphone Setup Or from the Start menu on your computer browse to the Control Panel and double click the Speech icon to open the Speech Propertie
218. contours etc Because of this not all of the property information in this section of the Help will pertain to every dataset Note It is important to remember that any changes made to the dataset properties are permanent only when saved in a project Changing I magery Display When you use the Map Data tab to add imagery files such as GeoTIFF imagery and ImageReg data or data and imagery downloads from NetLink to a map by default the image appears on top of any DeLorme vector base map by default However you can customize the layering sequence so that selected vector map features roads contours etc appear on top of the image Any added imagery files are listed in the Map Data tree view under the appropriate series To Change the Properties of an Imagery File Use the following steps to change the properties of an imagery file 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the imagery series you want to modify 3 Click the plus sign next to the specific imagery file you want to modify The types of imagery in the file display 4 Right click the imagery file and click Properties The Raster Properties dialog box opens 5 Optional For MrSID and some types of GeoTIFF data you may be able to select a color to display as transparent for example black To do so select the Transparent Color check box select a color and click OK Note that doing so makes the default tran
219. crease the tab height You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush with the bottom of the compass rose in the control panel Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally decrease the tab height You can repeat this step until only the tab names display Double click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to its maximum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode or higher Note Ifthe tab area is below the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage Double click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height to its minimum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode Note If the tab area is above the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage Double click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height to its default view Using the Vertical Resize Tool Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to see Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to See Click the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab width You can repeat this stop until the overview map is no longer exposed Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the width of the overview map You can repeat this step until the tab area is no longer
220. cted to remove some of the text on the map Repeat the steps for each layer feature that you want to symbolize Click OK You can also show hide a feature on the map To show a feature that is currently disabled select the feature and then select the Show Feature check box under Line Feature OR To hide a feature select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box under Line Feature The feature displays as Disabled in the Symbolization dialog box To hide multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box To hide a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the first and last records in the block To select multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you select each feature To select a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you select the first and last records in the block To select all features press CTRL A Adding a Symbol Set to the List of Available Symbol Sets When you symbolize a point layer you can identify the points with a variety of stock symbols However you can also use the Add button in the point layer Symbolize dialog box to add a different symbol set to the list of available symbol sets To Add a Symbol Set Use the following steps to add a symbol set to the list of available symbol sets 1 Click the Add button in the Symbolize
221. ctory during installation In XMap 6 and later versions the DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is located in the Documents folder under your user name For NetLink downloads the Downloads folder is located in the DeLorme Docs folder under Public Documents For information about migrating data to XMap see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location Upgraders only Why doesn t XMap overwrite the older version XMap User Guide 10 XMap 5 and later versions do not overwrite older versions of XMap such as XMap 4 5 or earlier This allows you to view both versions on the same computer Upgraders only Should uninstall my previous version before installing the new version You are not required to uninstall XMap 4 5 or earlier versions before installing XMap 8 Can see imagery and data from Topo USA or Street Atlas USA within XMap Yes The location of the Downloads folder changed beginning with XMap 6 If you stored your data in the DeLorme Docs Downloads folder in XMap 5 or earlier it will automatically migrate to the new location If you stored it in a different location you can use the Map Data tab to browse to the location and add it For information about migrating data to XMap see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location How do get data updates or fix the roads on my map If you find there is a local road that is missing you can add it to the current draw layer using the Routable
222. d and then the extension abbreviation for example shp Type an asterisk to indicate any number of characters Type a question mark to indicate any Single character or nothing 1 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 2 Type the following parameters in the command line text in red reflects the user s information xmapimport target server server name target db database name source file file path e g shp Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no character returns 3 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is imported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file s to import in days hours minutes and seconds 4 Add the layer s to your workspace Bulk Importing Parameters This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Type xmapimport on the command line and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard to display a list of instructions and general required import parameters parameters vary based on the type of files being imported Notes e File names with embedded spaces should be in quotes for example Yarmouth Parcels shp e If the server was created on your local machine type lt computer name gt xmap 7 If you are connecting to an external
223. d shortcut to the Open GIS Form command in the DeLorme scheme Note In the toolbar Tools and right click menus a list of the most recently used forms for the current project displays below the main options Click a form to open it without using the Open Form dialog and skip to step 4 2 From the Layer drop down list select the layer with the form you want to open or select All Layers 3 Select the form in the list and then click Open 4 With the form open you can select the geometries GIS objects you want to view or edit in the form on the map or in the attributes table in the workspace If you select multiple geometries the values which are common to all of the selected geometries populate the form This feature is useful for setting the same value for multiple objects e On the map Click the Selection tool w on the toolbar and then click one geometry on the map or sweep select multiple geometries e Inthe Attributes subtab Select the geometry or geometries in the attributes table 4 Depending on the form permissions you can e View information including embedded documents If you click a document link the document is opened in view only mode e Edit information including embedded documents e Change a point geometry s location Click the button for the method you want to use to move the point 155 XMap User Guide e GPS Ensure you have a GPS device connected to your computer and you have a 2 D or better GPS
224. d unless you have a separate network license For information on network or multiple user licensing contact DeLorme at prosales delorme com or 800 293 2389 You may use the System as instructed by the documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this Agreement Paper Map Printout Rights You may reproduce paper copies of any System map printouts for personal or household use or if you are a business or institution for in house purposes provided that distribution and use of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where the System is installed or limited to use by employees based at that location Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights You may distribute to family and friends including via fax paper copies of System map printouts depicting locations of personal interest You may distribute to your colleagues clients customers or prospects including via fax paper copies of System map printouts depicting the location of your business or 340 Legal Information institution or the locations of your business or institution related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid advertising GPS Receiver Link You may use the System with a DeLorme GPS receiver or with any other GPS receiver recommended by DeLorme to display your approximate position on the screen as described and with the limitations explained in the documentation You may use the System to tran
225. database at one time through user created batch files bat or cmd You can also import entire directories of files using the wildcard capability of command prompt Import individual files either through manual entry of the import commands or by referencing user created ini files on the command line You can use the XMap Bulk Importer to import all file types that can be imported with the XMap Import Wizard except for non spatial types that require geocoding You can import files with the bulk importer through four different mechanisms e Enter import parameters directly into the command line e Create a ini file that specifies the import parameters then reference this ini file in the command line e Create a bat or cmd batch file that specifies the import parameters for multiple files then run this batch file directly in the command line e Use a wild card entry to import all files of a like type in the same directory This option imports only files of the type that is specified by the wild card and that contain spatial reference information Note For more information on importing parameters see Bulk Importing Parameters To Import Files Using the Command Line All import command lines of this type begin with xmapimport in the command line All parameters are separated by a single space and parsed with on the command line 1 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Expo
226. dd a new symbol set click the Add button and then use the dialog box to add a new symbol set The symbol set must contain dim or bmp symbols omp symbols do not scale well e To change the color of your stock symbol click the Color button and select a standard fill color or create a custom fill color e To change the size of your stock symbol select a size from the Size drop down list e To change the properties of your label ensure the Show Label check box is selected and then e Select a different font from the Font drop down list e To change the font style click the Bold button E I talic button Fil or Underline button You can also click More Styles for additional font style options Tip Select the Outline option under More Styles to outline the text with white making the text easier to read on the map 127 XMap User Guide 6 7 Notes e To change the font color click the Font Color button and select a standard font color or create a custom font color e To change the font size select a size from the Size drop down list e To hide the label on the map clear the Show Label check box Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels the text may appear cluttered on the map If this is the case ensure the Declutter Text check box is selected to remove some of the text on the map Repeat the steps for each layer feature you want to symbolize Click OK You can also show hide a feature on the ma
227. ding points on the primary map right window Three control points are required e Bilinear Use this transform to correct an image that appears tilted so that lines that Should be parallel appear to converge for example if the data is in a conic projection Use the control point tool to associate points on the layer to register left window with corresponding points on the primary map right 247 XMap User Guide 248 10 11 12 13 window Two control points are required at or near opposite corners of the dataset e Polynomial 2d Order Use this transform when objects in the image appear curved such as when a page is scanned from a bound book near the binding Use the control point tool to associate points on the layer to register left window with corresponding points on the primary map right window At least three control points are required Undesirable interpolation effects are likely for data points that fall outside the cluster of control points Consider placing control points around the border of the data to register then adding interior points e Polynomial 3d Order Use this transform when the image to register contains a more complex curve Use the control point tool to associate points on the layer to register left window with corresponding points on the primary map right window At least 10 control points are required Undesirable interpolation effects are likely for data points that fall outside the cl
228. dio Coverage Ellipses Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of radio coverage ellipses 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 3 Click the plus sign next to the sub data category 4 Highlight Radio Coverage Ellipses click Data and then click Properties The Ellipse Connection Properties dialog box opens OR Right click Radio Coverage Ellipses and click Properties The Ellipse Connection Properties dialog box opens 5 Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want 6 Click Next 7 Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your properties 8 Click Finish The Radio Coverage Ellipse Connection Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The radio coverage ellipse property changes are made only in the current project You must save your project to retain the property changes Changing the Elevation Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as elevations rasters vectors shaded relief contours points DEM properties etc To Change the Elevation Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of elevation 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus si
229. directions OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a via to the current route Changing the Routing Method You can change your routing calculation method at any time You may need to do this to update your routing preferences To Change the Route Calculation Method 1 From the Route tab click the New Edit subtab 2 Select a calculation method Driving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle Cycling Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot 3 Select a route type Road Shortest Road Quickest Trail or Direct from the drop down list Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route You can change the properties of a stop along your route by using the Stop Prefs function in the Advanced sub tab under Route To Change the Properties of a Stop Use the following steps to change the properties of a stop 1 Click the Route tab and then click Advanced 2 Click a stop from the waypoint list and then click Stop Prefs The Stop Time Preferences dialog box opens 3 To designate the stop as an end of day stop select the End of Day check box click Apply and then click Done OR To designate the stop as a fuel break select the Fuel check box click Apply select the Duration check box select the duration of the fuel break using the
230. displays All standard DeLorme layers display in light gray font Custom layers display in bold font Note You can only move custom layers 5 Click to select the custom layer you want to move and then drag the layer to the desired position When you drag the layer a light gray line displays between each layer you pass See graphic below Note You can also double click in the layer s Z Level cell and re type a new Z level for the layer Doing this automatically moves the layer to the appropriate position Layer Name Level ne f a a User images 4020 Rasters 4019 Major points of Mterest 2029 Exits 3026 Road labels 3024 Route shields 3013 Business POls S001 User Map Lines 2009 Roads 1039 User Map Polygons 1027 Polygons amp contours 15 6 To move the layer between existing layers release the mouse button when the light gray line displays between the two layers you want to move your layer above below The Z level adjusts according to the placement of the layer OR To move the layer so that it has the same Z level as an existing layer release the mouse button when the existing layer is highlighted see graphics below The graphic below depicts what the table looks like when you drag the custom layer on top of existing layer Laver Mame Z Level pan e A aan User images 4020 Rasters 4019 3029 Exits k 3026 Road labels S024 Route shields 3013 Business Pols S001 User Map Lines 2009 Roads 1039
231. displays When the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map only the secondary map displays There are several methods you can use to resize the map area e Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see e Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see 44 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the primary map is no longer visible Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no longer visible Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal percentage of both the secondary and primary maps To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools There are two tab area resize tools The horizontal resize tool is located above the tab area and lets you adjust the height of the tab area The vertical resize tool is located between the tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the tab area Using the Horizontal Resize Tool Drag the horizontal bar up down to expose the tab area you want to see Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally in
232. dits This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise After users synchronize their redline layers with the redline GIS layer in the Enterprise database those users with permissions to view the redline GIS layer can review all of the redlines 1 Add the redline GIS layer to your workspace 2 Once the redline layer is in your workspace select the check box next to the layer in the Workspace view Outlined boxes display on the map red indicates incomplete redline edits and blue indicates completed redline edits depicting the map bounding rectangles for each redline record 3 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Datasheet View button L The attributes of the layer display Each record in the redline layer has the user s name date and a copy of the original redline file an1 4 To view a specific redline draw layer Click its hyperlink in the Redline Layer column A message asks if you want to save or open the file OR Hover your cursor in the specific cell in the Redline Layer column A floating arrow displays Click the arrow and then select Open A message asks if you want to save or open the file 5 Click Save to save the file to your hard drive ensure that the Open in XMap check box is selected The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map OR Click Open to open the file from its current location ensure that the Open in XMap
233. do not rename the form it is named Copy of lt form name gt Delete a form Select the form you want to delete and click Delete You cannot undo a deletion 3 To exit the dialog box click Close Query 156 Working With GIS Creating a Query This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Query subtab to build custom attribute queries to run against the layer selected in the workspace You can also use the Query subtab to create spatial queries allowing you to see patterns between two layers Queries saved in a database are available to everyone you Share your data with You can customize your default query option settings To Create an Attribute Query Use the following steps to create an attribute query using the GIS tab L 10 Li 12 13 14 Click the GIS tab Click the Query subtab Select the layer you want to query from the Layer drop down list only layers in the workspace display in this list If a query is already displaying in the Query subtab click the Manage button and then click New Optional To name the query something other than the default the default name is Query click the Manage button and then click Rename The Query text box activates and lets you edit the query name Click the cell under Attribute A drop down list displays all of the attribute fields in the selected layer Select the field you want to query
234. do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or Substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE GDAL Proj4 License Copyright 2000 Frank Warmerdam Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or Substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHA
235. documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary including SFXWiz as part of a self extracting archive that is permitted without inclusion of this license as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled 3 Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphical interfaces and dynamic shared or static library versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP releases including but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or of the Info ZIP URL s 4 Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip UnZipSFX Wiz Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases GDAL I ntronurbs cpp License This code is derived from the code associated with the book An Introduction to NURBS by David F Rogers More information on the book and the code is available at
236. draw object is moved to the new destination Note To select multiple draw objects in the file list press and hold the CTRL key and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last file Using Draw Objects Copying and Placing Draw Objects You can copy any draw object you place on the map Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Copy Draw Objects Use the following steps to copy draw objects 1 Open the project that contains the draw object you want to copy 2 Click the Draw tab 3 To copy a single draw object click the Select tool Al and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the active object OR To copy multiple draw objects click the Select tool A and then drag a box over the draw objects you want to copy 4 To copy press the CTRL C keys on your keyboard 5 To paste press CTRL V on your keyboard The newly copied object is placed directly on top of the original copied object 6 To move the copied object use the table below Routable Road Routable Press and hold the SHIFT Trail Track Line Arc key on your keyboard and Spline Polygon Rectangle drag the object to the new Circle or MapNote location Symbol or Text Drag the object to the new location e To
237. ds Note If your microphone is active when you exit the program it will still be active when you re enter the application 3 To trigger an audible signal when a voice command is recognized select the Beep When Heard check box 4 To display all of the possible voice commands including variations of the commands select the Show All Commands check box Both enabled Le and disabled is commands are displayed Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS is not initialized Training the Speech Recognition Engine To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated 297 XMap User Guide You should train the speech recognition engine to provide good speech recognition results Before training ensure your microphone is active and the speech recognition feature Is on For more information see Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition To Train the Engine to Recognize Your Speech Patterns You should train the speech recognition engine to recognize your specific speech patterns This is often done by reading a predetermined piece of text supplied by the creator of the Speech recognition engine If the engine supports multiple user models you can train the engine to recognize more than one speech pattern Use the following steps to train the speech recognition engine to recognize your speech patterns L w 7 Tips Click the Options button E SESE on t
238. dwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of Support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability 353 Index 3 Be Ate neni EE A AS 261 262 266 3D FIX per a 285 292 297 303 3DTQ Region Coverage cccceeeeeees 36 A ADOT GPS airite a a 294 Activating Speech Recognition 297 ACtiVe Layer arianen EEE TA 30 Adad Field oentron aAA 139 Add Synchronized Layers 30 79 Add Delete Words ccccceeeeeeeeeees 303 Adding a Field to a Layer 5 139 Adding a SYMDOI cccceceeeeeeeeeees 231 Adding a Symbol Set ccee ees 130 Adding a Text Label 00000es 231 Adding a WaypOint cccceeeeee eens 231 Adding Data to XMap
239. e This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Once you have created a document field using the Attributes Design view you can upload it to embed it in the record For more information about how to manage embedded documents see Working with Embedded Documents Note The maximum size allowed for an embedded document is 50 MB To Embed a Document from the Attribute Table in Datasheet View Use the following steps to link a document to an attribute from the attribute table The layer must contain a document field created in XMap Enterprise or XMap Editor before a document can be embedded L 2 3 Click the GIS tab Click the Attributes subtab and click the Datasheet View button FA From the Layer drop down list select the layer that contains the attribute Find the column in the table for the document field Then find attribute in which you want to embed a document and hover over the cell under the document column An arrow displays Click the arrow and then click Upload From the Upload File dialog box browse to the file that you want to embed and then click Open A hyperlink to that document displays in the Attribute table The document is embedded in the source database To Embed a Document from the Map You can link a document to an attribute from the map You must create a document field in the layer before you embed a document L Right cli
240. e excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement y
241. e Edit tool on the toolbar E l 3 On the map click the geometry you want to delete 4 Right click the geometry and click Delete Object OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard Notes e To return to the default map mode click the Navigation tool on the toolbar e To undo your last action click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo your last 114 Working With GIS action click the Redo button gt To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool 9 If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool S automatically commit your changes Making COGO Edits This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise COGO editing coordinate geometry editing is used for precision data creation or editing Points lines or polygons can be built edited or centered by coordinates angle distance measurements or bearing distance measurements COGO editing is useful when you know the exact location of points or the shape points of the line or polygon geometries you would like to create or edit It is also helpful when you know the exact location of the points lines or polygons on which you want to center To Make COGO Edits Use the following steps to use the
242. e If you select No Way you cannot select any other options Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings Click Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties to their default settings Click Done Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote The easiest way to label your route points start stop via and finish with a MapNote is to use the Route Preferences section of the Route tab If you select more than one option each category of information location comments and or summary displays in the same MapNote To Label a Route Point with a MapNote Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote L 2 3 4 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area Under Route Features select the check box next to each MapNote you want to display at your route points e Show Location MapNotes Displays the coordinate information for each point in your route e Show Comments MapNotes Displays comments about each point of the route as specified in the Route Advanced subtab To modify route comments click the Route tab click the Advanced subtab select the route and then click in the Comments column twice do not double click next to the route point you want to create a comment for The information you type in the Comments field for that point is placed in a Comments MapNote when you selected
243. e Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop down list Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes Select the List option From the Commands drop down list select the command grouping to which you want to assign shortcuts If you want assign shortcuts to several groupings select All Commands Click to select the command to which you want to assign a shortcut Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign for that command Click Assign The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you assigned and displays as pending Repeat the steps for each command you want to assign Click Apply to save the changes OR Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog box To sort the command list view click a heading Group Command or Shortcut You cannot change the following keyboard shortcut combinations O O O O O O O O O O ALT F4 Close Window F1 Help ALT F1 Help Menu SHIFT F10 Context Menu CTRL C Copy CTRL V Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo ALT M Set Focus on Map You cannot use the following keys when assigning shortcuts O O O O Windows Key Application Key Print Screen Scroll Lo
244. e Source Layer box 6 Under Points select All Selected or Query Results Unavailable options are grayed out If you select Query the active query displays in the Active Query box 7 Select a form from the Attach Form drop down list if available 8 Information about the number of points selected for export displays in the information box 9 In the GPX File Name box type a name for the file 10 If your device is not showing as a removable drive such as Removable Disk E in the Export box click Connect to connect your PN Series GPS device for transfer Note You can also select a different location for exporting the file from the Export drop down list or click the Browse button to browse to a new location 11 Click OK Classification and Symbolization 323 XMap User Guide To make full use of the symbol set that is available on a PN Series GPS classify and symbolize the GIS point layer using the Earthmate PN Series symbol set e You can use a single value or unique value classification e You must symbolize the null value for a unique value classification Symbolization is not required for a single value classification e Do not use the following geocache symbols from the Earthmate PN Series symbol set or the objects will be sorted to the Geocaches Page on the device O 4 Hw PA agoe Ge2Qwesas Importing GIS Points Once you have finished editing points or adding new points to your device with the proper p
245. e String Size text box type the maximum number of characters allowed 4 Click OK e Add Formula Field 1 Type a name for the field in the Field Name box This will be used as the column heading 139 XMap User Guide 2 3 6 7 Select a data type from the Data Type drop down list If you selected String Unicode String Memo Unicode Memo or URL in the String Size text box type the maximum number of characters allowed From the Fields drop down list select a field type to filter the field list or select All fields to view all available fields To add a field to the Formula box above the Fields Functions area double click it in the list From the Functions drop down list select a category to filter the function or click All categories to view all available functions Click OK e Add Constrained Field L 2 5 Type a name for the field in the Field Name box This will be used as the column heading Select a data type from the Data Type drop down list e If you select String Unicode String Memo Unicode Memo or URL in the String Size text box type the maximum number of characters allowed e If you select Double 15 or Float 6 in the Precision text box type the number of digits to which the field should be rounded If the data type supports constraints a Select the type of constraint from the Constraint Type drop down list b Define the constraint May be left blank The optio
246. e When tracking and GPS Options 1 2 Click the Options button Be SEERE on the toolbar and then click the GPS Settings tab Set the preferences you want to use When tracking Snap to route Automatically locates the place on the route that is closest to your vehicle s current location Start GPS log Automatically generates a GPS log Use High Contrast colors Automatically enables high contrast map colors Magnify map Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified magnification 125 150 175 or 200 Recenter map on GPS Automatically centers the map on the GPS Rotate map in GPS direction Automatically rotates the 2 D 3 D map in the direction of travel Direction of travel always displays as the top of the screen regardless of compass direction Auto zoom to turn 2 D only Automatically pans and zooms the map to display both the current GPS position and the position of the next turn Select data zoom levels from the Mintmum zoom and Maximum zoom drop down lists to stop the map from zooming out in further than you want it to when approaching the next turn Show GPS bread crumb trail Automatically displays your GPS progress on the map as a bread crumb trail up to the maximum specified number of points 5 000 points is approximately one hour and 20 minutes worth of points This setting does not affect the number of points captured in the GPS log file To change the point number type the new number
247. e contact or the address coordinate information could not be found in the program Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Manually Entering Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering each record You can also add an address book entry by right clicking the map selecting Create Address Book Entry and following steps 4 6 below If you right click the map at the location for the address book entry some of the information such as coordinates street name city state etc automatically complete the Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box To Manually Enter Address Book Information Use the following steps to manually enter address book information 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click New The Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box opens 4 Enter the information for the entry 5 From the Update Location drop down list select the method for updating the location on the map From Street Address From Lat Lon or No if you do not want to update the location 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each contact you want to add Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the
248. e default name or give it a specific name When you have many different projects and are trying to locate a specific map view you may find it more helpful to rename the project To Rename a Project Use the following steps to rename a project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Ifthe project you want to add delete files for is not displaying open the project The contents of the current project display in the Primary Map window on the right side of the dialog area Note To verify the correct project is displaying check the title bar The project name displays directly after the product name 3 Click File and then click Save As The Save File dialog box opens 4 Type the name in the text box and then click Save You now have two files one with the original name and one with the new name Using Transfer Files Using Transfer Files Overview This section describes how to create import and e mail a transfer file You can package projects including their routes draw layers and other contents into one transfer file for convenience The transfer file facilitates e mailing copying project information to other computers and copying projects between DeLorme programs Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data Creating Transfer Files A project and its contents can be packaged into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying You can create a transfer file with or without hyperlinked file attachme
249. e draw files You can view draw files individually or with other draw files What is a Draw File Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map You can add various objects to the draw file to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the map but these objects do not become part of the map They exist in a draw file that overlays the map There are five different types of draw files draw road trail waypoint and track You can create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other while still viewing the map beneath See Editing Locking Draw Files When you clear or delete a draw file the objects in the draw file do not display and are deleted along with the draw file When you create and save draw files they are saved within the current project Some additional draw file facts e A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to the map e As you create draw files they are added to the current project e You can add draw files to multiple projects e You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area e Draw files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Draw with the default name for example DrawLayer anl1 with indicating the number order in which the file was created You can rename draw files to better identify your specific information See Creating a New Draw File e You can have multiple draw files displaying at once while working on
250. e following steps to add specific files to a particular project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 If the project you want to add files to is not displaying open the project The contents of the current project display in the primary map window on the right side of the dialog area Note To verify the correct project is displaying check the title bar The project name displays directly after the product name 3 To add a new route or draw file click Data click New and then click Draw File or Route File A new draw or route file is added to your project OR To add an existing route draw adc dcf tif sid txt or dds file a Click Data and then click Add The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens b Browse to the folder where the file you want to add is located and click to select it c Select the map you want to add the file to primary secondary or both from the Add To drop down list Notes e adc txt tif and sid files are the only files you can add to both the primary and secondary maps e sid and tiff tif files must contain spatial reference information to add them If they do not an error message displays and you must use a third party application to specify the spatial reference information d Click Add The file is added to the current project under the selected map Note If you add a file to a project and then edit and save it later the file is updated in every project you have added it to This does not apply to ra
251. e for download delivery only so be sure to select Download from the Delivery Method drop down list 331 XMap User Guide eg Dist py Ar a h ih Lf i vailablele WOPO AE Neon Arani Aa 0409 Home Select Map Data inte i Delivery Method i Download ONTO acts 1 Click the Add to List button A To List to name and add the selected areas to your selection list 2 Type the name of your map in the Name Your Selection box and then click OK 2 Mame Your Selection letiers numbers and spaces only Cancel OK Step 5 View your selections 1 If you did not previously enter a certificate key type the key in the Validation Key box and click Add Key 2 Click Checkout to complete the ordering process 332 Using NetLink Note If the order exceeds 40 you must pay the difference or purchase a subscription If the order is less than 40 your certificate number is credited with the difference gt Selections List YarmouthMe 14 ko of Color DOOD Oownload Time 200k 4 4 minutes m CDIDVD HD Mail Orders 0 Selections 0 0 M Indude maps for my DeLorme GPS with my Map Library order Exctudeas MOAA charts Onder Summary Color DOGG Download 515 00 Discounts 515 00 Shop On 0 00 Checkout Step 6 View license agreement and submit order The first time you download imagery or data a license agreement displays 1 Read the agreement and click I Agree 2 If your order did not
252. e imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below 6 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced e If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Copying and Pasting You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols to create new symbols or edit existing ones To Copy and Paste in XSym Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an
253. e last check box you select is the data that displays on the map Use the following steps to designate which data layer to display on the map 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Primary Map and or Secondary Map depending on the map window you want to use to view the dataset click the plus sign next to ADP Dataset Each of your ADP datasets display 3 Click the plus sign next to the ADP location The contents of the dataset display 4 Ifthe check box next to the data layer you want to display on the map is selected clear the check box and then select it again The data layer displays on the map OR If the check box next to the data layer you want to display is cleared select the check box The data layer displays on the map Managing Projects Creating and Deleting Projects You can create different data configurations and save them in separate projects To Create a New Project When you create a new project all of the data selected as your base data Is available in the new project For more information see Adding Removing Base Data Use the following steps to create a new project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Click File and then click New A new untitled project opens using the last map view as the default view Untitled displays in the title bar after the product name 59 XMap User Guide OR To name the file and save it click File and then click Save As Type the name in the File Name text box and then click Save
254. e of the query being referenced OR queryid identification number of the query in the database being referenced e attributes the name of attribute field to include in the exported layer Note If this parameter is left blank all attribute fields in the layer will be exported Also not all attribute field data types that are supported in XMap are supported in the exported file formats To Export Files Using the Command Line All export command lines of this type begin with xmapexport in the command line All parameters are separated by a single space and parsed with on the command line 1 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 2 Type the parameters into the command line An example of the format would be xmapexport source server username xmap 7 source db database_ test output file file C gisdata states shp source layer states 3 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is exported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file to export in days hours minutes and seconds Note To send the results of a command to a logfile type gt path filename log 2 gt 1 at the end of the command Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear in the command line If no path is specified the logfile will be created in the default target directory
255. e options as the Create New Form dialog except you cannot change the layer 4 Follow the steps in To Create a Form above to modify the form Opening a Form This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The functions available in a form depend on the permissions set by the database and Forms administrator 154 Working With GIS Within XMap you can use forms to change the attributes for one or more geometries For more information about opening PN compatible forms on a device see Sending GIS Points and Forms Notes e XMap designates some attributes as read only a black lock icon lal appears next to these fields on the form e For items the form creator had designated as read only a red lock icon i appears next to the item e The title and description for a form are established when the form is created e You can use the Undo and Redo buttons in the toolbar to reverse your changes until you commit them e For more information about XMap Forms see the Forms Overview To Open a Form Use the following steps to open a form 1 To open a form do one of the following e Click the GIS tab and ensure the Workspace tab is selected e Click Tools point to Forms and click Open e Right click a layer in the workspace table point to Forms and click Open e Inthe toolbar click the Forms menu button and click Open Form e Assign a keyboar
256. e relative to the other programs you are running By default this is set to 100 maximum Note that you cannot set the volume higher than your speakers or Windows Control Panel settings capabilities Note Click Audio Controls to access additional volume settings 7 Use the Speaking Rate spin box to adjust the rate at which the computer s voice will soeak A value of 50 is normal Voice Preferences To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated The Voice tab in the Options dialog displays a series of Engine Option buttons These option buttons allow you to view information or change preference settings in your speech 303 XMap User Guide recognition or text to speech engines Some speech recognition or text to speech engines do not support some of the preference options To View and Update Speech Recognition Preferences To change speech input preferences click the Options button Ee EESE on the toolbar or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box and then click the Voice Settings tab The following options are available under the Speech Recognition area of the dialog box e Microphone Setup Opens the Microphone Wizard to adjust speech recognition whenever you change microphone or noise environments e Speech Profile Training Opens Voice Training Wizard to train the engine to recognize your speech patterns This proc
257. e route list on the left clear the check box next to each route you want to hide from view on the map OR Right click the route you want to clear from the map view point to Manage Route and then click Hide Route To Center the Map on a Route Use the following steps to center a route on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 Double click the route in the route list on the left Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view click the Route tab click the New Edit subtab and select the route from the Name drop down list Saving a Route The route in memory is retained as you create it You are prompted to save your route when you create a new project or exit the program 282 Routing e Creating a new project When you click File New in the Files dialog area on the MapData tab you are asked if you want to save changes to the most recently used project A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes to an unsaved route e Exiting the application The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save your changes You can also save the route using the Route tab Routes have anr extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Navigation To Save a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab 1 Create a route 2 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 3 Click File and then click Save Deleting a Route
258. e same name already exists in the new DeLorme Docs location the Confirm Link to Existing File dialog box opens Go to step 4 4 Click Link to replace the project link to the existing file in the new location and then go to step 5 OR Click Link All to replace any project links to existing files in the new location and then go to step 5 OR Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it with a different name OR Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration that has occurred up to this point 5 Inthe Migration Completed dialog box click Open to open the migrated project or Close to close the dialog box and return to your last active project Note If there is a problem with the migration a message will notify you of any corrective action you need to take Basic Functions Zooming In and Out You can use the drag and zoom feature zoom tools or the data zoom level Data zoom level is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists in reality It is the amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor The data zoom level is similar to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper maps For example 1 24 000 1 100 000 1 500 000 and so on to quickly change the zoom level of the map view Notes e Increase the data zoom level number to show a smaller geographic area at greater detail e Decrease the data zoom level number to show a la
259. e source layer will widen to match a 200 character string in the target layer and vice versa The following list shows which attributes are compatible and the direction of compatibility Boolean gt Byte gt Small Interger gt Interger gt Big Integer String lt gt URLs String gt Memo Float gt Double Datetime Document Currency Memo Notes e The master attribute and changes tables of the target layer are emptied The extended attributes tables are not emptied but they must be manually rejoined after the import process is completed The changes table has an entry written to it indicating a replace operation occurred to ensure OpenSpace Synchronization still operates The changes table has an entry written to it for each geometry that is added to the target layer e By definition any attribute is automatically compatible with itself and its precision if applicable can widen or narrow e The same conditions that exist for Append for Geocoded point layers and unregistered dxf etc layers also exist for Replace Replace Examples Below are two examples of how a replace operation would affect the primary attribute table Any attribute columns present in the import but absent in the target layer will be added Unpopulated records are given NULL values Any columns absent in the import but present in the target layer will be left in place the data will be erased and populated with NULL values The spatial affect of Replace
260. e tool un on the toolbar 2 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to disable snapping 3 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line The measure line displays as a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line displays in a label at each endpoint of the line 4 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The perimeter measurements display To Get Information About a Location 33 XMap User Guide Use the Information button G on the toolbar to click a point symbol feature measurement line track or area on the map to identify it and view detailed information about it The Information button is hidden by default to show it right click the toolbar to open the menu and click Information Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature L 2 Notes Click the I nformation button Click the map feature you want information for such as a road
261. ea Show hide or reorder Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to show tabs hide or reorder tabs Import or export a tab Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to import or configuration file export a tab configuration file Voice Create new speech You can create a new speech recognition profile for each of recognition profiles your working environments noisy quiet and users your spouse or child by clicking the Speech settings in the Windows Control Panel Learn how to make the If there is background noise while you are speaking it may microphone more sensitive be helpful to precede all of your voice commands with a to your commands in noisy special phrase like Simon Says See the Voice Settings environments tab of the Options dialog box Frequently Asked Questions These questions are asked most frequently by our customers e Why doesn t map data display in all projects The procedure for adding data to XMap varies it depends on if you want to add the data to the current project or if you want to add it to all projects If you added the data to only the current project and you want to view it in all projects you must add the data as base data in the application Use the steps below to add a map dataset as base data 1 Click the Map Data tab XMap User Guide 2 Click Data and then click Base Data The Base Data Locations dialog box opens listing each of the data sources on your system 3 Cl
262. ea that will be saved as a bitmap image Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level Getting Started 6 Click the Save button hil The Save 2D Map Image dialog box opens 7 Type the file name in the File Name text box select to save the file as a bmp or jpg from the Save as Type drop down list select the DPI dots per inch value optional and click Save Measuring Distance and Area Use the Measure tool Gaa on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box The snap function snaps attaches the point of a measurement line to a point on a road or another measurement object This ensures a more accurate measurement of distance or area To measure area you must completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point to your starting point Notes e The Measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map If you want to measure the distance of a road try creating a route If you want to measure a large area on the map use the area object tools in the Draw tab e To disable the auto snap function hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while using the Measure tool e Measure objects lines and areas are saved with the current project When you create a new project the measure objects do not display If you want the same measure objects on your new project you must recreate them e To view information ab
263. each geometry that is added to the target layer 94 Working With GIS e Geocoded point layers can be appended only if all their attribute columns match AND the source layer is geocoded by the same procedure as the target layer Address amp Address Zip Code amp Zip Code Lat Lon amp Lat Lon e Layers that are left unregistered during the import process and have not had any registration applied to them after import can only have other unregistered layers appended to them This is possible for dxf dwf and dwg files that have no spatial reference to the earth surface However once registration is applied to a layer it cannot have other unregistered layers appended to it Append Example Below are two examples of how an append operation would affect the primary attribute table Any attribute columns present in the import but absent in the target layer will be added Any columns absent in the import but present in the target layer will be left in place All unpopulated records are given NULL values The spatial effect of Append is the same as a copy paste operation abutting or overlapping geometries are not joined Example 1 SOURCE LAYER w mme w PE s mons fon TARGET LAYER o mme we o a fes fomm oo O e meme ipo SSS RESULT w mme w o a fes Tonan o O e meme fon o Example 2 SOURCE LAYER 95 XMap User Guide io name type i TARGET LAYER RESULT OpenSpace Considerations
264. ecenters the map on the current GPS location Stop centering on GPS Stops the map from recentering on your current GPS ALT P location Stop center on GPS ALT P Clear GPS Clears the GPS bread crumb trail from the map Autorotate map on Turns automatic map rotation on ALT R Autorotate map off Turns automatic map rotation off ALT R Autozoom map on When GPS tracking turns automatic zoom on ALT Z Autozoom map off When GPS tracking turns automatic zoom off ALT Z Voice Tab Commands The following table shows Voice tab voice commands and the response Speech Recognition Tips calculated To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route The following tips provide information on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone 301 XMap User Guide e Speech recognition is only active when your application is the active window e Commands become enabled based on your current GPS status your data zoom level and other factors Enabled commands do not have a red x on the icon e Disabled commands have a red x on the icon Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS has not been initialized e Avoid noisy environments when using voice command navigation e Use a close talk microphone for best speech recognition results e Properly position your microphone to achieve the best speech recognition results For a
265. ected check box displays on the map Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view Click More The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected e Draw layer contents include the draw object label name comments about the draw object the URL assigned when the draw object was added to the map the date and time the object was last modified and the draw object type symbol line polygon circle etc e Road layer contents include the routable road name comments about the routable road the URL assigned when the routable road was added to the map the date and time the routable road was last modified and the length of the road in the measurement chosen in the Display settings e Trail layer contents include the routable trail name comments about the routable trail the URL assigned when the routable trail was added to the map the date and time the routable trail was last modified and the length of the trail in the measurement chosen in the Display settings e Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint the URL assigned when the waypoint was added to the map the date and time the waypoint was last modified the coordinates of the waypoint the elevation of the waypoint and the symbol name e Track layer contents include comments about the track the URL assigned when the trac
266. ed information is placed in a new query e You can combine spatial and attribute queries to build powerful complex queries Changing How Query Results Display on the Map This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The Query subtab has a Map Effect feature that lets you change how query results display on the map e Highlight Depicts the query results on the map based on the selected query results color style Query results display on the map with the specified highlight color You can use the editing tools in the Query tab to create custom highlight colors for your query results The steps for creating a custom highlight color design vary based on the type of layer you are querying Notes e To delete the default highlight color or any other custom highlight colors you ve created right click the highlight feature in the Symbolization table and click Delete Feature e To add multiple highlight colors right click the Symbolization table and select Insert Feature The highlight colors are in the Symbol drop down list to the right of the Query table in the Query Results group box e After running a custom highlight query changing the active classification of the layer may cause the currently highlighted objects to display with a different symbolization 159 XMap User Guide Filter Changes the look of the geometry so that only the area s affected by the query display on the m
267. ed to the layer but the query is still available in the Query list in the Query subtab and the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab To permanently delete a query from a workspace or database see Deleting a Query To Cancel a Query Use the following steps to cancel a query 1 Create a query Note The Cancel button is not available until you have run a query 2 Click Cancel The query results are no longer highlighted on the map or in the Attributes subtab but the query is available in the query list in both the Query and Attribute subtabs The query will not disappear from the query view until you exit the Query subtab Reordering Layers Reordering Layers This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you import layer the layer is automatically set to appear at Z level 4500 The acceptable value range is from 1 to 31 000 You can use the Layering subtab to drag and drop layers and adjust their Z levels Layers are placed according to their Z level layers with a high Z level are placed on top of the map display layers with a low Z level are placed on the bottom of the map display To Reorder Layers 162 Working With GIS Use the following steps to reorder layers 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Select the check box next to each layer you want to reorder 4 Click the Layering subtab The Layering dialog area
268. eeeees 118 Maximum Elevation ccccceeeeeees 255 WAS URS srnka eii T Sead ees 33 42 Microphone ccc cece cece ee eeeeeees 297 303 Minimum Elevation ccceceeeeeeeees 255 Modifying Existing WorkFiles 249 Modifying the Properties of a Layer 106 Monitoring GPS Satellite Information 293 Monitoring Speech Recognition 297 Monitoring Your GPS Status 292 Moving a Contact s Location On the Map TCR ee TERT Te nT eT ee Orr Tree tT 195 Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw FING EA E E E terns hac A E T 216 Moving and Deleting MapNotes 233 282 Moving Draw Objects ccceeeeeees 218 Wie SD iced ian Cebeepneueennrotor 61 66 N Natural Break ercon nei anmier einen 118 Navigation TOOl cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Netbook oiisiiitincsicaietica iamsiiadinies 35 36 NEU Kaayittectcuned ai iacean es NS 59 333 NOIN eericarenee aA 255 O OGIS Geographic Markup Language 91 Opaque cee eee ee eee 124 126 128 159 Opening a Project cece eee eee e ee ees 60 Opening a Subscription File 78 Opening a Symbol Set c cece 235 Opening Existing WorkFiles 246 ODGhaAUOR vewcduaheteetiratinsiatddwancites 141 156 Options Dialog Box 35 36 39 40 41 42 49 51 266 285 303 Overview Map ccccseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 21 P Panning the Map 0ceeeeeeeees 17 289 Parks or Reserves
269. ems such as an area codes street intersections or a category such as Park Interstate and so on use the Advanced subtab The search options available depend on your datasets To Perform a Basic Search Follow the steps below to use the QuickSearch subtab 1 Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch button OR Press CTRL F on your keyboard 2 Type a name address ZIP Postal Code town name coordinate draw object label address book contact name street intersection etc in the Search For text box See Searching Tips for a description of input formats OR Select From Address Book from the Search For drop down list to find an address book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK Notes e The Book check box under the Address Book buttons must be selected to search for address book contacts For more information see Searching for Address Book Contacts e Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or six characters for a Postal Code search you do not need to include spaces in a Postal Code e Address searches should be in the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code OR street address city state Zip Postal Code 3 Click Search If your search is Very Successful 178 Tips Finding a Location on the Map The results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place A MapTag displays if the MapTags chec
270. en as well as the following options Working With GIS e SELECTED Acts against the geometries in the active selection if any Selections are made with the Selection tool Edit tool Edit Points tool or Rotate Geometry tool e MAP CENTER Acts against the coordinate of the current map center and updates the query every time the map center is changed e COORDINATE Acts against the user specified coordinate If you select this option the Edit Query dialog box opens and you are prompted to specify the coordinates in latitude longitude format only or you can click Map Center to use the current map center 8 Click the cell under Logical Operator and select a logical operator And Or or And Not from the drop down list 9 Optional Repeat steps 5 8 in the next row s to create a complex spatial query 10 Click Run 11 All objects affected by the query are highlighted on the map and the number count of query results displays under Query Results You can change how query results display on the map using the edit tools in the Query tab Note To decrease the time it takes to run a query disable the Count function by clicking the Query button and then clicking Count to toggle the feature on off Note Click the Delete button in the left column of the Query table to delete that row in the query Tips e You can copy a query and use it as a base for another query To copy a query click the Manage button and then click Copy The copi
271. en text and graphic tools Click the I mage tool ad Click the location on the map where you want to add your image The Select Image File dialog box opens You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position Select an image file jpg bmp or gif to place on your map and then click Open The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text box next to the Image tool under Layout Tools You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button k and browsing to an alternative image Select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image s width to height ratio while resizing Select the Preview I mage check box to preview the image on the map To Add a GIS Legend to Your Map Use the following steps to add a GIS legend to your map 1 2 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently displaying and then select the check boxes next to each layer for which you want to add the legend to your map Click the Print tab and then click Map to view the Print Map dialog area Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the GIS Legend tool juz Select the layer with the legend you want to add to the map from the Layer drop down list Click the location on the map where you want to add your
272. enniiuevecataceyeagi es 83 87 Beep When Heard cccecceeeeeeeee 297 BIO LEG CE norises r avii 139 BEMAD crino 17 238 240 241 Blended 00000eeees 124 126 128 159 BOOICAI uenen uneei 139 Breaking Linear Objects 85 228 BUN Ocana a a 107 BUIK EXDOMEING isi iirietatinadarepouniwiie 87 89 Bulk IMPONG cece cece eee eee ees 83 85 BYTE aani ron E EA 139 C Cancelling a Query ssesererererrrrrren 162 Category erora a ented 238 Category Searches ccceeeeeeee eee eees 189 Center on GPS wiceetni Retest aiidievartels 289 Centering Routes on the Map 282 Centering the Map cccceeeeeeeeees 17 Centering the Map on an Address Book CONES GU acts e aen N cavets 194 Changing Coordinate Grid Properties 69 Changing Draw Connection Properties 71 Changing Draw Object Types 214 Changing How POIs Display on the Map 41 Changing How Query Results Display in the Attributes Subtab 05 161 Changing How Query Results Display on MeMa eres in tisemeeer atu tinket eaten 159 Changing Point Properties 05 67 Changing the Background Color of a Printed MAD rererere 172 Changing the Contour Properties 68 Changing the Elevation Properties 73 Changing the Map Colors 000e 40 Changing the Map Magnification 40 Changing the Properties in Your Data 66 Changing the Properties of a Stop 2
273. ent elevation if the GPS status is 3 D and is Elevation GPS Status 292 based on the selected Units preference Elevation can be displayed with a 2 D status your position is indicated accurately on your screen as you travel unless you are in an area where your elevation varies greatly No GPS A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not yet detected by your computer This status usually displays when initialization first begins Acquiring A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your position This status displays while the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and can take several minutes 2 D A yellow circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but there is insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position This usually indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due to e Only three satellites being used e Poor signals from the satellites Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception 3 D A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite Using GPS data to determine your location When the status reads 3 D your current coordinates elevation and heading are displayed along with the speed you are currently traveling Note If you are tracking with a WAAS enabled device a 3 D fix displays as 3 D DGPS Monitoring GPS Satellite Information Click Sat Info in
274. epart A special specifier used in date functions Jump to the bottom of this topic for a list of datepart specifiers 141 XMap User Guide Expression The result of combining several functions or operators Field The name of a field in the table enclosed in brackets For example Population2000 A field has an associated data type in the table Logical expression An expression yielding either TRUE or FALSE Float_expression An expression yielding a float result Integer_expression An expression yielding an integer result Numeric_expression An expression yielding a numeric result either integer or float String expression An expression yielding a string result AND logical expression AND Returns TRUE if both of two logical logical expression expressions are TRUE and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression AVG AVG field Returns the average of a field s values The result type is the same as the data type of field CAST CAST expression AS Transforms an expression of one data data _ type type into another data type The result type is as specified by data_type CEILING CEI LING Returns the smallest integer greater numeric_expression than or equal to a number The result type is integer_ expression CHARI NDEX CHARI NDEX Returns the index to the beginning of string expression the first string expression in second string expression string An optional starting location may integer_expression
275. er e During installation e After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu e From your computer s Start menu Note If you use Tab Manager to make changes while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes To Reorder the Tabs Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager Options 1 Open XMap click the arrow next to the Options button Eg on the toolbar and click Tab Manager XMap 2 Click the tab you want to reorder to highlight it 3 Click the up arrow a or the down arrow to move the tab to the new position 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder 5 Optional Click Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default tab order showing all available tabs 6 Click OK 7 Exit XMap 8 Open XMap 48 Using Keyboard Shortcuts Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Your application comes with the following DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes e 3 D Navigation e Desktop Mapping e In vehicle Navigation You cannot edit DeLorme schemes but you can create custom schemes that you can edit You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme 1 Click the Options button c EEE on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box
276. er and click the GPS button E on the toolbar or on the GPS tab Tip Once a route is calculated you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and more Click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced subtab to display the advanced routing options or click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Start Stop Your GPS Connection The GPS button on the toolbar lets you start your GPS connection if the device is not active or stop the connection if it is active To start or stop your GPS connection click the GPS button 2 on the toolbar The GPS tab area opens so you can monitor your GPS status To Exchange Information with a Handheld GPS Use the Exchange button s on the toolbar also on the GPS and Handheld Export tabs to exchange objects such as maps Earthmate PN Series GPS only waypoints tracks and routes with a handheld device You can also use the Send GIS Layer button im and Import GIS Layer button i to export and import GIS point layers including forms between XMap and your device For more information on exchanging information see Help topics listed under Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices or Exchanging Information with a Third Party GPS Device To Measure Distance Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter area on the map For more information see Measuring Distance and Area 1 Click the Measur
277. er mode Select a magnification percentage from the Magnify drop down box or type a magnification percentage to increase decrease magnification and get an overall view of the image area Note You can also increase decrease the magnification of your source image using drag and zoom functionality or the Page Down and Page Up keys on your keyboard press Page Down to zoom in or press Page Up to zoom out Optional Move your cursor to the edge of the image window until a white hand displays Drag the hand to move the map in that direction or click on the image area to center the image on the point clicked OR With your cursor anywhere on the map press the CTRL key on your keyboard the cursor becomes a white hand Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to a new location Optional To aid with readability of the image in the Image Window click the Rotate Left tool to rotate the image left Click the Rotate Right tool to rotate the image right Click within the map window on the right to center the source or base map on the point clicked You should enter both the image window and the map window on the same area for registration Select a solution from the Solution drop down list e Affine Use this transform to correct an image that appears sheared parallel lines are acceptable but lines that should be perpendicular are not Use the control point tool to associate points on the layer to register left window with correspon
278. er to a power power must be of type integer expression The result type is float_ expression Return TRUE if the first string begins with the second string and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression Returns the string generated by replacing all occurrences of the second string expression in the first string expression with the third string expression The result type is string expression Return the rightmost number_of_ characters characters of a string number_of_characters must be of type integer_expression The result type is string expression Return a string with spaces removed from its right end The result type is string expression Round number to number of digits decimal places to the right of the decimal point negative values of SQRT STUFF STR SUBSTRING SUFFIX SUM UPPER YEAR Working With GIS number_of_digits are to the left of the decimal point number_of_ digits must be of type integer_expression The result type is float_ expression SQRT numeric_expression Returns the square root of a number The result type is float_ expression STUFF string expression Return the string formed by replacing Start length the length characters of the first string string expression beginning at start with the second string length and start must be of type integer_expression The result type is string expression STR numeric_expression Returns a string of len
279. ermissions for a GIS layer you sent to your device as a GPX file you can import them to XMap and merge them with your GIS layer Note This Help topic explains how to use XMap to import GIS points from your device to XMap for information about working with GPX files and forms on your device see the PN Pro Firmware Update document on the Earthmate PN Series Wiki To Import GIS Points to a PN Series GPS Use the following steps to import GIS points from your PN Series GPS device to XMap 1 In XMap open the project that contains the source GIS layers for the points you want to import 2 Connect your PN Series GPS device to your computer and power it on On the device s Connect to Computer screen select Map Transfer and then Transfer to SD Card OR from any screen press MENU go to Device Setup gt Connect to Computer and select Transfer to SD Card from the USB Setting drop down list 3 In XMap click the Import GIS Layer button i on the toolbar OR Click the layer in the workspace click Tools and click I mport from PN Series Device OR Right click the layer in the workspace table and click Import from PN Series Device The Import from PN Series Device dialog box opens 4 If your device is not showing as a removable drive such as Removable Disk E in the Data Source box click Connect to connect your PN Series GPS device for transfer Note You can also select a different location from which to import the file from the Data
280. erson the User obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions 1 The above copyright notices and this permission notice which includes the disclaimer below shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software 2 The name of a copyright holder shall not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Software without specific prior written permission THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE NO ASSURANCES ARE PROVIDED BY THE COPY
281. erver and database permissions and you are connected to the network Contact your IT department if you experience problems Why doesn t my Workspace display any layers If there are no layers in your Workspace you may have accidentally removed them To retrieve the layers click the GIS tab click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently selected click the Layers button and then click Manage Select the Source Database you want to pull layers from highlight the Layers in the Database and then click the move or move all button to move the layers into your workspace If the database where your layers are present is not listed in the Source Database drop down list you can connect to it by selecting the Other option If you have not yet created a database you can do so by selecting the New option in the Target Database drop down list in the Create Layer and Import Wizard dialogs Where do find the map settings and other Options settings Click the Options button J a on the toolbar to modify GPS voice GIS map feature display handheld and keyboard shortcut and 3 D preferences For more information see To Open the Options Dialog Box Upgraders only What happens to my projects when upgrade In previous versions of XMap your projects draw files route files log files and other DeLorme files were stored by default in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your computer s C drive unless you specified a different dire
282. es Parks and Reserves are available at data zoom level 7 0 or greater and include areas such as parks preserves recreational area and public forests Publicly Managed Lands Publicly Managed Lands are only available when the Bureau of Land Management BLM dataset is downloaded and installed The feature includes areas such as lands managed through the Bureau of Land Management and displays at all data zoom levels Game Management Districts Wildlife Management Units are only available when the Wildlife Management Units WMU dataset is downloaded and installed The feature includes areas of managed wildlife and game and displays at data zoom level 6 0 or greater USGS Quadrangle Coverage The USGS 7 5 minute quadrangle coverage is indicated by red lines These display at data zoom level 8 0 or greater Quadrangle names display at data zoom level 9 0 and higher To view quad info such as Orig Date and Quad Order ID number needed when purchasing quads right click a point within 37 XMap User Guide 38 the quad and then click Info An information box displays in the lower right corner of the screen 3DTQ Region Coverage Displays the DeLorme 3DTQ product CD volume label which covers each map area at data zoom level 10 0 or greater Map Center Crosshair The map center crosshair indicates the map center at any data zoom level Exits View exits on primary limited access roads interstates and toll roads Available at data z
283. es are listed in the Search Results window Results for the number of keywords and types found also display A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map e Select clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results window to show none of the features listed e Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window to display all of the features listed e Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results window e Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search Results window To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map click the plus signs to expand the individual branches A selected check box indicates the feature type displays on the map 39 XMap User Guide Note Some branches expand further than others Selecting clearing a check box at a certain branch of the tree shows hides all the items below that level e Select clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click All to select all map features in the program e Click None to select none of the types in the program Note A small number of features cannot be turned off They are part of the base map display and cannot be changed This is why certain levels on the tree remain unavailable appear dimmed or gray 6 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options d
284. escription IS provided find find street address in zip opens the Find within ZIP Postal Code option in the Advanced subtab on the Find tab route center on next stop centers the map on the next stop 2 delorme dr yarmouth me portsmouth nh 4 yawkey way boston ma Bob Smith Mary Jones John Doe address book entries GPS yarmouth me route from current location to 337 XMap User Guide optimizeroute selecthandheldgrids cuthandheldmap 338 the current GPS location to be used as the location Creates a route between the Specified start and finish points inserting any stops to the route in the order they are passed in the command line This re orders the points to find a near optimal pathway that connects the stops All locations must be in the QuickSearch format If a GPS is enabled any string starting with GPS all caps triggers the current GPS location to be used as the location Selects the specified geographic area for handheld cutting Constructs a handheld map package using the current map start location stop location s finish location See Performing a Basic Search for options nwlatitude nwlongitude selatitude selongitude Use formats in the Latitude Longitude section of the Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats mapfilename yarmouth me 2 delorme Dr yarmouth me portsmouth nh 4 yaw
285. ess may take 10 15 minutes to complete e DeLorme Training Opens an abbreviated version of the Voice Training Wizard This dialog trains the system on DeLorme voice commands e Add Delete Words Opens the Add Delete Words Wizard with the pronunciation wizard specific to your speech recognition engine You can enter edit or view the words in your pronunciation vocabulary Use this wizard when the speech recognition has trouble understanding a specific word that you are saying e Recognition Settings Opens the Recognition Profile Settings dialog Use this to change preferences for sensitivity and tolerance of errors in recognizing your voice Note Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version 5 1 You may have a premium version for example Microsoft Office 2003 installs Microsoft English U S Version 6 1 Recognizer Select the most recent version To View and Update Voice Output Preferences To change voice output preferences click the Options button B SE on the toolbar or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box and then click the Voice Settings tab The following options are available under the Voice Output area of the dialog box e Test Voice Choose to display the preview voice dialog box for your text to speech engine Type in a sentence and click OK to hear it spoken e Audio Controls Choose to adjust the speaker volume for all progr
286. estrict the search to the visible map on your desktop select the Restrict Search to Map Region check box 8 Click Apply The Datasheet View table is filtered and shows only the results of the search Note To view all of the attributes of the layer select Cancel Query from the Query drop down list 9 Click Close Using Right Click Options in the Datasheet View This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Several right click options are available in the Datasheet View when you right click inside the attributes table Tip To select multiple records individually press and hold the CTRL key and click each record To select a block of records press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last record If you click this Then the following will result right click option Zoom to Selection The map zooms to display all of the selected records Reverse Selection All of the selected records become unselected and unselected records become selected Delete Selection Deletes the selected record or records Before the deletion is CTRL Del committed you can use the Undo button in the toolbar to reverse it You must commit the change to finalize the deletion Clear Selection Clears the selection Select All All of the records in the Attributes subtab are selected in the attributes table and on the map Copy to Clipboard Each selected record in the
287. ets you create custom attribute and spatial queries to perform analysis on your layers You can also rename save copy delete and symbolize custom queries in the selected layer Layering The Layering subtab lets you move the layers in your workspace above below or equal to other layers and or the standard DeLorme data layers Moving a layer up in the list helps to ensure the layer will be visible on the map 75 XMap User Guide Registration The Registration tab appears when you import a CAD layer that has no Spatial reference to the Earth s surface The tab functions the same as the ImageReg tab by allowing you to place control points between the unregistered layer in the left map and the corresponding location on the ground in the right map Note If a shared layer in a single database is being manipulated by more than one user at the same time any analysis of that layer may produce unpredictable results Handling Disconnected or Deleted Layers When a layer is disconnected or deleted a red exclamation point disconnected or a red X deleted displays next to the layer name in the Workspace This happens if the database the layer was connected to has been moved or deleted or if the local source is unavailable For example if the database is on a laptop computer that is turned off the connection will be broken Layer Database Server Dave Track Final schema_4 OLD Sf fale ms You can try to refresh
288. etup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer change printer properties select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished Under Profile select On Map or Profile Only If you select On Map select whether you want to print the profile as shown on the Left or Right map IF you THEN you will print select this option On Map The background map with the main Profile graph at the bottom of the page 5 Profile Only The main Profile graph without the map Note Click the Copy to Clipboard button a to copy your profile to the clipboard so that you can paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft Paint or Adobe Photoshop When you copy the map to the clipboard the map is saved at current monitor resolution If you want to print all of the profile s Statistical Data Options select the Profile Stats check box The statistics are printed on the same page as the profile 167 XMap User Guide 6 7 8 Optional Click the Save button hil to save your profile as a bitmap or J PEG image Rename the file if necessary and click Save Optional To view a preview of your selection click View Click Print to print the map using the selected print options Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map You can add text framed or unframed and graphics north arrows scale bars images and GIS legends to your map e To modify the properties of a text graphic item click the Select tool
289. ew File Details for a GPS Log Use the following steps to view log file details Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open Click File and then click File Details A dialog box shows information about your log ee 2 YP 291 XMap User Guide 6 Click OK to exit the dialog box Monitoring Your GPS Status Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking you can continue to monitor the status of your GPS connection and other information Status information accuracy is affected by speed 3 mph or more and your GPS status 3 D status provides the most accurate information To Monitor Your GPS Status in GPS Tab View Speed and Heading Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading Displays the direction you are traveling as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected on the Units area on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading is provided as a numerical value as well as a compass direction Coordinates Elevation Latitude N43 47 3073 Longitude Coordinates The coordinate fields display based on the units you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box W70 11 4316 Elevation Displays the curr
290. exposed Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and overview maps to their default views Viewing Two Maps at the Same Time The split window lets you view two maps at the same time 45 XMap User Guide The maps interact as follows If you are viewing both the right and left maps at different data zoom levels a box or lines depending on the current data zoom level displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the opposite map If you are viewing the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not equally represented on the screen 50 50 a box or lines displays on the map that is covering the larger amount of screen area The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the opposite map Both windows are centered on the same coordinate position Panning or rotating in one map causes the same action on both maps The left map window has its own zoom level controls You can change the zoom level of the left map without affecting the zoom level in the right map window However after you adjust the zoom level in the left map window the zoom tools on the Control Panel incrementally adjust the map For example if the left map is at zoom level 6 0 and the right map at zoom level 8
291. f the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points You can use MapNotes for directions or explanations Notes e This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw MapNotes To Show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences e When you use right click functionality to add a MapNote it is light blue unless it is a blank MapNote e You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab To Move a MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A 3 Click the MapNote to select it The MapNote is enclosed with a box 4 You can e Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote e Drag the text box to a new location leaving the anchor point in the same location on the map 233 XMap User Guide e Drag the anchor point to a new location leaving the text box in the same location on the map Good for dog walking STEM Ps anchar point To Delete a MapNote Use the following steps to delete a MapNote 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool k 3 Click the MapNote to select it 4 Press the DELETE key on your keyboard Custom Symbols Custom Symbols Overview DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols which you can edit and add t
292. f the via make sure the Insert option is selected and click Insert to add the via Step 6 Calculate the route Click Calculate to calculate the route Tip Select the Auto check box next to the Calculate button to automatically calculate the route after you add each point a f teat F m igela ie _ i Leg AO Se l e a 2 3 XMap User Guide Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highly populated area with a lot of traffic congestion you can draw a circle rectangle polygon over that area to avoid it when you calculate your route You can create multiple regions to avoid To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route 1 2 Create a route Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area emo Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want to use Optional Select one or more of the following e From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the draw object e Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select the color for your fill style e Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline drop down list e Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your draw object e Select the width fo
293. from the Attributes tab from a form or right on the map e You must create a document field in Attributes Design View before you can embed a document e The embedded documents menu displays the options available for each document The options that are available depend on the type of document and user permissions The menu options are e View Opens the document for viewing in the document s editor but does not allow editing You can also view the document by clicking the document link in the table More e You can open and close multiple views of a document without affecting the database e Viewing is faster than using the Edit option and is guaranteed to protect your database from accidental changes e Run For certain file types bat com cpl exe js jse Ink msc msi msp pif reg scr sct shb shs url vb v be vbs wsc wsf wsh the Run option is available instead of the View option It opens the file e Edit Opens the document for editing in the document s editor The document is updated in the database when you close the document editor See Tips for more information e Open in XMap Opens a compatible file within XMap e Save As Save the document as a file external to your XMap database e Upload Upload a new document or replace an existing document See Tips for more information e Delete Delete the document from the GIS object geometry Tips e If you encounter a problem with a file you are editing use the editor s Save As op
294. g data from a DVD your data is added to every project you create while the DVD is in the DVD drive and it is not necessary for you to follow the steps below Use the following steps to add data to current and future projects 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Create a new or open an existing project 3 Click Data and then click Base Data The Data Locations dialog box opens listing each of the data sources on your system 4 Click Add select the hard drive location where your saved your data from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK The OK button is enabled when you select a folder containing a file that contains the adc file of the map data being added Note Your hard drive location may already be listed in the Data Location dialog box but the check box for that location might not be selected Ensure all of the data locations you want to display in your current and future projects have selected check boxes 5 Click Done Adding Data to the Current Project You can choose to add data to only the current project if the data is saved on your hard drive Any data on a DVD in your DVD drive displays in your projects as long as the DVD is in the drive Use the following steps to add data to the current project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Ifthe project you want to add data to is not displaying open the project Note To verify the project you want is displaying check the title bar The project name displays directly after the product
295. g steps to made add an option to the statistics list 1 Move your cursor over Click to add statistics and click A list of available statistic options opens 2 Click an option to add it 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to add more options Terr Dist 3 6 mi Climb Dist 3 1 mi Desc Dist 2 571 0 ft Eley sain 1 230 9 ft Desc Eley 76 2 ft Climb Elev 1 307 1 ft Click to add statistics Linear Distance Average Grade Minimum Elewation Maximum Elevation This table describes the statistic options available in the statistic list and or the profile info box List options are bold Statistical Data Description Option Linear The flat distance of the profile Does not take elevation into Distance account Terrain The 3 D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise and Distance descent Climbing The total distance where the terrain is uphill Distance Descending The total distance where the terrain is downhill Distance Current Elevation The elevation above sea level at a specific point Elevation Gain The difference in elevation from the start of the profile to the end of the profile Climbing The amount of ascending vertical distance Elevation Descending The amount of descending vertical distance Elevation Grade Actually percent grade rise over run 100 x rise run For example 6 means that for every 100 ft you gain 6 ft in elevation 256 Profiling Linear Objects Average Grade Ave
296. geometry click Copy OR To cut the geometry from the layer click Cut Note To select multiple geometries to copy at the same time press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click each geometry To paste the geometry in the current layer right click the location on the map where you want to paste the geometry and click Paste OR To paste the geometry in a different layer ensure the layer is in your workspace and selected to be shown on the map and then select a different layer from the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar Right click the map and click Paste Working With GIS The geometry is placed in the same location where it was in the original layer To move the geometry to a different location see Moving or Changing the Scale of a Geometry Classifying Symbolizing and Labeling a Layer Classifying Classifying a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can classify a layer based on one of the following three options e Unique Value When you classify a layer in a database with a unique value each attribute with fewer than 100 values displays differently on the map e Range When you classify a layer with a range the data in the layer can be grouped given color or size characteristics and labeled so that it can be visually analyzed e Single Value When you classify a layer in a database with a single value you make all the records look t
297. ggle the feature on off To Create a Spatial Query 157 XMap User Guide Use the following steps to create a spatial query using the GIS tab 158 1 2 3 Click the GIS tab Click the Query subtab If a query is already displaying in the Query subtab click the Manage button and then click New Optional To name the query something other than the default the default name is Query click the Manage button and then click Rename The Query text box activates and lets you edit the query name Click the cell under Attribute and select the GEOMETRY option from the drop down list Click the cell under Operator and select an operator from the drop down list e INTERSECTS Available for all geometry types Returns any geometries in the source layer that touch the boundary of partially contain completely contain are partially within or are completely within the geometries in the specified layer criteria e CONTAINS Available for only for polygon layers Returns any geometries in the source layer that completely contain the geometries in the specified layer criteria Note If any portion of a polygon or line is outside of the polygons in the source layer the polygons will not be returned in the query results e IS CONTAINED BY Available for all geometry types Returns any geometries in the source layer that are completely contained by the geometries in the specified layer criteria e DOES NOT INTERSECT Available for
298. gn next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 3 Click the plus sign next to the sub data category 4 Right click Elevation and click Properties The Digital Elevation Model DEM Properties dialog box opens for Elevation 5 Select a priority 1 100 from the Priority scroll list Note When the program has more than one elevation connection the connection with the highest priority takes precedence in areas where there is coincident data 73 XMap User Guide 74 N Select the data zoom level at which you want elevations to begin to display Click Next Under Connection Usages select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide elevation data Click Finish The Elevation Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The elevation property changes are made only in the current project You must save your project to retain the property changes Working With GIS GIS Overview The topics that are in the Working with GIS Help section cover w functionality that is included in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Check the important note at the top of each topic to see if it pertains to your version of XMap With the GIS tab you can view and analyze the data in your ESRI files shp e00 MapInfo mif tab AutoCAD dxf dwf dwg Geocode Type files asc csv dbf txt tab mdb xls Draw files anl or DeLorme OpenSpace
299. gnate circular map features e Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map feature e Use polygons to designate water bodies land boundaries or any other irregular map feature Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete it at any time Note The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the circle rectangle and polygon tools in the Draw tab When you draw an area object on the map the area displays next to the object on the map If you click off of the object you can view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map To Draw a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following steps to add circles rectangles or polygons to the map 1 Click the Draw tab em 2 Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want u From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the area object Click the Fill Color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select the color for your fill style Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop down list Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area object Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop down list Select the Show Measurement check box to displ
300. gth characters length decimal representing numeric_expression to decimal places SUBSTRING Return the length characters of a string string expression start beginning at start SUBSTRING is length synonymous with the MID function length and start must be of type integer_expression The result type is string expression SUFFI X string expression Return TRUE if the first string ends with string expression the second string and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression SUM field Return the sum of the values of a numeric field The result type is the same as the data type of field UPPER string expression Returns a string with its letters converted to uppercase The result type is string _ expression YEAR date_expression Returns an integer representing the year datepart of the specified date The result type is integer_expression numeric_expression Returns the result of adding one numeric_expression number to another If either of the expressions is floating point then the result type is floating point otherwise the result type is integer numeric_ expression Returns the result of subtracting one numeric_expression number from another If either of the expressions is floating point then the result type is floating point otherwise the result type is integer numeric_expression Returns the result of multiplying one numeric_expression number by another If either of the expressio
301. hange the size of the map image but not change the degree of geographic detail on the map use the magnification settings in the Options dialog box To Change the Map Magnification 40 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Use the following steps to change the map magnification 1 Click the Options button E CEEE on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select a magnification percentage 50 75 100 125 150 175 or 200 from the Magnification drop down list Note Although the size of the image changes the degree of geographic detail does not 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Changing How POIs Display on the Map You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols are displayed on the map 1 Click the Options button B all on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop down list 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click
302. he Auto check box next to the Back on Track button on the New Edit subtab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Back on Track check box and click Back on Track whenever you want to recalculate the route based on the current GPS position e f you want to create a log of your travels select the Start GPS Log check box in the GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically Or click the Record button in the GPS Log subtab to log manually start recording e The Turns option is available in routes only when GPS tracking To Start GPS Tracking Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel l 288 Create a route Important Ifthe current project includes hidden routes they may recalculate if you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected the Recalculate When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings To ensure this does not occur clear these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want to recalculate Connect your GPS device to your computer Initialize the device This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate GPS device Using GPS 4 In GPS tab view click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab For more information see Monitoring Your GPS Status Then click Start GPS or click the GPS button G on the toolbar Click here for a description of the Show Turns area on the Route tab e Next Turn Displays the next tu
303. he purposes of this definition Submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims
304. he Map and Tab Display e SPCS State Plane Coordinate System Note When you select SPCS an additional drop down box displays for Zone Select the zone from the list Select the datum from the Datum drop down list e WGS84 World Geodetic System of 1984 e NAD27 North American Datum of 1927 which also includes OOH Old Hawaiian Datum when in Hawaii e NAD83 North American Datum of 1983 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box UTM UPS and MGRS coordinate systems are best used with NAD27 datum 95 of the USGS quads containing UTM grid lines uses the NAD27 datum which is helpful if you are comparing a map generated from your mapping application to a USGS map If the USNG coordinate system is not matched with NAD83 datum a warning message displays unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again option If the UTM UPS or MGRS coordinate system is mismatched to WGS84 datum a warning message displays unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again option The State Plane Coordinate System originally used NAD27 datum and was measured in statute miles Some states have updated their systems to WGS84 datum and or kilometers If you are working with a site map verify the datum distance measures and zone used and match them in your application To Change the Distance Preferences Distance preferences affect how distance a
305. he Measure tool Pipelines You can create profiles only on 2 D maps however with split screen functionality you can view the highlight of the profiled object on a 3 D map To profile an object or route at any time right click the item and click Profile The Profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile Double click a location on the Profile graph to center the map on the location without changing the data zoom level The highlighted profile object on the map is retained if you go to another tab and then return to the Profile tab The selected object is not retained between program Sessions To view all the features available on the Profile tab click the More button _ Mores near the bottom of the tab to expand the view To Create a Profile Use the following steps to create a profile L Center your map on the area with the linear object you want to profile OR Center the route you want to profile on the map Click the Profile button on the Profile tab or on the toolbar to activate it Move your pointer over the 2 D map The pointer changes from to when it passes over an object that you can profile Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile When you select the object it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile tab area Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue
306. he Scale of a Geometry Use the following steps to change the scale of a geometry 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit 2 Click the Edit tool ee on the toolbar 3 Move your cursor over the geometry a gray box displays over each object as you hover it and click the object you want to edit Small white squares indicate the edges and corners of the object 4 Drag any of the small white squares to achieve the size and proportion you want Notes To return to the default map mode click the Navigation tool on the toolbar To undo your last action click the Undo button bt on the toolbar To redo your last action click the Redo button To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool 3 If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to Ez the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool automatically commit your changes Hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard to add remove an object to from a multi selection Rotating a Geometry This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Rotate tool on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an empty existing layer To Rotate a Geometry Use the following steps to rotate a geo
307. he Width drop down list and an outline style from the Style drop down list Note An outline is placed underneath a line Therefore if the outline is thinner than the line the outline may not be visible To ensure an outline will be visible make sure the outline is at least 1 pixel greater than the line Tip If you outline a line you can make it look like a highway e To change the properties of your label ensure the Show Label check box is selected and then 125 XMap User Guide 6 7 Notes e Select a different font from the Font drop down list e To change the font style click the Bold button E Italic button Ei or Underline button T You can also click More Styles for additional font style options Tip Select the Outline option under More Styles to outline the text with white making the text easier to read on the map e To change the font color click the Font Color button and select a standard font color or create a custom font color e To change the font size select a size from the Size drop down list e To hide the label on the map clear the Show Label check box Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels the text may appear cluttered on the map If this is the case ensure the Declutter Text check box is selected to remove some of the text on the map Repeat the steps for each layer feature you want to symbolize Click OK You can also show hide a feature on the map To show a feature that is cur
308. he automated method 1 Open your preferred text editing program such as Wordpad or Notepad 2 Type the following parameters in the text document text in red reflect the user s information xmapimport target server server name target db database name sSource file file path datum datum coordinate system coordinate system spcs zone specify spcs units surveyfeet Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no character returns 3 Save the text document with a bat or cmd extension rather than a txt extension 4 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 5 Type the path for the bat cmd file you created in steps 1 3 in the command line for example c test_batch bat 6 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is imported the message includes the 84 Working With GIS file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file s to import in days hours minutes and seconds 7 Add the layer s to your workspace To Import Files with a Wild Card This option allows you to import all files of the same type located within the same directory These files must contain the same spatial reference information This type of import is useful for importing entire directories of files in a quick and automated process A wild card has an asterisk a perio
309. he query only You can also control which attribute fields are exported by turning them on off in the Attributes Design View Note Not all attribute field data types are supported in all of the export file types for example shp txt Supported File Types e AutoCAD Data Exchange file dxf e AutoCAD Draw file dwg e DeLorme XMap Transfer file openspace e ESRI Shapefile shp e GPX file gpx e OGC KML file kml e Text files txt point layers To Export a Layer 104 Working With GIS Use the following steps to export a layer Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Highlight the layer you want to export in the workspace table Edit the layer as needed by changing the attributes classifying symbolizing querying etc 5 Click the Layers button and then click Export The Export Layer dialog box opens 6 Browse to the location where you want to save the exported file type the file name in the File Name text box and from the Save as Type drop down list select the file type Note If you choose shp as the type a prj file that stores all of the project information for the layer is created 7 If you want to export only the active query results select the Export Results of Active Query check box 8 Click Save Previewing a Layer in Handheld Export TA Ma This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS
310. he same on the map For example they all have the same fill color on the map Classifying a Layer with a Unique Value This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you classify a layer in a database with a unique value each attribute with fewer than 100 values that you classified is put into its own class and displays differently on the map If you classify a layer with a unique value on a float double column undesirable results may occur due to precision limitations Try classifying the layer with a range instead If you are classifying a layer for use with a PN compatible form see the PN Compatible Forms Help topic for more information To Classify a Layer with a Unique Value Use the following steps to classify a layer with a unique value Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer you want to classify Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 To edit view an existing classification for the selected layer select it from the Classification drop down list OR BR WN 117 XMap User Guide To create a new classification for the selected layer click the Manage button and then click New 6 From the Type drop down list select Unique Value 7 From the Field drop down list select the field
311. he street with X marks and starts the route at the street e Why are the tab area and control panel so narrow XMap was designed to accommodate resolutions of 1024 x 768 or higher If you are using a very high resolution such as 1920 x 1200 the tab area and control panel in XMap may appear to be very narrow You can modify the size of the map and tab area or use the Windows Control Panel to adjust your display settings e What s the best way to measure the distance of a road or trail The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to create a route You can create a route using right click functionality the toolbar or the Route tab For more information see Creating a Route The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to create a route You can create a route using right click functionality the toolbar or the Route tab For more information see Creating a Route The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to create a route You can create a route using right click functionality the toolbar or the Route tab For more information see Creating a Route e What s the best way to measure a large area on the map The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the area tools in the Draw tab such as the polygon tool When you draw an area object on the map the area displays next to the object on the map If you click off of the object you can
312. he toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Voice Settings tab Select the microphone you intend to use from the Microphone drop down list Select your preferred user voice model from the User Profile drop down list Note To create a new speech recognition profile for each of your working environments noisy quiet and users your spouse your child click Speech in the Windows Control Panel Select your preferred speech recognition engine from the Recognizer drop down list Note Select the most recent version available in the drop down list Click Speech Profile Training to display the speech training wizard specific to your speech recognition engine Note This feature is available only if it is supported by your speech recognition engine Follow the on screen instructions For best results 298 Use a close talk microphone that rests near the side of your mouth instead of a desktop or built in microphone Train the speech recognition engine in the same environment in which you will use it For example if you use the engine mostly in the car perform training in the car Perform three training sessions to get the best results When training speak the same voice as you will when giving voice commands to the computer Speak distinctly and at an average speed as if giving a command Use the Microphone Wizard to ensure your micropho
313. hic in the direction you want Click Hide 3 D when finished The map changes to a 2 D view OR Select 2 D from the drop down list at the top of the left map window when finished When the 3 D map window Is open you can use the grab and pan tool on the toolbar Compass Rose navigation tools zoom tools and or the overview map window to adjust the 3 D map Scroll along the edges of the 2 D map or pan with the navigation tools to redraw the 2 D background the 3 D map redraws with the new map center Click a point on the 3 D map to center the map on that point When you move your cursor on the right map a 3 D cursor echoes that movement on the left map Flying Over a 3 D Map You can simulate flying over the 3 D terrain Access these features using the Pan feature in the 3 D tab or by activating the 3 D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme To Fly Over a 3 D Map Using Keyboard Shortcuts Use the following steps to fly over a 3 D map using keyboard shortcuts L 262 View a map in 3 D Click the Options button E ERE on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab OR Viewing Your Map in 3 D Click the 3 D tab click the Options button EE Options and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Select 3 D Navigation DeLorme Scheme from the Scheme drop down list Click OK to activate the selected scheme 5 To rotate the map to the right press ALT D on your keyboard OR To rotate the map to the left press ALT
314. ialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Notes e When you save the current project the following feature preferences are saved in reference to map features o Major map features preferences o Individual custom feature preferences o When you create a new project the current map settings are used Click Use Defaults to return to the default settings Changing the Map Colors When you use a laptop computer while traveling it can be difficult to see the map display on your screen This can be especially true at night or on a bright sunny day Changing your default map colors to high contrast map colors can make your map display easier to see To Change the Map Colors Use the following steps to change the map display 1 Click the Options button E Bai on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 From the Map Colors drop down list select High Contrast Colors to make the map display darker for improved in vehicle visibility Street Colors to emphasize streets and highways on the map or Topo Colors to emphasize contours parks and public lands land cover and so on 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Changing the Map Magnification Level If you want to c
315. ically named Extended Attribute Sets that contain different attributes and join rules the attribute sets are automatically unlinked from the target layer when replace occurs The source layer maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets and the new result layer adopts it Creating a New Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can create new layers by Creating an empty layer Duplicating a layer Creating a layer from geometry selections on the map Creating a layer from query results To Create an Empty Layer Use the following steps to create an empty layer 1 2 3 oe 8 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the Layers button point to Create and then click Empty Layer The Create Empty Layer dialog box opens Select the layer type Point Line or Polygon From the Shape drop down list select the shape for the layer type In the Name text box type a name for the layer From the Target Database drop down list select the database where you want to store the new layer If the database is not listed select Other from the drop down list and attach the existing database If you want to create a new database select New Click OK To Duplicate a Layer This option is available only for the selected layer in the workspace Use the following steps to duplicate a layer BRWN Click the GIS tab Cl
316. ick Add select the hard drive location where you saved your data from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK The OK button is enabled when you select a folder containing a file that contains the properties of the map data being added 4 Click Done What map data is included with XMap XMap includes a worldwide reference base map dataset that includes major roads cities boundaries and geographic features which is visible between data zoom levels 1 and 6 For more detailed map features or aerial imagery you can purchase a variety of base map datasets from DeLorme or integrate your own data using XMap s import and data adding tools Note that most of the maps used by DeLorme to convey the capabilities of the software are created using an optional DeLorme base map dataset and or data or imagery from third party sources How do add non DeLorme imagery to my map Use the Map Data tab to add imagery in MrSID and GeoTIFF format to your map Click the Map Data tab Click Data and then click Add The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens 3 Browse to the file you want to add select it and then click Add The imagery is added to the current project Note Imagery will not display unless projection information is specified in the file How do import files from an earlier version of XMap into this version Use the Map Data tab to import projects routes and draw files from many other DeLorme mapping programs For information abo
317. ick OK Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Manually Moving a Contact on the Map Once you have created a contact in an address book you can manually move it on the map using the move address book entry function To Manually Move a Contact s Location on the Map Use the following steps to manually move a contact s location on the map 1 Click the Find tab al 2 Click the Move Address Book Entry button w Your cursor changes to f when you hover over the location of an address book contact 195 XMap User Guide 3 Click and drag the contact to a different location on the map The Located status for that record in the Address Book dialog box changes to Manual 4 Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map operations Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Relocating Address Book Contacts Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application you can relocate your address book entries except for manual entries so they match the most recent data You are prompted to do this the first time you open the address book after installing a new version of your application however if you do not relocate the entries at that
318. ick it to select the check box OR To turn off an option when it is selected click it to clear the check box a EE Options 2 eaters j l ma Tab Manager Netbook Mode Show Tab Area Panel Show Control Panel e Use Tab Manager to show or hide individual tabs or reorder tabs e Use Show Tab Area Panel to show or hide the entire tab area e Use Show Control Panel to show or hide the Control Panel e Use Netbook Mode to turn the optimized small screen device view on or Off For more information see Using Small screen Devices Notes e You can also use keyboard shortcuts to customize the interface e Your settings are saved until you change them e Click Options in the menu to open the Options dialog box Displaying Basic Map Features You can show or hide basic map features on your map You can also customize map features and customize the interface Notes e If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes verify the Use Custom Map Features check box is not selected e Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to the default preferences e The options available depend on the datasets you are using e The map features available are based on the Map Colors option you are using To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences 36 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences Changes made to the map view display almost immediately
319. ick the Workspace subtab if it is not selected In the Workspace table click the layer that you want to duplicate Click the Layers button point to Create and then click Copy Layer The Create Copy of Layer dialog box opens From the Source Layer drop down list select the layer you want to copy The layer you selected in step 3 displays in the Layer Name text box To change the layer name type a new name in the box From the Target Database drop down list select the database where you want to store the new layer If the database is not listed select Other from the drop down list and attach the existing database If you want to create a new database select New Click OK 99 XMap User Guide To Create a New Layer From Current Geometry Selections This option is activated when geometries in the selected layer in the workspace have been selected with a GIS tool or within the Attributes Datasheet View Only one layer can have active selections at a time Use the following steps to create a new layer from current geometry selections 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the Layers button point to Create and then click Layer from Selection The Create Layer from Selection dialog box opens 4 To change the layer name type a new name in the Name text box 5 From the Target Database drop down list select the database where you want to store the new layer If the database is not l
320. ics The Classification drop down list in the Classify Layer dialog box displays all classifications created for a layer To Classify a Layer with a Range Use the following steps to classify a layer with a range BRWN Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer you want to classify Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens To edit view an existing classification for the selected layer select it from the Classification drop down list OR To create a new classification for the selected layer click the Manage button and then click New From the Type drop down list select Range From the Field drop down list Select the field in your layer that you want to classify Note The options in the Field list are based on the visible layers in the Design View of the Attributes subtab When Range is selected as the classification method all visible numeric fields are available in the Field drop down list From the Normalize By drop down list select the field by which you want to divide the field in step 7 Note When you select a field to normalize by classes are created based on the ratio of data in the first field to the second field for each attribute record From the Method drop down list select the method you want to use e Equal Interval Divides the range
321. ies dialog box opens for Shaded Relief Select the direction from which you want the sun to shine for displaying the shaded relief from the Sun Bearing drop down list Select how many degrees you want the sun to be above the horizon from the Sun Inclination drop down list Under Brightness Range drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum levels you want Optional Click Reset if you have previously changed your shaded relief properties and want to return to the settings which were in effect before you opened the Properties dialog Optional Click Use Defaults to change to the product defaults Click Next Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the desired minimum and maximum levels The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Click Next Using Projects Map Data 13 Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your Shaded relief properties 14 Click Finish The Shaded Relief Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The shaded relief property changes are made only in the current project You must save your project to retain the property changes Changing the Radio Coverage Ellipses Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as radio ellipses rasters vectors shaded relief contours points etc To Change the Ra
322. ies on the map See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing hiding contours e XMap remembers the last customized contour values For example if you customize your contour settings and then change the settings to the default the next time you try to customize your contour settings the last saved customized values display To Change the Contour Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of contours l 2 68 Click the Map Data tab Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties Click the plus sign next to the sub data category Right click Contours and click Properties The Contour Properties dialog box opens for Contours Select a contour option Default High Density Low Density or Custom from the drop down list e Default Uses the default values for displaying contours and labels e High Density Approximately doubles the default values for displaying contours and labels e Low Density Approximately halves the default values for displaying contours and labels e Custom Allows you to customize how contours and labels display on the map 10 11 12 13 1 2 Using Projects Map Data For Contours select the data zoom level at which you want labels to begin to display Click Next If you selected Default High Density or Low Density in step 5 go to step 9 OR If you selected Cust
323. ight or left map 1 Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an up left direction on the map A staircase with a small circle displays on the screen 2 Continue dragging the mouse in an up left direction The small circle moves up the steps one step per data zoom level A label displays the data zoom level to the bottom right of the staircase 3 Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail The map center is retained on your screen To Zoom In Out Using the Zoom Tools There are two sets of zoom tools The zoom tools for the right map are located in the Control Panel The zoom tools for the left map are located at the top of the left map view e Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom level at Faun E a time Click the down arrow to zoom in one minor data zoom level at a time Right Click the Zoom In 1 tool to increase the detail number to Map the next full level Controls Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail number to the next full level Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail number by three full levels Click the plus button to increase the detail number to the next full level Click the minus button to decrease the detail number to the next full level The data zoom level of the left map displays in the text area to the left of the buttons Map Controls
324. ights You may use paper copies of System map displays and printouts in presentations to live audiences only with prior written permission from DeLorme Web Site Map Display Rights You may display on your personal business or institutional static Web site map images derived from the System provided that you include the Legend indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www delorme com from any page featuring a DeLorme map image If you subcontract a Web developer to display map images said Web developer must purchase a license Legend Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following credit and copyright notice 2012 DeLorme www delorme com XMap You may not remove alter or conceal any copyright or trademark notices appearing on any System output except that when creating a mural map you need only retain a single legend with scale for use in the field Copy Services You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are authorized by this Agreement NetLink Tab All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink tab is subject to DeLorme s specific data use license agreement associated with those products Commercial resale of NetLink data is prohibited You understand and agree that the trademarks trade names service marks copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of DeLorme and tha
325. ighway can ao incode ts smor P S oaa S Major Connector Forest Road Minor Connector state route tcan aiso nce tris sym E U S National Route can also include this symbol EL Unclassified Road a Unimproved Road 24 Land Cover Topo Colors a eee Sa Sr n tea oe Topo Colors Colors n a ma meraes ma fros SSS Street Description Colors Amusements n a n a ba Airport private B Airport commercial public B Airport general aviation public Business Amusement Recreation Specialty or Dept Store A Camping at data zoom level 14 Camping at data zoom level 11 thru 13 PE Cemetery E al gt Map Legend 25 XMap User Guide D Educational Facility o Exit with services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 Exit without services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 o ki Exit food at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 o Exit gas at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 o Exit lodging at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit other at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 O Fast Food o Hospital Lodging Metropolitan City National Capital data zoom level 7 thru 10 National Capital data zoom levels 2 thru 6 m Cele BDA E Point of Interest smaller black square Population Center de Public Service m Religious buildings Rest Area with Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 Rest Area with Facilities at data z
326. ile is automatically created for the imported file Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area You can import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information is formatted correctly 208 The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End The second line must be a coordinate The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs A line is defined by direction and length Using the Draw Tools e A curve is defined by the word curve followed by a letter representing the side of the arc to put the radius This is followed by the length of the radius and the length of the arc The arc is completed with a bearing from the start to finish point e For more information see Sample Survey File If you import this That results from this The following is imported type of file source Address Book txt Address Book File Draw objects display with the CSV current symbol and style selections Notes Files must be tab or comma delimited Format name address city state ZIP Code phone Files must be less than 250 records long Text File txt Lat Lon Text File Draw objects display with the current symbol and line style selections GPS Log File gpl Any DeLorme product that Line or waypoint object displays supports GPS tracking with the current line preferences GPX File gpx DeLorme product or third May contain one or more routes party application tracks or waypoints
327. iles contents 0 Total Geocaches a contents 3 Track Layers 9 15 Total Track Segments gt Click arrow to view detailed list Step 4 Make changes e To include or exclude a specific file layer or map select or clear its check box e To change the location for the file after sync click the toggle LB in the Select Destination column The selected location is blue e The toggle on the project side indicates where you are sending the file to select GPS for the device s internal drive Select SD for an SD card in the device e The toggle on the GPS side allows you to move a file layer or map For example if you have a waypoint file on your devices internal drive you might want to move it to the SD card e If an option is grayed out it is unavailable for that data 319 XMap User Guide T Earthmate GPS Sync ars hor E E a El E F k f i N am r 5 F ph ja i AR mnra TM a ri mi gi Mi i Al i Par Lie fo Of We Se SE ee LY ti MNSE A A i 4 Back Home 591 geocaches Not curently on GPS MyFindsPocketQuery 6 geocaches Not curently on GPS Step 5 Sync m 0 Waypoint Layers 0 Total Waypoints 3 Track Layers 16 Total Track Segments Click Sync on the dialog box You are notified when sync is complete 320 PH 60 Sto geocaches drive or an the internal PH 40 Sto drive or an geocaches Store route Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices T Earth
328. ill be synced GPS Contents p See more detail and make changes Memory Available Co SYNC View Project or GPS SD Card Contents Click Project Contents GPS Contents or SD Card Contents to view a summary of the waypoints geocaches tracks routes and maps on your desktop and on the connected device SD card When a category contains files the number of files is indicated and an arrow displays Click the category to view the list of contents e Project Contents include e Routes tracks waypoints and geocaches from the open project e Map files that you have downloaded from the NetLink Map Library Note Only maps in the DeLorme Docs Mobile Maps folder on your computer are displayed e GPS SD Card Contents include e All maps and files that you have synced to or installed on the device s internal drive or SD card e Any data you have collected on your device 312 Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices T Earthmate GPS et le 591 geccsches Not curently on GPS MyFindsPocketQuery 6 geocaches Not curently on GPS 3 Track Layers Cn 15 Total Track Segments Make Changes You can change what will sync and where it will sync to Each layer file route or map can be individually controlled e To exclude something from syncing clear its check box e To change the location for the file after sync click the toggle p in the Select Destination column The selected location is blue
329. imported layers on map f you selected the above check box select this check box to show layers on the map after they are imported to the Workspace subtab e Zoom to full layer extent Select this check box to automatically zoom the map to show the full extent of hte layer after import e Show layers added from Manage Layers on map Select this check box to Show layers on the map when you add them using the Manage Layers dialog box e Zoom map when centering on points Use the drop down list to select the zoom level to use when you double click a point geometry to center it on the map in the Attributes subtab Datasheet View e Default List method Use the drop down list to select the default setting for the List filter on the Attributes subtab for layers added to the Workspace You can manually change the filter after a layer is added to Workspace Options are Map Region default All and Toolbar Select e Refresh attribute records for Map Region filter Select this check box to automatically refresh the Attributes subtab Datasheet View when the map extent changes and Map Region is selected in the Show drop down list The Map Region filter hides all attribute records whose map bounding region MBR is not currently within the map window e Switch the List method to Toolbar Select Select this check box to automatically switch the method used by the List filter to Toolbar Select when you are selecting an object that is not in the current lis
330. in the Trail length box Using GPS Enable GPS voice navigation Provides spoken directions when tracking a route with a GPS receiver Recalculate when off route Automatically recalculates the route by the designated threshold distance 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft 400 ft or 500 ft when the GPS is off of the route Display GPS overview 2 D only When selected opens the GPS overview window after the GPS is connected You can adjust the size of the map and overview areas Enable stationary logging Displays all GPS points on the map when the GPS device is stationary for example when the recorded speed is below a certain threshold You must select this option to record points for Averaging Disable screen saver Overrides the system screen saver so that the display Stays activated during GPS tracking GPS Options Start GPS with the program Automatically starts GPS tracking each time you open the program Automatically detect GPS Automatically sets up your GPS connection Suggestion If your GPS receiver has a USB cable select Automatically Detect GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device and that a connection can be made Enable WAAS use USB Earthmate Enables WAAS use Enable LED on GPS device USB Earthmate Turns on the LED on the Earthmate When the check box is cleared the LED does not display To Initialize Your GPS Receiver If you are using a non DeLorme Earthmate GPS receiver
331. ings to print with a transparent background To Print Maps With a Transparent Background Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map 1 Center the map on the area you want to print 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 172 Printing Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box opens At the bottom of the dialog box select the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box Click OK All map printouts print with a transparent background To Print Maps With a Yellow Black Background Use the following steps to turn on the yellow black background when printing a map BR WYN FE Center the map on the area you want to print Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box opens At the bottom of the dialog box clear the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box Click OK All map printouts print with a yellow background or black if you are using High Contrast Colors Manually Assembling a Multi page Map After you have printed the sheets for your multi page map you are ready to assemble the map Before you begin be sure you have a clear work surface large enough to accommodate the final map size You will need the following tools to assemble your map Penci
332. inished e Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning red green blue or hue sat lum values Click Add to Custom Colors and then click OK Click the Align Left button z to align the text in your text box to the left OR 11 Printing Click the Center button z to align the text in the center of the text box OR Click the Align Right button to align the text in your text box to the right Click the Text Box Size button j if you want the size of your text box to grow with the amount of text typed The Text Box Size button is a toggle button If the button is not activated any text placed on the map is placed in a default sized text box You can resize the default size text box by selecting the text box on the map and dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of text box To Add a North Arrow to Your Map Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map 1 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the North Arrow tool ce All of the North Arrow styles display to the right Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the North Arrow on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes
333. inks hours of operation and so on To view this extended information right click the POI search result point to Add and then click Detailed MapNote to view the information on the map Or right click the POI search result and click I nfo to view the extended information in the Info tab e POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map To see all POIs on the map click the Options button E SE on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options click the Map Features tab select the Points of 182 Finding a Location on the Map Interest Minor and the Business Points of Interest Minor check boxes and click OK To Find a Point of Interest Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab 1 2 GF Tips Click the Find tab Click the POIs subtab Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for for example Wal Mart or Sheraton in the Name text box Type the category that best fits your POI name for example type Hotel if you are searching for a Sheraton type Department Store if you are searching for Wal Mart in the Keywords text box See Keywords for Category Searches for more information OR Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop down list examples and history Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box Type the number of miles followed by mi for example 5 mi Select From Map Center or Along Cu
334. ints without grid lines in the table or does not print in color change the advanced print settings in your Web browser If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout from the File menu select Page Setup Remove the text and the header and footer text boxes and then click OK Changes made to the browser s advanced print settings and page setup affect the printing of all web pages Using Projects Map Data Map Data Overview XMap lets you save all of the work that you have done as a single project file so you can open it again later You can create different map views and save each in a different project What is a Project A project includes the current GIS workspace map center coordinates the current data zoom level the current magnification rotation preferences and links to routes or draw layers you have added to it As you create routes draw and GIS layers they are added to the currently selected project Projects are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in the DeLorme Docs directory For example a draw layer is saved in C DeLorme Docs Draw Can I Reuse Draw Layers and Routes in Other Projects After you create routes or add your own roads you may not want to do all of the work again in another project You can share routes and draw layers between projects using the Add button on the Map Data tab Can Send Routes or
335. ion is only available if you have recently oy 7 8 Printing performed a find category within current route search in the Advanced Find subtab For more information see Performing an Advanced Search e Strip Maps Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the route along with directions that appear in the map margin Strip maps are not printed North Up like other printed maps They are printed so that the direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4 select the miles per page that you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop down list Note When setting the number of miles per page keep in mind that the number of miles is not the distance of the route Instead it equals the width of the strip map and determines the scale of the map Select Increasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to end the route directions with the total time and distance OR Select Decreasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to start the directions with the total time and distance similar to a countdown Optional To view a preview of your selection click View Click Print Printing a Profile You can print a profile you have created To Print a Profile Use the following steps to print a profile L 2 oF Create a profile Click the Print tab and click the Profile subtab to display the Profile options Optional Click S
336. ion of the Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats zoommbr Positions the nwlatitude N39 45 717 336 map on the nwlongitude W104 57 010 specified selatitude N39 43 95 bounding box selongitude W104 51 510 Use formats in the Latitude Longitude section of the Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats quicksearch findshortcut runshortcut createroute Using the XMap API Command Window Performs the search term QuickSearch action on the Find tab See Performing a Basic Search for options Searches the search term keyboard shortcuts for all commands with a specified search term See the topics under Using Keyboard Shortcuts in the online Help for additional information Executes the group command specified name keyboard Shortcut Use the group command and include all punctuation See the topics under Using Keyboard Shortcuts in the online Help for additional information Creates a route Start location using a start stop location s point optional finish location Sstop s anda finish point All locations See Performing a Basic Search for must be in the options QuickSearch format If a GPS is enabled any string starting with GPS all caps triggers Boston yarmouth me 2 delorme dr yarmouth me Type route as the search term The list of Shortcuts appears In this format route back on track route calculate etc A d
337. irst row as the header select the Use First Row as Header check box 11 Click Finish 12 To link the attributes to another set click Link The Link Attribute Sets dialog box opens For more information see Linking a Set to an Attribute Note To unlink an attribute set select it in the list and click Unlink Note If your imported set includes date information ensure the dates are between 1 1 1753 and 12 31 9999 If you have a date that is outside of these parameters change your date value to a string value in the source database pi 147 XMap User Guide Lin king a Set to an Attribute This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Once you import an attribute set using the option in the Design View of the Attributes subtab you can link that attribute set to view more specific attribute information for your layer Notes XMap supports one to one A one to one attribute set is used to add editable properties to a layer Any time there is a single row in the first set left side of dialog box anda single row in the additional set right side of dialog box with the same linking value a connection is formed This is where the name one to one comes from since there is one attribute in a set that is linked to one attribute in another set An example is parcel layer with an assessor s dataset attached to as a one to one link and many to one A many to one dataset is used
338. is cleared 4 Type the coordinates in the text boxes Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display tab of the Options dialog box OR Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude and longitude of the current map center e Update the date time options You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change the date and time settings used by the GPS device to those of your choice 285 XMap User Guide 286 Use the following steps to change the date and or time settings L 2 3 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on Click the Options button E EN and then click the GPS Settings tab To use the date and time on your computer select the Use Current System Date Time check box OR To use the time and date of your choice clear the Use Current System Date Time check box and then e To manually set the time select the time zone from the Zone drop down box and if Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect where you are select the DST check box Then use the scroll box to select the desired time Note Time is displayed in 24 hour format with Midnight as 00 00 00 e To manually set the date click the down arrow next to the Date field and select the date from the calendar Set your preferences You can set various options for how GPS works Use the following steps to change th
339. is Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you delete a layer it is permanently removed from the database To Delete a Layer Use the following steps to delete a layer in a database 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Inthe table click the layer you want to delete To select multiple layers for deletion hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys on your keyboard while you click each layer you want to delete 4 Right click the layer s in the list and click Delete A confirmation message displays OR Click the Layers button and then click Delete A confirmation message displays 5 Click Yes to delete the layer s from the database Note You can also delete layers from a database using the Manage Layers dialog box Click the Manage Layers tool on the toolbar under Layers in the Database click the layers you want to delete and then click the Delete button r Exporting a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Once you edit your layer you may want to export the layer to another program DeLorme OpenSpace transfer files contain all of your GIS data including classification symbolization attributes query information etc shapefiles do not If you have an active query against the layer you are exporting you can choose to export the results of t
340. is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route and click Calculate Road Quickest Calculate Road Shortest Calculate Trail or Calculate Direct Note Ifthe program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK 3 Click Directions to view the route directions OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route Use the following steps to insert a stop or via to your route 1 Create a route 2 In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool 8 if you are adding a stop or the Via tool s if you are adding a via is labeled Insert If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select Insert 3 To insert a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Address Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GP
341. istance and bearing numbers of the individual points not recommended for rectangles the end point s distance and bearing angle change in relationship to the start point of the segment Renaming a Draw Object Once you create a draw object you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map To Rename a Draw Object in the File List Use the following steps to rename a draw object in the file list lt 2 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table Any draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected Right click the draw object and select Rename OR Click within the file name cell once Then click it again do not double click The file name area activates Type the file name and press the ENTER key on your keyboard To Rename a Draw Object on the Map Use the following steps to rename a draw object on the map 1 2 Open the project that contains the draw object you want to rename Right click the waypoint point to Manage Draw and click Edit Draw Object Text The waypoint text box opens Note If you have more than one waypoint close together you may have to select from a list OR
342. isted select Other from the drop down list and attach the existing database If you want to create a new database select New 6 Click OK To Create a New Layer From Query Results This option is available only when there is an active query for the selected layer in the workspace Use the following steps to create a new layer using query results 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the Layers button point to Create and then click Layer from Query Results The Create Layer from Query Results dialog box opens The name of the active query displays in the Active Query text box and the number of query results display Note To change the active query click Cancel to exit the Layer from Query Results dialog click the Query subtab and select the query you want to make active from the Query drop down list To proceed repeat steps 2 4 4 To change the layer name type a new name in the Name text box 5 From the Target Database drop down list select the database where you want to store the new layer If the database is not listed select Other from the drop down list and attach the existing database If you want to create a new database select New 6 Click OK Viewing Layer Information in the Workspace This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The Workspace subtab displays all of the GIS layers in your project y
343. isted in more than one category Boundaries Map and Surveying Border Boundary Contour Crosshair 188 Finding a Location on the Map Grid Line Point ZIP Postal Code Buildings and Structures Airport Bridge Business Landmark Library Businesses Hotel Gasoline Restaurant Pizza Education and Cultural College Local Park Park School State Park University Natural Features Beach Canyon Crater Desert Forest Glacier Hill Island Mountain River Stream Valley Water Miscellaneous Cemetery Hiking Mine Note Park 189 XMap User Guide Object Types All of the stock draw symbols such as blue map pin red flag canoe etc Draw symbols GIS Layers Objects in non DeLorme data Roads and Trails Bridge Exit Ferry Foot Trail Highway Hiking Interstate One Way Railroad Road Street Trail Tunnel Travel Amenities Airport Exit Landmark Rest Area Unique Natural Features Geographic Feature Landmark Locale Mining Trail Park or Other Open Space Tourist Attraction Notes on Category Searches The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category searches e Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length e Keywords are not case sensitive Using all capital letters or no capital letters does not affect the search e Some generic keywords water for example match many categories and display a dialog box with specific c
344. it the current active editable draw file You can also lock a draw file making it uneditable To Edit a Draw File Use the following steps to edit a draw file L 2 3 le 8 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Verify the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Click the Select tool Al and then click the draw file object on the map that you want to edit Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area To Lock a Draw File Use the following steps to lock a draw file 1 2 3 4 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Exporting Draw Files to Text Files You can export draw files as text files Draw objects exported to text files contain coordinate information for each line area or point object You can open these text files in other DeLorme products To Export Draw Files to Text Files Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file L 2 206 Click the Draw tab Click
345. ivated Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version 5 1 You can also use other speech recognition engines that you may have purchased separately from other software companies Such speech recognition engines must support SAPI 5 1 to be available to you in your application See the Speech settings in the Windows Control Panel for more information about your engine If you have purchased other voices text to speech engines that are SAPI 5 1 compatible they are available in your application You must have a microphone attached to your computer to use speech recognition for input For tips on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone see Speech Recognition Tips If you are having difficulty hearing the voice output adjust the volume on your external speakers or adjust your computer s volume using the settings in the Windows Control Panel If you chose the custom installation option when you installed your application you were asked whether or not to install a soeech recognition engine for voice input If you want to use voice input and selected not to install a speech recognition engine when you installed the program you must uninstall and then reinstall the application making sure to select to install the speech recognition engine e The speech recognition engine is automatically installed on Windows 7 operating systems If you have another DeLorme product installed and
346. ject files Missing layers can be corrected without having to start with a new project file Installation has been updated for both software and data Future software updates can be easily patched verses having to reinstall the whole application Data installations is also optimized for larger institutions The same technology Microsoft uses for their patches can now be used to install DeLorme large base maps call DeLorme for instructions New SQL technology SQL LocalDB replaces the need to install SQL Server Express on field worker laptops easing installation and reducing help ticket calls New Team Tracking tab When used with DeLorme s inReach devices multiple users can be tracked in real time Receive SOS No Motion and No Communication alerts Supports geofencing based on GIS objects Get an alert when user enters or leaves a designated area Updated Administrator Guide for custom installations along with configuration options for XMap Contact DeLorme for a copy of the guide How do I Click a question to open the related Help topic See also Frequently Asked Questions Controlling the Map How do I pan the map How do I zoom the map in and out How do I change the map view to show the left map view right map view or both Display Preferences How do I change the map colors Draw Tools How do I add a road or trail to my map Searching for a Location How do search for a location GIS How do I import a layer in
347. k Files for Transfer check box is selected If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file clear this check box and go to step 8 Under File Options select Maintain Directory I nfo to save the directory structure of the hyperlinked files If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked files in the transfer file select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to step 7 Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files up to the folder location that you want to maintain in the text box OR Click the Browse button El and browse to the common base directory location Under Select Files to Be I ncluded clear the check box next to each file you do not want to include in your transfer file Click OK The Create Transfer File dialog box opens In the File Name text box type the file name Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Click Create Your file is created and saved in the specified location The default location for imported transfer file attachments is C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files Using Projects Map Data Importing Transfer Files You can package a project and its contents into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying You can also import transfer files allowing you to share your projects with other DeLorme users You can import a transfer file with or without attached
348. k box is selected The only time a MapTag is not placed is when you find and then go to a labeled area that has no single map point associated with it for example a large park Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click Go To A MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected Tip Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results Not Successful The Advanced dialog area displays The program makes its best guess about the type of search you were trying and your search word s display in the upper right text box Click Search to proceed For more information see Performing an Advanced Search Use a comma to separate city and state country Atlanta Georgia Montreal Canada major point of interest and state Mt Washington NH parts of an address 444 E Pk Drive Milford CT or 444 E Pk Dr 06460 or coordinate points N 43 8 W 70 2 You can find major landmarks or points of interest such as Yellowstone National Park and Mount Rushmore without using the state as part of the search criteria Separate street intersections with an ampersand Congress St amp High St Portland ME or Congress St amp High St 0
349. k was added to the map the date and time the track was last modified the start and finish time of the track the total time of the track the distance of the track in the measurement chosen in the Display settings and the number of readings that the track includes 5 Optional Double click a draw object in the table to center the map on its location 212 OR Right click the draw object in the table and click Go To Using the Draw Tools 6 Optional To sort the columns of data in the table in ascending order click the column header Click the column header again to sort in descending order 7 Optional To modify a draw object s name comment or URL in the table click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field press CTRL ENTER on your keyboard 8 Optional To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Details 9 Optional To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser 10 Optional To delete a draw object click the draw object in the table
350. key way Boston MA Bob Smith Mary Jones John Doe address book entries GPS yarmouth me route from current location to yarmouth me N39 45 717 W104 57 010 N39 43 95 W104 51 510 Boston MA camp Using the XMap API Command Window settings and selected grids clearhandheldselection Deselects any currently selected grids Provides help command name help findshortcut and examples for each command within the command window 339 Legal Information DeLorme XMap GIS Single User License Agreement DeLorme XMap 8 GIS Single User License Agreement This is an Agreement between you the end user and DeLorme By using the XMap 8 software all titles and versions data and documentation the System you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement The XMap 8 system consists of three possible software titles XMap 8 Professional XMap 8 GIS Editor and XMap 8 GIS Enterprise Edition If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement you may not use the System Return all materials within thirty 30 days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them or to DeLorme for a full refund Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms or conditions of this Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in writing by both parties L
351. kota Customizing the Map and Tab Display e County Borders View shaded outlines of U S counties at data zoom levels 7 0 or greater e International Labels View country labels at data zoom levels 0 0 through 4 0 e Urban Area Color Displays a shaded map area in populated regions at data zoom levels 5 0 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Customizing the Map Feature Preferences You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize your map to meet your specific needs You can even customize which POIs display To Set Custom Map Features This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific custom set of map features for your map display from hundreds of options Note that changes are not visible until you click the Done button d 4 Click the Options button z E on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Map Features tab Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize Features to display the custom options Note Custom map feature selections override selections in the basic features list To quickly search for a particular type of feature type the name of the item in the Search text box A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature typ
352. l Razor knife Straight edge ruler longer than the edge of the longest sheet Permanent tape invisible or magic type Removable tape To Manually Assemble a Multi page Map Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi page map 1 2 For each sheet that needs to be trimmed mark the edges of the sheet to indicate the areas to trim Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin black line bordering the map Note For adjacent sheets trim only one page This makes piecing the sheets together easier The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi page map provide additional information on where to trim the sheets The arrows indicate the edges to be trimmed 2 x 2 multi page Map 173 XMap User Guide i a 3 Align two adjacent sheets placing the trimmed edge on top of the non trimmed edge Notes e Piece together the multi page map one seam at a time This is especially important for a 3 x 3 multi page map e Build the multi page map from the inside out to minimize any misalignment 174 Printing 4 Using two small pieces of removable tape tack together the aligned sheets Note This is a temporary measure Steps 6 through 10 describe how to completely secure the sheets 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together 6 With the multi page temporarily pieced together use small pieces of removable tape to secure the corners and edges of the multi
353. l indefinitely Copyright c 1990 2005 Info ZIP All rights reserved For the purposes of this copyright and license Info ZIP is defined as the following set of individuals Mark Adler John Bush Karl Davis Harald Denker Jean Michel Dubois J ean loup Gailly Hunter Goatley Ed Gordon lan Gorman Chris Herborth Dirk Haase Greg Hartwig Robert Heath Jonathan Hudson Paul Kienitz David Kirschbaum Johnny Lee Onno van der Linden Igor Mandrichenko Steve P Miller Sergio Monesi Keith Owens George Petrov Greg Roelofs Kai Uwe Rommel Steve Salisbury Dave Smith Steven M Schweda Christian Spieler Cosmin Truta Antoine Verheijen Paul von Behren Rich Wales Mike White 348 Legal Information This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions 2 Redistributions in binary form compiled executables must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in
354. l of the items placement is based on the bottom side of the bottom most item Vertical Center to center the items based on the average of the vertical placement of the items Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the horizontal placement of the items Center to center the items based on the center of the average area that the items cover on the map Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other Stack Horizontally to position the items side by side e To make multiple graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click point to Make Same Size and click Width Height or Both When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change Important For an item to be made the Same size as another item the item must not be locked for example the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box should be cleared for any images only text items with default size text boxes can be resized and so on e To delete multiple text or graphic items click the Edit tool drag the mouse on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can snap each item to the location you want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging the item to snap it
355. l square symbol name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and the large symbol You can change the units of measure used to represent how coordinate formats distance datum and bearing listings display Changing these preferences affects how units of measure display in several areas of the program such as on the map and in the Control Panel As you change your unit of measure preferences a description of each choice displays in the information box in the center of the Options dialog box immediately after you select it To Change the Coordinate Preferences Changing the coordinate preferences affects the e Coordinates display on the Control Panel e Coordinate MapNotes e Grid label display if Grids are selected in Map Features e Any other place where coordinates display or print Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display 1 Click the Options button E mei i on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop down list 42 Degrees Degrees Minutes Deg Min Sec UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic MGRS Military Grid Reference System USNG United States National Grid 4 5 Notes Customizing t
356. l you achieve the size of the rectangle you want Filled Rectangle Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size of the filled rectangle you want Fill Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from the color palette Select Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the Symbol Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another symbol in the grid Using the Transparency Option The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as transparent in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping program For example you may want to view the symbol object without the square of the surrounding background color You would then select the background color to appear transparent To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent L 244 Click the Draw tab T pf Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid Select the Transparent option under Transparency Click the Select Color tool P The pointer changes to a dropper tool Select the color on the symbol
357. lace the object on the map MapNotes The URL Label text box opens Symbols Type the label for your draw object in the Label section of the text box Note When viewing a hyperlinked draw object on the map the object displays as an active hyperlink If you want to click the object without opening the hyperlink press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the draw object Text Labels Waypoints Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map The Routable Road and Routable Trail tools allow you to add a new road or trail to a draw layer in the current project You can then incorporate any new roads you add to a route when you create a route You must be at data zoom level 11 0 or greater when adding roads or trails with the Routable Road tool or Routable Trail tool To Draw Routable Roads or Trails Use the following steps to add routable roads trails to a road layer 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Routable Road Routable Trail tool a Bi and select the tool you want 3 Type the name of the road or trail you want to add in the Road Trail Name text box Name each routable road trail you add so you can locate it using the find feature 4 Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads and trails to display the yellow diamond symbol The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point 223 XMap User Guide for your new road will co
358. lar axis and the prime meridian Longitude is measured in degrees minutes and seconds All lines of longitude meet at the poles and are often referred to as meridians Calculated from the start of the profile to the current cursor position If the cursor is not in the profile area then the value is calculated from the start of the profile to the end of the profile This statistical information is available only if UTM UPS SPCS USNG or MGRS is selected as the coordinate system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box This statistical information is available only if a latitude longitude format is selected as the coordinate system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Note For information on manually setting your minimum and maximum elevation see Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation You can manually set a maximum or minimum elevation to display in your profile graph To Manually Adjust Minimum and Maximum Elevation Use the following steps to manually adjust minimum and maximum elevation 1 Create a profile 257 XMap User Guide 2 Click the More button _ Mores 3 To control the maximum height displayed on the profile graph under Manual Scale select the Max Elev check box and type the maximum height in the text box This adjusts the top end of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display heights above the defined height 4 To cont
359. lassify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 From the Classification drop down list select the classification you want to rename 6 Click the Manage button and then click Rename The Classification text box opens for editing 7 Edit the classification name and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard 8 Click OK to close the Classify Layer dialog box oe YS Deleting a Classification 123 XMap User Guide This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Because all completed classifications are retained you may want to delete an existing classification that you no longer need To Delete a Classification Use the following steps to delete an existing classification Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to delete Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 From the Classification drop down list select the classification you want to delete 6 Click the Manage button and then click Delete 7 Click OK Symbolizing and Labeling e W Ne Symbolizing and Labeling Overview You can symbolize your layer so that you can control of how the layer displays on the map The symboli
360. lbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the Search option 4 In the Commands text box begin typing the name of the command or command group you are searching for As you type the list box under the Commands text box displays word matches Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme ia The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete list of all of the scheme s shortcut keys To View a List of Shortcut Keys Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme 1 Click the Options button c ala on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the Scheme drop down list 4 Optional To sort the list view click the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut 53 XMap User Guide Click Reference Card The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same column you selected in step 3 Optional Print the list from your Web browser Print a reference card from your web browser 54 Use the Print Preview functionality in your web browser to see if the list will display as you want it to If you do not like the way the list looks in the preview for example the list pr
361. le This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Save as Template feature in the Classify Layer dialog box to save the parameters of a selected classification into a template that you can apply to another layer The Save as Template feature is useful only when the layer to which you are applying the template has the same attribute fields name and data type as those used in the original template If the layer does not have the same attribute fields as those used in the template an error will appear when applying the template to the layer To Save a Classification to a Template File Use the following steps to save a classification as a template 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to save as a template 121 XMap User Guide 4 Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 From the Classification drop down list select the classification you want to save as a template 6 Click the Manage button and then click Save as Template The Save Template dialog box opens 7 Browse to the location where you want to save the template name the template and click Save Note Classification templates have xmc extensions 8 Click OK Creating a Classifica
362. le is exported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file s to export in days hours minutes and seconds To send the results of a command to a logfile type gt path filename log 2 gt 1 at the end of the command Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear in the command line If no path is specified the logfile will be created in the default target directory Bulk Exporting Parameters 89 XMap User Guide This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Type xmapexport on the command line and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard to display a list of instructions and general required export parameters parameters vary based on the type of files you are exporting All OpenSpace layers that you export require you to specify at least four parameters in the command line following the xmapexport command The required exporting parameters include text in red reflect the user s information e source server the SQL server where the database for exporting resides e source db the OpenSpace database the layers are being exported from e output file the file format and extension for the exported layers e layer the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported OR layerid the identification number of the layer in the OpenSpace database Optional exporting parameters include text in red reflect the user s informati
363. lect an option the Import Source Selection dialog box opens so you can define the import parameters A new file is created and added to the Workspace subtab on the GIS tab OR If you want to copy the file and save it as a different layer type select the option you e WU Ne 213 XMap User Guide want A new file is created and added to the Workspace subtab on the GIS tab Note lf a layer type is not available in the menu it is because the original draw file that you are copying does not contain data that is pertinent to that file type For example you cannot copy a draw layer that contains area objects such as circles to a road layer that requires line objects Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right click feature on the map For more information see Changing Draw Object Types Changing Draw Object Types When you add a draw object to the map a draw file is automatically created that includes that object The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was created Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 Track Track Layer Area Object Polygon Circle Rectangle Draw Layer Point Object MapNote Text Label Symbol Image Line Object Line Arc Spline You can right click a draw object on the map and change it to a road track
364. lected transformation Creating Data for a Registered Image The information in a WorkFile the image reference and control point pairs is used to make the necessary calculations to create a map dataset Once the dataset has been created it can be used as a base map and utilized in a project map view To Create Data for a Registered I mage Use the following steps to create data for a registered image 1 Register an image or open an existing WorkFile 2 Click Create Data 3 In the Name text box under Dataset type a name for the new dataset to create The dataset has a dat extension and an associated index file with a ind extension 4 Use the default path to the C DeLorme Docs ImageReg directory within the Path text box or click the browse button if you want to select another path for the dataset 5 In the Comments text box type information related to the registered image This information can help you identify the dataset later 6 Click Process to generate a raster dataset 7 Click OK when data creation is complete The new dataset displays in the map window on top of your original source data 8 To view the new image in the entire screen click WorkFile and click Close to close the image window Opening and Closing Existing WorkFiles You can save your control point list and a reference to the image in a WorkFile To Open an Existing WorkFile Use the following steps to open an existing WorkFile 1 Click the Im
365. lected as your Find type Click a Within type in the following list for more information World Searches for a name or ZIP Postal Code within these countries North America Searches for a name in North America US Canada Searches for ZIP Postal Code within the United States and Canada Available only when ZIP Postal Code s is selected as the Find parameter City or County Searches for the specified name within the ZIP Postal Codes associated with the city county and state province specified in the text boxes ZIP Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Postal Code Displays a ZIP Postal Code text field A U S search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code A Canadian search for a 3 character Postal Code is treated the same as a six character Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Postal Code Displays a ZIP Postal Code text field A U S search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a 5 digit ZIP Code A Canadian search for a 3 character Postal Code is treated the same as a 6 character Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Code Displays a ZIP Code text field A search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code U S State Searches for a name within a specific U S state This option is available only when Category or Name and or Category is selected as the Find parameter Note If you are searching within a larger state this type of se
366. licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then 351 XMap User Guide any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE fil
367. line width from the Width drop down list If available select the Highlight check box to make your line arc spline appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the line arc spline As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the line arc spline on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected To draw a line or spline click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line OR To draw an arc click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line arc spline click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the line arc spline Drawing a Track on the Map You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features To Draw a Track Use the following steps to draw a track 1 oe
368. ll e USGS 1 24K Scanned Maps 7 5 minute 1 24 000 scale quadrangle series e SAT10 Satellite Imagery True color 10 meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite Satellites d observation de la Terre e Color DOQQ Aerial Imagery True color 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography e USGS DOQQ Aerial Imagery Black and white 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography e NOAA Nautical Charts Scanned Maps Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA e USGS Hi resolution 133 City Aerial Imagery Color aerial imagery over the country s largest metropolitan areas with a resolution of approximately 1 3 meter or about 1 foot 330 Using NetLink Downloads View and receive downloads and software updates If you have an Earthmate PN Series GPS you can also access firmware updates Support Your connection to DeLorme links to technical support the forums the DeLorme blogs and more You can also submit a map correction to us Tutorial Add Maps and I magery Your purchase of XMap includes a Data Download Dollars certificate for 40 of imagery downloads You can download aerial satellite USGS Quad data NOAA nautical charts and more You must be a registered user to receive your imagery If you did not register during the product installation you can register using the NetLink tab Once you have used your certificate dow
369. ll green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Placing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location You can place any line object routable road routable trail line arc or spline at a specific coordinate location To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location L 2 Click the Draw tab To place a routable road or trail click and hold the Routable Road Routable Trail al Si tool and select the tool you want OR f Wy To place a line arc spline click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool A and select the tool you want Then select the line style width if available and color for your line arc spline Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box Note If you are placing an arc enter new numbers into the Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes for the
370. ly geometries display in the Attributes table with a yellow padlock i next to them To Make a Geometry Read Only Use the following steps to set a geometry to be read only 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Select the layer that includes the geometry you want to modify as read only from the workspace list 4 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button al 5 Inthe table select the Visible check box for the Source Name ReadOnly 6 Click the Datasheet View button E The attributes of the layer display and the new ReadOnly column displays 7 To select an individual geometry click to select it in the Attributes table Double click in the ReadOnly cell and select True from the drop down list Then press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR To select multiple geometries a Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click each geometry you want to make read only or hold the SHIFT key to select a block of geometries b Hold the ALT key on your keyboard and double click in one of the geometries ReadOnly cells 149 XMap User Guide C Select True from the drop down list d Press the ENTER key on your keyboard e At the confirmation message click Yes to confirm that you want to apply the edit to the entire selection Using Right Click Options in Design View This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS E
371. m for YY Importing a Set to Link to an Attribute This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Each layer contains a set of attributes relative to that layer you can import an additional attribute set relative to that layer Once you import the attribute set you can link it to the layer s attributes to view additional information about the layer To Import a Set to Link to an Attribute Use the following steps to import a set to link to an attribute 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Select a layer from the workspace list 4 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button Fall Click Options 6 Click Manage Sets and then click Import The Append Attributes dialog box opens OR Click Import The Append Attributes dialog box opens 7 Click the browse button to locate the file you want to import Supported file types include xls dbf sds txt csv tab asc mdb mdw mda The name of the set displays in the Set Name text box and descriptive text displays in the Set Statistics area The Set Name text box is editable 8 If you are importing a file other than a text file select the table spreadsheet you want to append from the list 9 Click Next 10 If the file you are importing is a text file select whether it is a tab delimited comma delimited or other delimited text file If you want to use the f
372. m you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set dim file You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Create a New Symbol Use the following steps to create a new symbol L 4 236 Click the Draw tab T M Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB Under Symbols select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to from the drop down list OR select New to create a new symbol set Under Symbols click Edit to display the DeLorme XSym dialog box Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and Anchor to create the new symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol Using the Draw Tools e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Notes e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the
373. mate GPS Sync Date Created May 20 2010 3 53 PM Last Modified May 25 2010 4 24 PM J Syne complete F Sync complete SYNC PREVIEW SYNC PREVIEW 3 File s will be synced 4 File s will be synced 1 Map Packages will be synced 1 Map Package s will be synced C Project Contents GPS Contents m l See more detail and make changes See more detail and make changes Deleting Files from a PN Series GPS You can use Earthmate GPS Sync to delete maps routes tracks waypoints and geocaches from your Earthmate PN Series GPS or an SD card in an SD card reader L 2 Connect your device or SD card reader to your computer ak Click the Sync button on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box On the right device SD card side of the dialog box click GPS Contents and then click the category for the file you want to delete to display the files on the device SD card The last column shows the file location Select the red X outline for each file to delete A solid red X indicates a file is selected for deletion the check box for the file is cleared so it isn t copied to Topo North America Click Sync on the dialog box The sync process removes the files selected for deletion from the device or SD card 321 XMap User Guide Track Layers Date Created May 20 201 53 PM a SELECT DESENATION 4 i L st Modified Mav 25 2040 4 24 Pli 1 if 2010 05 21 121027P 1 y Q L iT mi Ni P Bradbury Mtn
374. ment of a GIS to increase productivity XMap GIS Editor also includes all the features in XMap Professional e Create forms in databases synchronized from an XMap Enterprise database e Create zero and negative polygon buffers e Export KML files e Geocode by State Plane and UTM coordinate systems e Cut individual GIS layers to a PN Series GPS device for field work e Search for GIS objects using enhanced real time proximity search for GIS objects using GPS Radar on the Find tab XMap User Guide e Import and work with a variety of GIS file formats including ESRI shp and e00 MapInfo mif and tab AutoCAD dwg and dxf and more e Geocode your existing data in mdb xls and other formats to create GIS layers e Create and edit points lines and polygons with freehand draw tools or with precise coordinate geometry input tools e Access advanced classification annotation buffer and geospatial query tools e Create your own raster data layers with multi point image registration XMap Professional XMap Professional is ideally suited for field crews and mobile professionals By offering access to GIS data that has been processed using the GIS Editor or GIS Enterprise editions of XMap it provides an affordable alternative to a full fledged GIS for use on the road and in the field XMap Professional offers essential and fundamental mapping functions that include data visualization access to aerial and satellite imagery add
375. metry 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit 113 XMap User Guide 2 Click the Rotate tool on the toolbar Click the geometry on the map that you want to rotate 4 Position your cursor over one of the green circles and drag the object until it has reached the new position Note Geometries are rotated based on the geographic center point of the object which may produce confusing results saa Notes To return to the default map mode click the Navigation tool on the toolbar To undo your last action click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo your last action click the Redo button gt To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool 3 If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab click the down arrow next to He the commit changes tool and select the Automatic Commit Mode tool S automatically commit your changes The rotate tool is not available for topological line layers Deleting a Geometry This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Edit tool E on the toolbar to delete geometries on the map To Delete a Geometry Use the following steps to delete a geometry 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit 2 Click th
376. mmand line xmapexport the path to the Ini file you created in steps 1 3 6 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is exported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file to export in days hours minutes and seconds To Export Files Creating a Batch File This option allows you to automate several iterations of export with a user created batch file You can create batch files with a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad Each line of the batch file pertains to a single export command line and contains the same parameters as would be specified with manual entry in the command line Multiple layers located in different OpenSpace databases can be exported into different file formats and directories using this method 1 Open your preferred text editing program such as Wordpad or Notepad 2 Type the export parameters in the text document Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no character returns 3 Save the text document with a bat or cmd extension rather than a txt extension 4 From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click the XMap Bulk I mporter Exporter option 5 Type the path for the bat cmd file you created in steps 1 3 in the command line for example c test_batch bat 6 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the fi
377. mn name you want to show hide You can also right click the table heading and click Show All Columns to view all of the available columns Note To sort columns click the column header drag it to the new position and drop it The sort order is saved in your project file Adding and Removing Layers In Your Workspace This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can use the Manage Layers function to change the set of layers currently listed in your workspace Click the Remove Database Connection button BF in the Manage Layers dialog box to deactivate the selected source database To Add a Layer to Your Workspace Use the following steps to add a layer to your workspace If you want added layers to automatically display on the map once they are added select the Show layers added from Manage Layers on map check box on the GIS gt Layer tab in the Options dialog box 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the Layers button and then click Manage The Manage Layers dialog box opens OR Click the Manage Layers button E on the toolbar The Manage Layers dialog box opens 101 XMap User Guide 4 From the Source Database drop down list select the database that contains the layer s you want to add to your workspace or select Other to attach a new database to add layers to The available layers for that datab
378. mport a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced 240 Using the Draw Tools e If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Dragging a Bitmap into XSym You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Using drag to bring in an image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym Ideally the new bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Drag a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym 1 Click the Draw tab T pe 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Browse your computer to locate the bitmap bmp file 7 Drag the file into XSym The bitmap image di
379. ms than you can in the QuickSearch tab such as by category street intersection and more To Perform an Advanced Search Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function 1 Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab Note This screen automatically displays if you performed an unsuccessful QuickSearch 180 From the Find drop down list select the Find type When more than one match is available the closest match displays first in the Results list Click a Find type in the list below for more information Name Use Name to locate a city town landmark object label and so on Street Address Use Street Address to locate by street number and name highway number and so on You can use standard abbreviations like Rd Road St Street or Saint Mt Mount Dr Drive and Ct Court Street Intersection Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads ZIP Postal Code s Use at least a partial ZIP Postal Code to locate the covered regions The results display in a browse list Use at least a partial ZIP Postal Code to locate the covered regions The results are displayed in a browse list This means you are taken into the Z P Postal Code database at the closest matching valid ZIP Postal Code You can browse through results in either direction Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions The results are displayed in a browse list Name and or Category Searche
380. n and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive Click Finish 329 Using NetLink NetLink Overview NetLink is an online portal within XMap You must have an Internet connection to use NetLink The NetLink tab has four subtabs Within each subtab follow the on screen instructions or click the NetLink Help button on the Map Library subtab for more information Home Purchase or activate a Map Library subscription activate a Data Download Dollars certificate and learn more about our products Map Library Purchase Methods e Map Library subscription The most cost effective method for purchasing datasets is an annual DeLorme Map Library subscription For just 29 95 a year you can download an unlimited number of our available datasets e DeLorme Data Download Dollars certificate Included with your purchase Is a certificate for 40 worth of data downloads This gives you the opportunity to see how imagery and data can enhance your maps e Purchase You can always purchase downloads If you prefer to receive your datasets on DVD you must use this method Datasets The following datasets are available Click a link to view more information about a dataset Click Show All to view information about all datasets Show A
381. n the active layer type Add points lines or polygons to a layer COGO BS Place a polygon line point by coordinates angle distance measurements or bearing distance measurements Classification or depending on the active layer type Modify the classification for a selected geometry Commit Changes layer Save all of the changes you have made to the active These tools are available only in XMap Editor and XMap Enterprise Redlining Synchronization Tools These tools appear in the toolbar when an active subscription exists kr Redlining Mark up a GIS layer Synchronizing oes Refresh subscription layers send redline layers to the source database and send edits to the database 31 XMap User Guide e Add Synchronized Layers ac Add all of the layers that are in the active Subscription to your workspace e Revert a Discard changes made to a layer before synchronizing the active layer with the database on the Enterprise database server Undo Redo e Undo and Redo gt Use these tools to undo redo your last action as long as the action is not committed The Undo button may not be available for XMap Professional users as most actions are automatically committed To Create a Route To set route points using the toolbar 1 Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box next to the green Start button OR Click the green Start button
382. name 3 Click Data and then click Add The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens 4 Browse to the folder where the file you want to add Is located and click the file to select it 5 Select the map you want to add the file to primary secondary or both from the Add To drop down list 6 Click Add The file is added to the current project under the selected map Note If you add a file to a project and later update the file the file is updated in every project you have added to 7 Save your project Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Notes e For information about migrating data to XMap see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location e Select the check box next to a file to display it Clear the check box to hide it e Use the Move to Primary Map and Move to Secondary Map buttons to move datasets from one map to the other Adding Removing Base Data 57 XMap User Guide Use the Base Data function in the Map Data tab to modify the default map data source s for your current and future projects To Add Base Data Use the following steps to add base data to your current and future projects 1 2 3 5 Click the Map Data tab Create a new or open an existing project Click Data and then click Base Data The Data Locations dialog box opens and lists each of the data sources on your system Select the check box next to the data source you want to
383. name for the file in the File name text box The default name is DrawExport Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area I mporting Files to Draw Files You can import many types of files as draw files The file items display as draw objects within the draw file You can also use the Exchange dialog to download waypoint and tracks to the Draw tab See the Help topics under Using Handheld Devices for more information See the chart at the end of this topic to learn what is imported for each type of file Important To add a track Draw file an1 to a project click the Add button on the Map Data tab For more information see Adding Removing Files in a Project To I mport Files Use the following steps to import a file 1 2 3 Notes Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Click Import The Import Draw File dialog box opens Browse to the source folder of the file The default location is C DeLorme Docs Export From the Files of type drop down list select the type of file you want to import If you selected Text File or All Files from the Files of Type drop down list select the file s coordinate and datum from the applicable drop down lists OR If you selected GPS Log File format select how you want the file to display on the map from the Import As drop down list Select the file and then click Open The draw objects in the imported file display A new draw f
384. nd areas display throughout the program Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area L 2 3 Click the Options button Ba RENIE on the toolbar and then click Options Click the Display tab Select the measurement from the Measurements drop down list e Statute Miles statute feet are used for small distances e Kilometers meters are used for small distances e Nautical Miles Feet statute feet are used for small distances e Nautical Miles Meters meters are used for small distances Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box To Change the Bearing Preferences Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab or from an Advanced Distance From search in the Find tab Bearing refers to the compass direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees for example 30 or nearest compass point for example NNE and indicated from True North or Magnetic North Notes 43 XMap User Guide e Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and Magnetic North at a specific location e The bearing setting does not affect map appearance Use the following steps to change the bearing 1 Click the Options button c pia on the toolbar and then click Options 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the bearing from the Bearing drop down
385. nd polygon area on the map Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active polygon a small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment and a small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment Select the Coordinate option or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option You can also delete points and line segments from or add points to a polygon Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can place any area object circle rectangle or polygon at a specific coordinate location 230 Using the Draw Tools To Place an Area Object on the Map Use the following steps to place a circle rectangle or polygon on the map L 2 3 4 Click the Draw tab emo Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool and select the tool you want Select the circle fill outline and or width options To place a circle on the map enter the coordinates for the circle s center into the corresponding text boxes Then enter
386. nd to Back options so that each can still be displayed To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 2 Place more than one text or graphic item on your map see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map placing the text graphic items on top of each other 3 If one of the text graphic items you want to display is partially underneath another text graphic item select the item you want to display right click and click Bring to Front To reverse this step right click the item and select Send to Back Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click point to Make Same Size and click Width Height or Both When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map When you print a map a yellow or black if you are using High Contrast Colors background automatically displays on the printout If you want a transparent background for example if you are printing transparencies you can change the Print sett
387. ndheld Export Control Panel Overview Map The Control Panel located to the right of the map view displays information pertinent to the current map view and map cursor position It also includes zoom and map pan buttons You can customize your interface to show or hide the Control Panel Data Zoom Level The current data zoom level of the map view ranges between 0 0 maximum zoom out and 20 0 maximum zoom in Zoom Tools Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels out one level or in one level For more information see Zooming In and Out Compass Rose A group of nine buttons on a globe The outer buttons have yellow arrows click one of the arrow buttons to pan the map in that direction Click the middle button to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom up to 256 times Map Rotation Tool The arrow in the graphic indicates True North in relation to the rotated map Use the Map Rotation Tool to rotate the map in any direction You can rotate the map by clicking or dragging the square map graphic in the direction you want or by selecting typing the degree of map rotation from the drop down list Map Coordinates Coordinates for the current map cursor position display based on the units of measurement preferences chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Elevation and I nterval Display in the measurement chosen in the Display tab of the Options
388. ndow The command window opens To See a List of Commands and Parameters To see a list of available commands and their parameters follow these steps 1 Open the command window 2 On the command line type xmapi A list of commands and parameters displays For more information see API Commands and Parameters To Execute a Command Using the Command Line To execute a command follow these steps 1 Open the command window 2 On the command line type a command and parameter Note All commands begin with xmapi and all parameters are separated by a single space For more information see API Commands and Parameters Example Type the following in the command line xmapi quicksearch yarmouth me and press ENTER on the keyboard XMap launches if not already running and switches to the Find tab A quick search is run and the application centers the map on Yarmouth ME Note To send the results of a command to a logfile type gt path filename log 2 gt 1 at the end of the command Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear in the command line If no path is specified the logfile will be created in the default target directory To Get Help Within the Command Window To view help within the command window including examples follow these steps 1 Open the command window 2 On the command line type the help command xmapi help and the command you need help for Example Type xmapi help createroute
389. ne and Yarmouth Maine with two vias and one stop F Cumberland Center cumberland Foreside a Cm rth Mnara e What s the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route The Add Stop Via function adds stops vias in the order you add them to the route e Why did my route fail to calculate Your route will fail to calculate if you create a route e With a route start stop via or finish point in an area that you have designated as a Route Avoid e That includes route points outside the United States Mexico or Canada e Onan island without roads In this case XMap will look for the nearest road to that island to place the route point If the nearest road is not routable for example it is the only road on the island and or the island does not have ferry access you will get an error message saying Route failed to calculate e Why do X marks display on the map when calculate a route 11 XMap User Guide e When you place a route point in a location that isn t on a street XMap finds the closest street to that location marks the space between the point you clicked and the street with X marks and starts the route at the street e f you perform a Find for an address that is on a walkway and place a route point on it XMap finds the closest street to that location marks the space between the point you clicked and t
390. ne is working correctly and to view tips on microphone selection and placement To use the wizard click Microphone Setup on the Voice tab of the Options dialog Or from the Start menu on your computer browse to the Control Panel and double click the Speech icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box To increase the likelihood of correct speech recognition on the Voice Settings tab in the Options dialog box select the Commands start with check box and then type the appropriate word phrase in the text box if using a single word use a word with more than one syllable For example if you tyoe computer you would then say Computer zoom in Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Voice Commands calculated To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route Your application includes Route Map GPS and Voice tab control commands Select the Show All Commands check box to view all options including those which are variations or unavailable Route Tab Commands The following table shows navigation voice commands for the Route tab If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command What is the next turn Speaks the next turn name time to turn distance to turn F5 bearing to turn and turn direction Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab What s the next turn F5 Next turn F5 Show next turn F6 Displays current location and next turn Displays
391. ng e Syncing Maps Points Routes and Tracks e Tutorial Add a Map to a PN Series GPS e Tutorial Sync Data with a PN Series GPS e Deleting Files from a PN Series GPS T Earthmate GPS Sync DeLorme Topo North America 9 0 I Pawtuckaway NH Date Createt May 20 2010 3 53 PM Last Sync May 25 2070 3 01 PM Last Modified May 25 2070 4 24 Phl F All files on GPS F All files in Topo North America SYNC PREVIEW SYNC PREVIEW 4 File s will be synced 40 File s wall be synced 2 Map Package s will be synced 2 Map Package s will be synced Project Contents ET Soe more detail and make changes GIS Layers Draw Layers and User Raster Data PH o0 Store maps wa geocaches and tracks c drive or an SD card Sto the internal drive PH 40 Store maps on tl drive or an SD card Sto geocaches and tracks c Store routes on the inte GIS layers draw layers and user raster data MrSID and GeoTIFF files can be included in a map package To send a point line or polygon GIS layer a draw layer or user raster data to a PN Series device include it in a map package You can also use the Send GIS Layer button io Import GIS Layer button B export and import GIS points layers including forms between XMap and your device without using the Exchange dialog or including them in a map package For more information see Sending GIS Points and Forms and Importing GIS Points 311 XMap User Guide Syncing Maps Points
392. ng How Your Layers Display on the Map Once you highlight a layer in your workspace you can use the Tools button or right click menu to modify how the layer displays on the map Use the Tools button to e Classify your layer according to the attributes properties of the layer e Symbolize your layer so that you have complete control of how the layer displays on the map e Label your layer by using a formula based on the attributes in the layer e Modify the display properties of a layer e View a legend of the visual characteristics of a layer e Create a buffer around geometries in a layer e Open the Options dialog box to modify the default layer settings Importing a Layer into a Database Not all of the import types listed in this Help topic are available in XMap Professional You can import ESRI shp e00 Maplnfo mif tab AutoCAD dxf dwf dwg Geocode Types asc csv dbf txt mdb xls tab DeLorme draw files anl and DeLorme OpenSpace Transfer Files openspace into a database that you can then query 91 XMap User Guide classify symbolize and label The import process depends on the type of file you are Importing if the file contains spatial reference information if it is a geocode file type etc You can import a new layer import a layer to append to an existing layer or import a layer to replace an existing layer To Import a Layer from a File Use the following steps to import a layer f
393. ng WorkFile 1 Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile 2 Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Delete The workfile is deleted from the WorkFile directory 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The WorkFile is deleted from the WorkFile directory Note The image to which it refers is not deleted Hints for Placing Points Place control points in locations where it is easy to distinguish the same location on both the image and the map For example you might find it helpful to place control points at survey points street intersections or other point features It is also important to remember that the more corresponding control points you place on your image and map the better A large number of control points should only increase the accuracy of your resulting map Note Collinear points should be avoided A small number of points in a line will not produce a good solution See example below To Place Control Points on an Image With Flat Terrain If your image covers relatively flat terrain and or has some distortion the easiest method for registering an image on a map is to find four matching points on the image and the map These four matching points can be on or near the four corners of the image and base map see example to the right Selecting matching points ties the image you are registering to the map and warps it accordingly The resulting map will be the most accurate in areas where the poi
394. nloads the most cost effective way to purchase data is through the Map Library subscription plan This tutorial explains how to download color imagery using your certificate To learn about adding maps from NetLink directly to a an Earthmate PN Series GPS device see the Create Custom Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS tutorial Step 1 Find the area you want to download Center the map on the area for which you want to download imagery and zoom the map in to data zoom level 11 0 or greater Step 2 Activate your certificate 1 Click the NetLink tab and then click the Map Library subtab 2 The first time you open the Map Library subtab The activation screen displays Type your certificate key in the Validation Key box to activate it Note If you bypass this screen you can enter your certificate key when you check out i hap Data Gis Print Find Phone Info NetLink ImageReg Draw Profile 3D Route GFS Voice H a Activate Download Certificate Downie i To use your Data Download certificate type the key inthe Validation Support Key text box and click Activate Key Aff Fi Validation Kev Activate Key Goto Map Library _ MapLibrary Step 3 Select the coverage area Click the Select button and then click inside the grids that cover your area The selected grids are highlighted The blue info box updates to show the size and cost of the download Note This special offer is availabl
395. nnect connection point Notes e The new road must connect to an existing non limited access road for routing to occur on the new road e Each time you intersect an existing road or trail hover the mouse over the road trail to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a connection point before continuing to draw If you draw the line over the road trail without creating a connection point routing cannot occur along the intersection Once you locate the connection point for your new road or trail click the map to place the first point Click point to point or drag to add the new road trail to the draw layer The following information is available as you add each point in your road or trail e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line draw for the new road or trail enter the last point on the map screen and click Done The new road or trail displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road Trail Name text box You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or double clicking while entering the last point of the line Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map You can add lines arcs and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features Use lines to mark boundaries
396. nnotated with the following symbols Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with three or more nodes for example a four way intersection The number on the symbol indicates the number of connections at that node dl as A Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with two other nodes for example a three way intersection z Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with one other node for example a two way intersection D Used for the start or end node of a line that has no connections with other nodes for example a dead end 4h A node and a shape point are coincident 3 Move your cursor over the shape point you want to edit 4 Drag the point you want to edit to the new position To Delete Points in a Polygon Line Layer 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the polygon line layer you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Points tool n on the toolbar and select a geometry The shape points in the geometry display as white squares outlined in black 3 Click each shape point or drag and select multiple shape points The selected points have pink highlighted lined around them 4 Press the DELETE key on your keyboard or right click the selection and click Delete Point Notes 110 When you click the Edit Points tool s on the toolbar the default map mode which provides several right click features when you click the map is disa
397. ns is floating point then the 145 XMap User Guide numeric_expression numeric_expression numeric_expression integer_ expression string expression amp string expression Q expression expression lt gt expression lt gt expression lt expression lt expression lt expression lt expression gt expression gt expression expression gt expression Datepart Specifiers result type is floating point otherwise the result type is integer Returns the result of dividing one number by another If either of the expressions is floating point then the result type is floating point otherwise the result type Is integer Returns the remainder of dividing one number by an integer If the first expression is floating point then the result type is floating point otherwise the result type is integer Returns the concatenation of two strings The result type is a string Returns TRUE if the two expressions are equal and FALSE otherwise is synonymous with the EQUALS operator The result type is logical expression Returns TRUE if the two expressions are not equal and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical_ expression Returns TRUE if the first expression Is less than or equal to the second expression and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical_ expression Returns TRUE if the first expression is less than the second expression and FALSE otherwise The result type i
398. ns vary depending on the data type Range constraint Type the maximum and minimum values in the boxes String length constraint Type the maximum and minimum values in the boxes Value constraint Type a value in the Enter Values box and click Add You can enter up to 20 values To move a value in the list click it and use the up and down arrows You can paste values from your computer s clipboard To delete a value click it and then select Delete To set an initial value for the field type it in the Initial Value box For a document to set a default initial document click the Browse button and browse to the document s location The initial value affects only new geometries that you add and not existing geometries in the layer Click OK To Edit a Field in a Layer Use the following steps to edit fields that were added to a layer 140 Working With GIS 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace tab 3 Highlight the layer that contains the field you want to edit 4 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button 5 Click the row for the field you want to edit to highlight it and then right click and select Edit Field The Edit Constrained Field dialog opens for simple or constrained fields The Edit Formula Field dialog opens for formula fields 6 Make the changes see step 5 in the To Add a Field to a Layer section above Deleting a Field from a Layer This Help topic describes features
399. nterest Such as truck stop gas station restaurant etc in the Keywords text box Type the distance within which you want to search for the POI To find POIs along the route select the Along Current Route option Then click Search You may be prompted to select which route you want to search within and or to select from a group of general POI categories 185 XMap User Guide Name POls to Search and then cick Search Keywords restauran aes radar i nai seeren fosni SS Advanced MapTags V Book Resuts C From Map Center Along Current Route Step 3 Add results to the map ko ne The search results display in the Find tab To view the results on the map hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click to select each of the search results Then right click the results you highlighted point to Add and click Add MapNote ARRA ie rer pa Da B i shen a i QuickSearch 7 POI results for EE POls MecDonait s restaurant 10 mi GPS Radar E Se a pice New Search McDonakis Resturants McDonakls Restaurant aa iml u E Mh i z Wi Fast Fo 186 Finding a Location on the Map 5i Bice E EE m Cy _ Ke ft AN Cai t Fe Tae TA AMA FERRET sone ea io MENE BRT _ MicDonald s of Aurore Z a Step 4 Add more POIs Repeat the steps for each point of interest you want to search for along your route Finding a Symbol by its
400. nterprise Several right click options are available in the Design View when you right click inside the attributes table The available options depend on the type of field you right click Right click a row in the table and then e Click Check All to select the Visible check box for all attribute records e Click Clear All to clear the Visible check box for all attribute records e Click Edit Field to open a dialog box where you can edit the attribute field e Click Recalculate Formula to update the formula calculation e Click Delete Field to delete the attribute field Forms Forms Overview This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise A database created with XMap GIS Enterprise is required to use XMap Forms in XMap Professional XMap Editor can create forms locally but cannot share them with other XMap users The functions available in a form depend on the permissions set by the database and by the form itself What is XMap Forms Use XMap Forms with XMap to create electronic forms that make it easy to automate field data collection with a PN Series GPS or laptop and to simplify viewing and editing GIS objects on your desktop alongside your map When you synchronize the edited layers with an Enterprise database it updates the database attributes You can even embed documents such as text files images spreadsheets and more within a form XMap Forms are
401. nts When you create a transfer file with hyperlinked files you have the option of saving the common directory structure of the hyperlinked files Saving the directory structure of common files can be 62 Using Projects Map Data helpful when you are sharing and updating transfer files Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data To Create a Transfer File Use the following steps to create a transfer file L 2 SP Click the Map Data tab Open the project you want to create as a transfer file Click File click Transfer and then click Create The Create Transfer File dialog box opens In the File Name text box type the file name Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Click Create Your file is created and saved in the specified location To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files you can select to maintain part of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive location Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Open the project you want to create as a transfer file 3 Click File click Transfer and then click Create The following dialog box opens 63 XMap User Guide Select Hyperlinked Files 64 lv H Sy Vacation Spots 10 Verify the Include Hyperlin
402. nts were more closely matched Note If your image covers a large area you may want to add some matching points in the center of the image and map To Place Control Points on a Distorted I mage and or an I mage With Varied Terrain 250 If your image is distorted or covers terrain with varied elevation the best method for registering your image to the map is to have control points distributed evenly around the image and the map see example to the right Note For this method it is preferable but not essential for the points to be evenly spaced Registering Images 251 Profiling Linear Objects Creating a Profile You can use the Profile tab to create elevation graphs of linear objects on the map Linear objects can be part of the map or part of a draw layer A linear object is profiled from one end of the line to the other The profile includes statistical data you can determine which available data you want to display You can also create a profile that includes user data from some athletic devices from Timex and Suunto The list below includes samples of map features and draw objects that you can profile Routes created using the Route e Streams tap e Tracks created using the Draw tab or imported from a Trails GPS device Roads e Lines created using the Draw tab Boundaries e Arcs created using the Draw tab Railroads e Splines created using the Draw tab Power lines e Measure Lines created with t
403. o maps within DeLorme mapping programs The symbols created are 24 x 24 pixels New and edited symbols are saved within a symbol set dim file and can contain up to 250 symbols Symbol set files are located at C DeLorme Docs Symbols The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for your DeLorme mapping program Click an area on the diagram below to view information on the various parts of the dialog box Tip To close the pop up information box that displays when you click the diagram click outside the image or click another part of the image 234 Using the Draw Tools DeLorme ASym DeLormeStockSymbols system symbols Symbol Set Mame DeLormestacksymbols Symbols in Set F 1 KO tm AR SPT PR He Remove Edit mbol RB cu Symbol Mame Red Flag Cursor Position 0 0 Transparency Be Seeeeeeeeee A Transparent Transparent C Opaque Color Anchor Seee000008 3 Position 7 20 Center Anchor GPS Waypoint ID E pi DRK Cancel Opening a Symbol Set Open an existing symbol set dim to add new symbols or edit existing ones To Open a Symbol Set Use the following steps to open a symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens
404. o point to and label a specific area on the map See Map Notes for more information Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map Use the Image tool to add edit or place omp jpg and gif images on the map To Add a Point Object to the Map Add a MapNote text label or symbol From the Draw tab 1 Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select the tool you want Then select the font style size and color for your point object s label from the text style options 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box opens 231 XMap User Guide 232 3 Notes Optional Click the Hyperlink button al and browse to the document you want to link your point object to Then click the file name and click Open The address appears in the URL field Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences You can also add a MapNote by right clicking the map on the point you want to label pointing to Add MapNote and then selecting a MapNote option Add a waypoint From the Draw tab
405. ociated with 4 Click Delete in the Draw display area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard The point is deleted as well as the line segment within the draw object that was associated with that point Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button 5 to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button Ei Labeling a Draw Object You can label any draw object Once you label a draw object you can search for it using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in any of the routing fields in the Route tab 222 Using the Draw Tools Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Label a Draw Object See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects For this Draw Object Use this labeling procedure Routable Roads Type the name of the street trail in the text box available in Routable Trails the Draw dialog area Arcs Place the object on the map Circles Using the Select tool he click the draw object once Lines A gray box displays around the draw object Polygons Click the draw object again A text box displays Rectangles Type the label name in the text box and then press the Splines ENTER key on your keyboard Tracks Waypoints Images P
406. of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Ideally the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Paste a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym 1 Click the Draw tab O T M 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PB 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Open a bitmap in another image editing program and select the bitmap or a part of the bitmap you want to copy Press CTRL C on your keyboard to copy the selection to the clipboard 7 Click the Paste button Ce under Edit Symbol The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below 8 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 9 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 10 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to i
407. of attribute values into equal sized sub ranges e Natural Break dentifies breakpoints among groups using the J enk s Optimization statistical formula and finds groupings and patterns inherent in the data e Quantile Divides the range of attribute values so that each group contains the same number of records in the classification field e Standard Deviation Measures the difference between a single record and the average of all of the records in the layer e Maximum Break dentifies large gaps between groups and finds groupings and patterns inherent in the data 119 XMap User Guide 10 11 12 13 e Custom Lets you manually update the classification boundaries of any of the other methods Note Minimum and maximum range values cannot overlap If you selected Standard Deviation in step 9 from the Classes drop down list select the number of standard deviations you want to use OR If you did not select Standard Deviation in step 9 in the Classes text box type how many classes you want to set in the range method From the Round At drop down list select the decimal place to which you want to round your range From the Vary By drop down list select how you want to vary your ranges options vary based on layer type Note The Custom option is used for classifications that do not follow a set scheme or pattern and are customized by the user If you change the symbolization of a class in an existing classification the
408. of license acquires no rights that are not specifically set forth in the License Agreement included in the documentation U S Government Rights in Commercial Software Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7203 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Copyright 2009 DeLorme Curl License Copyright 1996 2009 Daniel Stenberg lt daniel haxx se gt All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM 343 XMap User Guide DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
409. og box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Click File and then click I mport The Import Scheme File dialog box opens 4 Browse to the location where you saved the keyscheme file select it and then click Open The imported file is now your active scheme Exporting a Custom Scheme You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Export a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to export a custom scheme 52 Using Keyboard Shortcuts 1 Click the Options button c E on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop down list 4 Click File and then click Export The Export Scheme File dialog box opens 5 Type a name in the File Name text box browse to the location where you want to save the keyscheme file and then click Save Searching For Commands n The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets you search for a specific command or command group Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut To Search For a Command or Command Group Use the following steps to search for a command or command group 1 Click the Options button E ERE on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options too
410. og box Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book Once you successfully create an address book you can delete the contact information at any time To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click the record you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion 6 Click Done Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Deleting Your Entire Address Book Once you have created an address book you can delete the records it contains one at a time or all at once To Delete an Entire Address Book Use the following steps to delete an entire address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button ai The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Clear All A confirmation message displays 4 Click OK to delete the address book 5 Click Done Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Exporting Your Address Book You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in the Address Book dialog box Exported address books are in DeLorme Address B
411. oid 276 Routing _ fgarianne ee Add Maphote Edit Draw Object Copy Map to Clipboard Edit Draw Object Text Eind Travel POIs Delete Draw Object eate E Seek Ei Tae lowa Step 4 View the new route The route automatically recalculates the best way to your destination avoiding the specified area Note Ifthe route does not automatically recalculate the Auto check box in the Route tab is not selected 2 7 XMap User Guide S Ar 4 Grigies a f Ih f Fi Gahanna ort cilumbus Intl w ap 8 Blacklick Estates j J Saving Route Directions as Text You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file To Save Your Route Directions Use the following steps to save your directions 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab If you do not have a route in this project the Route Options are unavailable 2 Select the route you want to save from the Name drop down list If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop down list you may not have the correct project open 3 Under Options select Directions or Along the Way 4 Click the Save button Hl on the Route tab 5 To rename the txt file type the new name in the File Name text box and click Save Setting Your Routing Preferences Once you master basic routing you can customize your routing preferences and create more advanced routes e
412. oid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points For more information see your device manual Click Send to Device Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device Click Finish To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device L 2A Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiverthird party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual Click the Sync button on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object drop down list Click Next 325 XMap User Guide 8 From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device 9 Designate a route name and or a route number for the file on the device device dependent 10 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points For more information see your de
413. ol is placed Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape or allow you to snap one object to another object Points display and act in different ways within the various draw objects Click a link below to view additional information e Points in Routable Roads Routable Trails Tracks Lines Splines and Polygons Draw objects such as routable roads routable trails tracks lines splines and polygons consist of shape points and end points e Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object They give the object its shape When you select a draw object on the map Shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares The line object below was drawn with the spline tool e End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line spline or polygon e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment 200 Using the Draw Tools Notes When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available when using the Polygon or Line tool and selected it displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line
414. olization each row in the table displays each of the classes in the layer Each column in the table indicates This Displays Column Field The minimum and maximum or unique values of each class name Feature The current visual property for each class Legend Label The current label for each class The Null Class indicates any object for which the attribute value falls out of the classification The Highlight Features label lets you visually identify which gt records have been queried The field you chose while classifying the layer displays each of the features for that layer Each of the features are selected by default to show on the map Click the feature for which you want to change the properties e To change the opacity of the color of your feature from the Opacity drop down list select Opaque 0 transparent Transparent 100 transparent Blended 50 transparent or XOR combination of the source and background pixels most useful when records with the same symbolization overlap e To change the line color of your feature click the Color button and select a standard or custom line color Then select a line width from the Width drop down list and a line style from the Style drop down list e To change the outline color of your feature click the Outline Color button and select a standard line color or create a custom line color Then select how wide you want your outline to display from t
415. ological line layer the start and end nodes are annotated with the following symbols Working With GIS Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with three or more nodes for example a four way intersection The number on the symbol indicates the number of connections at that node Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with two other nodes for example a three way intersection n Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with one other node for example a two way intersection Used for the start or end node of a line that has no connections with other nodes for example a dead end ug A node and a shape point are coincident OR To add polygons to a polygon layer click the Draw Polygon tool R on the toolbar and then click the map to enter each point of the polygon To finish the polygon double click the last point of the polygon Notes To return to the default map mode click the Navigation tool on the toolbar While adding polygon or line geometries you can disable snapping by holding the ALT key on your keyboard To enable the measurement information box which can display on the map when adding geometries hold the SHIFT key while you draw To undo your last action click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo your last action click the Redo button bad To save all of the changes you make to a layer click the Manual Commit Mode tool 2 5
416. ols button and then click Label The Label Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Label The Label Layer dialog box opens Type any text you want to display in the label in the Label Formula text box Optional Under Label Columns select a column header from the file to add as a label Then click the right arrow button gt to move the header to the label area Repeat this step for each column header you want to include in the label As you add headers to the label area the Label Formula updates and shows an example of what the label will look like Note You can click Clear to clear the selections you made in steps 5 and 6 Optional To reorder how the label displays select the column under Selected ale Columns you want to move and then click the up arrow to move the column a near at the beginning of the label or click the down arrow 4 to move the column near at the end of the label Click OK Once you have modified the font properties of labels the text may appear cluttered on the map If this is the case ensure the Declutter Text check box is selected in the Symbolize Layer dialog box To create a multi line label type n between the segments of the label that you want to separate in the Label Formula text box Attributes Datasheet View Editing the Attributes of a Layer 131 XMap User Guide This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterpri
417. om in step 5 you can customize the contour display by choosing the distance in feet or meters between contours and how many minor unlabeled contour lines for every major labeled contour line e For a given range of data zoom levels type the distance in feet or meters between contour lines for those data zoom levels e Type the number of minor lines for each major line For example type 0 to label every contour line or type 2 to label every third contour line Note Labels display only on major lines beginning at the zoom level that you specified step 6 e Click Add Change to update the contour rules list OR Click Reset to reset the settings to what displayed when you first launched the dialog box OR Click Use Defaults to use the default values to display contours and labels Click Next Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab marker to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Click Next Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your point properties Click Finish The Contour Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Notes e The contour property changes are only made in the current project You must Save your project to retain the property changes e Selecting Custom changes the Interval section in the Control Panel to read Custom Changing Coordinate Grid Pro
418. om the old location we strongly recommend that you migrate your files If you do not you could have project data in two DeLorme Docs locations your project will work correctly but your data will not all be in the same location 55 XMap User Guide Project Migration When you migrate a project all associated files routes draw layers and connections to GIS layers in a database are moved with it To Manually Migrate a Project Use the following steps to migrate a project at any time 1 Click the arrow next to the Open button on the toolbar and then click Migrate Project OR Click the Map Data tab click File and then click Migrate Project The Migrate Project dialog box opens 2 Browse to the project you want to migrate click the project and then click Migrate 3 The Migration Completed dialog box opens Go to step 5 OR If a file with the same name already exists in the new DeLorme Docs location the Confirm Link to Existing File dialog box opens Go to step 4 4 Click Link to replace the project link to the existing file in the new location and then go to step 5 OR Click Link All to replace any project links to existing files in the new location and then go to step 5 OR Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it with a different name OR Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration that has occurred up to this point 5 Inthe Migration Comple
419. on e filter name of the query being referenced OR filterid identification number of the query in the database being referenced e attributes the name of the attribute column to include in the exported layer Note If this parameter is left blank all attribute columns will be exported e relax polygon yes no When no default value polygons may be restructured when exporting a shapefile to ensure they conform to the shapefile standard if the restructuring fails the polygon is excluded When yes all polygons are exported without being restructured To send the results of a command to a logfile type gt path filename log 2 gt 1 at the end of the command Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear in the command line If no path is specified the logfile will be created in the default target directory Managing Layers in Your Workspace Workspace Overview Some of the features that are introduced in this topic are not included in XMap Professional The Workspace subtab is the primary area for using the GIS tab You can use the Workspace subtab to manage and analyze layers in your databases as well as manage the databases themselves What is a Layer A layer consists of geometries points lines or polygons that have corresponding attribute records and contain information that describes the properties of the geometries In the GIS 90 Working With GIS tab a layer is considered to be the contents of
420. on Each satellite is color coded based on the quality of data it is transmitting Gray ndicates the satellite s position in the sky 293 XMap User Guide Red Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is not receiving data from it Yellow DeLorme GPS receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite eohemeris data is available but the satellite is not being used for navigation Green ndicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available and the satellite is being used for navigation Dark Green WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available the satellite is being used for navigation and the satellite has DGPS and WAAS corrections available Blue WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates a WAAS satellite used for corrections Viewing Sun and Moon Information You can use the Sun Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the rising and setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date time and location To View Sun and Moon Information Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab Click the GPS tab Click the Sun Moon subtab Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date Use the scroll arrows to change the time After you update the date and time you can view e The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with
421. on snapping a draw object to another draw object see Snapping Draw Objects Points in Point Draw Objects Point objects such as waypoints symbols and text do not have shape or end points Text label objects contain a point at the bottom center of the text label box and are only visible during a snap Points in MapNotes MapNotes do not have shape or end points They contain an anchor point at the end of the text box Clicking the MapNote displays a central crosshair at the anchor point Viewing Hidden Draw Tools The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads trails waypoints tracks lines straight lines arcs and splines shapes polygons rectangles and circles MapNotes text labels images and symbols to a draw file Some of these tools are hidden tools available in pull out menus To View the Hidden Draw Tools Five draw tool options have pull out menus with hidden tools These draw tools each have a Small arrow at the bottom right of the draw tool button as shown in this sample ej Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one of the options Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option a j Routable Road Routable Trail Tool DF Waypoints Tracks Tool Line Arc Spline Tool P a w j e Polygon Rectangle Circle Tool 203 XMap User Guide MapNote Text Label Symbol mage Tool u T e
422. on the corners sides of the graphic Reposition the North Arrow at any time by dragging the graphic to the new position To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map 1 2 3 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Scale Bar tool f All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right Select the check box to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select the Scale Bar style AND OR Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map AND OR Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the scale reference length on the map AND OR Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the map Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the Scale Bar on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the graphic To Add an Image to Your Map 169 XMap User Guide Use the following steps to add an image to your map L 2 8 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidd
423. onnect your device to your computer 326 oS oe 11 12 L3 Using Third party GPS Devices If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual Click the Sync button on the toolbar Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object drop down list Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File drop down list To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points For more information see your device manual Click Send to Device Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device Click Finish Receiving a Route Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive routes created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route Use the following steps to receive a route from your device L 2 12 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third
424. ook binary 197 XMap User Guide format dab or comma separated file csv format Latitude and longitude values are not exported To Export Your Address Book Use the following steps to export your address book L 2 n 198 Click the Find tab Click the Address Book button M The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens Click Export The Save As dialog box opens Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book file Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box Select DeLorme Address Book dab or Comma separated File csv from the Save as Type drop down list DeLorme Address Book files retain all of their information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme programs Comma separated files do not contain coordinate information You can view text files in third party applications such as Microsoft Excel Click Save Click OK to acknowledge the export location Click Done The address book has a 200 record limit You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Using the Draw Tools Draw Overview You can add draw objects such as routable roads routable trails waypoints tracks text symbols MapNotes images lines arcs splines circles polygons and rectangles to your map with the tools provided in the Draw tab You can save draw objects in a single draw file or in multipl
425. oom level 10 0 or greater One Ways One ways display as bright green triangles on roads pointing toward the direction of travel most noticeable in large cities They are available at data zoom level 13 0 or greater Places Minor View smaller towns suburbs locales and natural features Zoom levels vary Roads Minor View secondary roads local and rural routes trails and railroads Zoom levels vary Points of Interest e Major View many different points of interest including recreational areas public safety rest areas and more e Minor View general points of interest including educational technology government and religious buildings locations e Business Major View many different travel related points of interest including hospitals camping restaurants and more e Business Minor View general points of interest including small Shops and food stores laundromats and golfing Z P Postal Codes ZIP Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom level 8 0 and greater with Z P Postal Code labels displaying at data zoom level 10 0 and greater Town Borders e View town borders at data zoom level 10 0 and greater for the following states Arkansas Louisiana Mississippi North Vermont Connecticut Maine Missouri Carolina Virginia Illinois Maryland Nebraska North Washington Indiana Massachusetts New Dakota DC Enea Minimecata New Pennsylvania Virginia Jersey Rhode Wisconsin New York Island South Da
426. oom level 12 w e Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 1 E m ail F Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom level 12 Restaurants general Restaurants specialty Small City s State Capital Unique Natural Feature at data zoom level 8 De E Ea Line Features Topo Street Description Colors B County Boundary 26 Dam 7 come wanagenene Dai 9 tmernavonal Boundary sones OoOO S eme ooo owen ooo S runway smesom SSS Developed Boat Ramp at data zoom levels 11 and 12 Map Legend Hunting at data zoom level 13 2 Using the Toolbar Showing Hiding Toolbar Options You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most You can also activate toolbar options that are not turned on by default or hide or show the entire toolbar Some toolbar options are grouped for these you can show or hide the group of buttons To Modify the Toolbar 1 Right click the toolbar Toolbar options with a selected check box next to them are displayed on the toolbar 2 Click an item to activate or inactivate it in the toolbar Reordering the Toolbar Options To reposition the toolbar groups horizontally or vertically just drag the dotted vertical bar i that separates each group to the new location left right up or down To Create New Projects 28 Using the Toolbar To create a new project click the New button on the toolbar If you made changes
427. oordinate Systems Type xmapimport list coordinate systems to see a list of Supported coordinate systems All files are converted to the Latitude Longitude coordinate system with the World Geodetic System datum during import Note that the list of supported coordinate systems is for spatial file types that do not contain Spatial reference information For spatial file types that do contain spatial reference information the XMap Import Command Prompt is able to convert from a much larger library of coordinate systems Viewing a List of Supported Datums Type xmapimport list datums to see a list of supported datums Note that the list of supported coordinate systems is for spatial file types that do not contain Spatial reference information For spatial file types that do contain spatial reference information the XMap Import Command Prompt is able to convert from a much larger library of coordinate systems Viewing a List of State Plane Zones Type xmapimport list spcs zones to see a list of the state plane coordinate system zones Bulk Exporting This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise XMap includes a utility that allows you to export one layer at a time from potentially different OpenSpace databases to one of the supported file formats at one time through user created batch files bat or cmd You can also export individual layers either through manual entry of the
428. ote If the project has not been migrated to the new DeLorme Docs location you will be prompted to migrate it Click Migrate to create a copy of the file in the new DeLorme Docs location Click No to cancel For more information about migrating projects see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location Saving a Project Use the Map Data tab to save each of your projects quickly and easily using one of the following methods 60 e Click File and then click Save or click the Save button Hl o Ifyou have not saved the project before the Save File dialog box opens Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save o Ifyou have saved the project before the Save dialog box opens All of the changes made to the current project display as a check list Select the check box next to each change you want to save and clear the check box next to each change you do not want to save Click Yes to save the selected changes Using Projects Map Data click No to save the file without the changes or click Cancel to cancel the Saving process e Click File and then click Save As The Save File dialog box opens Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save You can also click the Save button AL the toolbar Adding Removing Files in a Project As you create new GIS layers routes draw layers and so on or need to add more datasets to the Map Data tab they are added to the current project To Add Files to a Project Use th
429. ou can view the following information e The layer name right click and then click Rename to edit double click to center the map on the layer e The layer ID LayerlD e The database in which the layer is stored e The server on which the database resides 100 Working With GIS e The date on which the layer was last updated e The date on which the layer was created e The Z level display order of the layer e The map on which the layer displays primary secondary or both double click to edit e The layer type point line or polygon e The minimum data zoom level at which that layer displays on the map double click to edit e The maximum data zoom level at which the layer displays on the map double click to edit e The geometry shape spherical planar topological line layers only geocode unregistered or redline e The database version used for the layer 408 represents an XMap 7 XMap 8 database 401 represents an XMap 6 database 400 represents an XMap 5 database e The user s role for the database e The number of geometries in the layer e The active classification for the layer double click to edit the classification available only when a classification has been created for the layer If any of the columns do not display right click the table heading in the Workspace subtab and click the column name you want to view To show hide a column from the table right click the table heading and click the colu
430. ou may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT 352 Legal Information MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goo
431. ou must save your project to retain the property changes Changing USGS Quad Line Connection Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as USGS quad line connections rasters vectors shaded relief contours points etc Note You must select to show USGS quadrangle coverage in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the USGS quad line connection properties on the map See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing hiding USGS quadrangle coverage To Change USGS Quad Line Connection Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of USGS quad line connections L 2 70 Click the Map Data tab Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties Click the plus sign next to the sub data category Highlight USGS Quad Lines click Data and then click Properties The USGS Quad Line Connection Properties dialog box opens OR Right click USGS Quad Lines and click Properties The USGS Quad Line Connection Properties dialog box opens Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Click Next Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your USGS quad line connec
432. our anchor The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text to the right of the Anchor Position button The large cross hair in the Symbol Editing Grid moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor position To Center the Anchor Position Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol Editing Grid Cursor Position Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square Each of these pixels is represented in the Symbol Editing Grid When you move your cursor over the Symbol Editing Grid the cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the Cursor Position text next to the Image Preview as shown below Image Preview and Cursor Position m Cursor Position 16 14 As you move the cursor over the grid the numbers update according to where you are in the 24 x 24 grid The first number in the above sample 16 refers to the number of pixels across the X coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero The second number 14 refers to the number of pixels down the Y coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero 245 Registering Images ImageReg Overview Use the ImageReg tab to register an image to a base map by adding corresponding control points on the image and the map Once these control points are then pinned to the map the ImageReg tab transforms all points from the image to the map using a user se
433. our current map screen See the Print tab for more printing options e Quick print with the current Print tab settings Project e Create save and or open projects You can also access these options on the Map Data tab Redline Synchronization Tools Available when an active subscription exists See To Use the GIS Tools Route e Set route start finish and stop and via points and calculate a route You can also access these options from the Route tab Undo Redo e Undo redo your last GIS edit and measure tool actions 23 Map Legend Map Legend The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which map colors you chose on the Display tab of the Options dialog box The tables below show the symbolization of each feature by map color Notes e Not all features are available at all zoom levels e Not all features are available in all datasets e High contrast Color features display the same as Street Color features except for land which displays as black Routable Trail Features Topo Street Description Colors Colors Major Trail National Scenic National Historic etc pee 4 wheel Drive Trail pa Trail Walkway Foot Trail Important Some trails may cross private property Contact the applicable trail department to ensure you have the appropriate permissions before following a major trail For contact information see Recreational Contacts Routable Road Features E interstate H
434. out a measurement line right click it and click Info The measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab To Measure Distance or Area Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map 1 Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Units of Measure Preferences 2 On the toolbar click the Measure tool Guu The pointer changes to T 3 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate 4 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line OR Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure tool on the toolbar The measure line is a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line is displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line 5 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The closure area is transparently shaded and the area and perimeter measurements display Searching Tips 19 X
435. outing dataset Click Data and then click Set as Routing Data The routing data is updated and the routing icon He displays next to the dataset highlighted in step 2 OR Right click the selected dataset and click Set as Routing Data The routing data is updated and the routing icon He displays next to the dataset highlighted in step 2 Using Projects Map Data Viewing Data from NetLink When you use NetLink to download imagery and data the dataset is automatically listed as base data Downloaded imagery is saved by default in saved in C DeLorme Docs Downloads If you purchased a DVD you can add your imagery and data to your current and future projects by adding it as base data Note Not all data displays at all data zoom levels To View Imagery Use the following steps to view imagery 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Primary Map and or Secondary Map depending on the map window you want to use to view the dataset click the plus sign next to the dataset 3 Double click the file name The imagery displays on the map s ADP Data If you have an ADP Aerial Data Packet dataset from a previous version of a DeLorme application you still have access to it To Designate Which ADP Layer Displays on the Map Once the dataset Is listed in the Map Data tab you can designate which layer you want to display on the map For example an ADP dataset may consist of DOQQ data and Sat 10 data If you select both of these th
436. ove the graph See User Profile Data for more information about viewing and managing this data 6 View the current statistical information options you have selected to the right of the profile graph See Statistical Data for more information about adding removing and reordering the statistics Terr Dist 3 6 mi Climb Dist 3 17 mi Desc Dist 2571 0 ft Desc Elev 762 Tt Lin Dist 3 5 mi Eley Gain 1 230 9 ft e You can also profile an object or route on the map by right clicking the item and then clicking Profile e To view your object s profile in the opposite direction click the Reverse button kK The profile order flips horizontally e The profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile e Double click a location on the profile graph to center the map on the location without changing the data zoom level OR Right click the place on the graph you want to see on the map and click Go To To View the Overview Profile Graph S Use the following steps to view the overview profile graph 1 Click More _ Mores The overview profile graph displays at the bottom of the screen it is a smaller version of the main profile graph 2 To zoom in to a specific part of the profile place the cursor over one of the horizontal bars on either side of the overview profile graph When the pointer changes to a horizontal arrow drag the bar towards the center of the overview profile graph e When you move
437. p To show a feature that is currently disabled select the feature and then select the Show Feature check box under Line Feature OR To hide a feature select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box under Line Feature The feature displays as Disabled in the Symbolization dialog box To hide multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box To hide a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the first and last records in the block To select multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you select each feature To select a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you select the first and last records in the block To select all features press CTRL A Symbolizing a Polygon Layer Use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to modify the layer s color text and outline properties or select to show hide certain features To Change the Color Outline Label Properties of a Polygon Layer Use the following steps to change the color outline label properties of a feature in a polygon layer L 2 3 4 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Select highlight the layer you want to symbolize To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box Click the layer icon next to the layer name OR Click the Tools button and then click Symbolize The
438. p down list to select a new symbol Note To add a new symbol set click the Add button and then use the dialog box to add a new symbol set The symbol set must contain dim or omp symbols bmp symbols do not scale well e To change the color of your symbol click the Color button and select a standard fill color or create a custom fill color e To change the size of your symbol select a size from the Size drop down list To change the properties of your label Ensure the Show Label check box is selected and then e Select a different font from the Font drop down list e To change the font style click the Bold button B I talic button z or f U a Underline button You can also click More Styles for additional font style options e To change the font color click the Font Color button and select a standard line color or create a custom line color e To change the font size select a size from the Size drop down list e To hide the label on the map clear the Show Label check box Tip Once you modify the font properties of your labels the text may appear cluttered on the map If this is the case ensure the Declutter Text check box is selected 7 Click OK Changing How Query Results Display in the Attributes Subtab This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The Query subtab contains an Attributes Effect feature that lets you change how query results display in
439. p generated fields because they are maintained by XMap These fields are automatically updated when a geometry is edited When editing dates ensure the date is between 1 1 1753 and 12 31 9999 If you have a date that is outside of these parameters change your date value to a string value in the source database Geocoded point layers have special properties that may significantly alter the layer when edited You can embed documents in or link URLs to attributes if the attribute type allows To edit multiple records press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to select the records Then hold the ALT key on the keyboard while you double click within the row you want to edit Make the change and then press ENTER Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to apply the edit to all of the selections Click a heading in the Datasheet View to sort the contents of the layer by that heading You cannot sort document fields To change the size of a column in the Datasheet View drag the bar to the right of Working With GIS the heading name to the new column size To view the history of changes made against each geometry in a layer click the Ext Sets button and then click Show Extended Sets a secondary table opens below the primary table and displays the changes Use the arrow keys or the TAB key to move through the cells in the table Press the ESC key on your keyboard to cancel the editing process Embedding a Document in an Attribut
440. p of the list Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map select it and then click Go To or double click it A yellow MapTag displays at the location if the MapTags check box is selected Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book Entry preview a result on the Handheld Export tab or assign it a start stop or finish in a route Just right click a search result and click the option The program keeps a history of your search words during a session If you want to delete your Advanced search history click the QuickSearch subtab and select Clear History from the Search For drop down list Then click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs Performing a POI Search The POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking for You can search over four million places of interest including Wal Mart stores post offices hospitals and much more e Some POIs contain extended information such as website l
441. pNotes A new draw layer called MapNotes is created in your project To Move a MapTag You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point you can move only the text area Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area 1 Use the Find tab search for a place street address coordinate category item or street intersection MapTags are placed on the map at each point you locate 2 Click the Select tool heel 3 Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the position on the map where you want it The anchor point does not move 4 Click the Select tool again to resume normal map operations To Hide MapTags The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map e MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box is selected e MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared Select the MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags To Delete MapTags You can delete one several or all MapTags To delete MapTags from the Find tab 191 XMap User Guide e To delete one MapTag click the Select tool he click the MapTag click the Delete Tag tool and click the Select tool again OR Right click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag To delete several MapTags click the Select tool bel hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking the MapTags click the Delete Tag ka tool and click the Select tool again To delete all Map
442. perties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as coordinate grids rasters vectors shaded relief contours points and so You must select to show grids in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the coordinate grid properties on the map See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing hiding grids To Change Coordinate Grid Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of coordinate grids Click the Map Data tab Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 69 XMap User Guide Click the plus sign next to the sub data category Highlight Grid Lines click Data and then click Properties The Coordinate Grid Properties dialog box opens OR Right click Grid Lines and click Properties The Coordinate Grid Properties dialog box opens Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Click Next Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your coordinate grid properties Click Finish The Coordinate Grid Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The coordinate grid property changes are made only in the current project Y
443. phic to the new position e Click anywhere on the square map in the Rotate graphic to move the map in that direction e Click a directional letter N S W or E to rotate the map in that direction 261 XMap User Guide 4 Tips e Click the brown area that surrounds the square map to rotate the map in that direction Use the Pitch controls to change the pitch of the 3 D map The pitch range depends on the terrain 90 looks straight up 90 looks straight down and 0 is horizontal You can control the pitch using one of the following methods e Press and hold the up arrow to increase the pitch e Press and hold the down arrow to decrease the pitch e Drag the reference arrow to the new pitch e Click anywhere on the graphic to update the pitch If you selected the Outside looking in perspective you can adjust the distance from the map center using the Distance up down buttons by clicking the Distance graphic at the distance you want or by dragging the numeric distance display in the Distance graphic OR If you selected the Inside looking out perspective you can adjust the elevation of the view over the 3 D map using the Elevation up down buttons by clicking the Elevation graphic at the elevation or by dragging the numeric elevation display in the Elevation graphic Note Elevation indicates the height above terrain not the height above sea level To pan the 3 D map and simulate a fly over drag the circle in the Pan grap
444. plines the resulting joined object is a spline 3 Right click point to Manage Draw and then click Join Lines OR Join the lines by pressing CTRL J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the joining function The selected lines are joined Note Any other objects selected during the multi select process are ignored To Break Use the following steps to break linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and select the line object you want to break e A box displays around the active line e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares 3 Click the shape point where you want to break the line right click point to Manage Draw and then click Break Line OR Break the line by pressing CTRL B or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the breaking function The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit each line separately Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively If you pan the 228 Using the Draw Tools map use another tab and so on between steps you may need to repeat the steps again to break your linear object Circles Rectangles and Polygons Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can add area objects circles rectangles and polygons to a draw file in your current project Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects e Use circles to desi
445. port The Browse for Folder dialog box opens 5 Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files The default location is C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files Transfer files have dmt extensions 6 Click OK The imported project opens in the map view E mailing a Transfer File You can package a project and its contents into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data To E mail a Transfer File This procedure creates an attachment file but does not permanently save a file to C DeLorme Docs Projects Use the following steps to e mail a transfer file 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Open the project you want to e mail as a transfer file 65 XMap User Guide 3 Click File click Transfer and then click E mail A transfer file is created and your computer s default operating system e mail program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment 4 Complete the e mail in accordance with your e mail program Changing the Properties of Your Data Changing the Properties in Your Data Overview You can adjust the properties of some data categories to accommodate your needs For example you can adjust the shaded relief properties to account for the sun shining in a different direction have contours display at varying densities at particular zoom levels etc Each dataset contains its own sub categories of data raster vector
446. provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Autodesk Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Autodesk Inc AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL Autodesk Inc OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 344 Legal Information Boost License Boost Software License Version 1 0 August 17th 2003 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person or organiza
447. ps to view a profile graph 1 Create a profile of an object or route For more information see Creating a Profile 2 Move your cursor along the elevation profile in the profile graph e The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the terrain profile These lines indicate the height and distance of the particular location as you move along the graph e As you move your cursor along the graph an info box provides statistical data about the profile such as coordinates elevation grade and so on See Statistical Data for more information about this data If you downloaded an object with supported profile data the info box may also include additional data for example speed See User Profile Data for more information e As you move your cursor along the profile graph a small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map Click the More button near the bottom of the tab area to expand the view Optional To generate a profile from a route you have created select the Show Text check box to view route numbers road names waypoint numbers and their associated waypoint names 253 XMap User Guide Notes The route displays in the profile graph with small markers indicating the start and finish for the route as well as any waypoints it contains 5 Optional If the profile object contains additional supported data such as that downloaded from an athletic device a toolbar appears ab
448. r display settings To check you hardware acceleration status view the Advanced Display Settings in the Windows Control Panel To View a Map in 3 D Use the following steps to view a 3 D map 1 Expose the left map window using the map resize tool and then select 3 D from the drop down list at the top of the left map window A progress bar displays in the lower left corner of the map to display the 3 D drawing status OR Click the 3 D tab and then click Show 3 D A progress bar displays in the lower left corner of the map to display the 3 D drawing status 2 On the 3 D tab under 3 D View select the viewing mode The top option is an Outside looking in perspective This view focuses on the center of the map this allows you to spin the map around the center point sh ne bottom option is an Inside looking out perspective This view is from the center of the map this allows you to spin the map around you 3 Use the Rotate controls to rotate the 3 D map to the new position The reference arrow points to the direction that you will be viewing on the map which varies depending on the 3 D View selection you made in step 2 The degree of map rotation displays above the Rotate arrows You can rotate the 3 D map using one of the following methods e Press and hold the left arrow button to rotate the map clockwise e Press and hold the right arrow button to rotate the map counter clockwise e Drag the square map in the Rotate gra
449. r insert your stop or via For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias To rearrange stops and vias click the point to select it and then click the Move Up Move Down B o to relocate it in the route To delete a stop or via select the stop or via in the route list and then click the Delete button To change a stop to a via select the stop and click Make Via To change a via to a stop select the via and click Make Stop Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New Edit subtab Click Stop Prefs to make a stop in your route a fuel or end of day stop For more information see Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences Editing Roads You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to 280 Two Way One Way N or E No Left Turn N or E No Right Turn N or E Routing No Way One Way S or W No Left Turn S or W No Right Turn S or W To Edit a Road Use the following steps to edit a road Ue WNP 6 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click Edit Roads Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the map Click the Select tool Al and select the road on the map you want to edit Select a direction e If you select Two Way you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn e If you select One Way you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn
450. r manual To Print a Route Use the following steps to print an existing route 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab Note If you do not have a route on this project the route options are unavailable Optional Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer change printer properties select a transparent yellow background select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished If the options are available under Printer Properties set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics Select the route you want to print from the Name drop down list Only routes contained in the current project display in this list 4 Under Options select from one of the following choices 166 e Overview Provides an optimized map of your route and the route Summary trip distance trip time start total stops and finish e Travel Package Provides maps of the route with corresponding directions e Turn Details Prints 2 x 2 maps of each of the turns in your route directions e Directions Provides action based directions turn merge bear depart arrive and continue including the time frame for each action Note You can Save route directions as a text file e Along the Way Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find search within a current route The search results are listed as they are listed in the Find results The Along the Way opt
451. r point and line layers this number must be greater than zero For polygon layers the number can be positive negative or zero Select the distance measurement feet meters miles kilometers nautical miles from the drop down list 9 Select the Merge Overlapping Buffer Regions check box if you want to convert buffer polygons that overlap each other into one continuous polygon OR Clear the Merge Overlapping Buffer Regions check box if you want to retain the individual buffer polygons even when the buffers overlap 10 Click OK Adding Geometries to a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an empty existing layer To Add Geometries to a Layer Use the following steps to add geometries points lines or polygons to a layer 108 1 From the Active Layer drop down list on the toolbar select the layer you want to edit To add points to a point layer click the Draw Point tool on the toolbar and then click the location on the map where you want to place the points OR To add lines to a line layer click the Draw Line tool on the toolbar and then click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment you want to add or drag the cursor to create a freehand line To finish the line double click the last point of the line If the layer to which you are adding lines to is a top
452. r your draw object outline from the Width drop down list e Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement information for your draw object as your draw it on the map If you selected the Circle tool click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area OR If you selected the Polygon tool click the map to enter each point of the polygon OR If you selected the Rectangle tool click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want Right click the draw object point to Manage Draw and click Route Avoid If the object has no name it the name Route Avoid is visible on the map If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab click the Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route Note To undo your route avoid right click it on the map point to Manage Draw and click Route Avoid to clear the check box To delete the route avoid from the map click the Select tool in the Draw tab and click the draw object on the map Then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Tutorial Create Ro
453. rage of the grade from the start to the current cursor position or finish Minimum The elevation of the lowest point on a profile Elevation Maximum The elevation of the highest point on a profile Elevation Zone A named grid system of any of the UTM UPS MGRS or State Plane coordinate systems used as a basis for coordinate display For example UTM zone 19 specifies the six degree swath between longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S to 80N Another example is zone ME W in the State Plane coordinate system which specifies an area that covers the western half of Maine When using one these coordinate systems the current zone and coordinates east and north the eastings and northings of the zone origin are displayed Easting The measure of a position relative to the x axis horizontal of a grid system Northing The measure of a position relative to the y axis vertical of a grid system Latitude The measure of a position on the earth s surface north or south of the equator in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the equator s horizontal plane perpendicular to the polar axis Latitude is measured in degrees minutes and seconds All lines of latitude are parallel and are often referred to as parallels Longitude The measure of a position on the surface of the earth east or west of the Prime Meridian in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the vertical plane running through the po
454. rence of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Note e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view e See also Importing a Bitmap Copying and Pasting Pasting a Bitmap into XSym Dragging a Bitmap into XSym 237 XMap User Guide Finding a Custom Symbol The symbol name you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you attach to the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool You can use the symbol name to help locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map using the Advanced feature under the Find tab To Find a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name 1 Click the Find tab and then click Advanced 2 Select Category from the Find drop down list 3 Select the applicable option from the Within drop down list 4 Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box 5 Click Search 6 Click OK The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The Symbol Name displays in the Map Feature Type column just before the symbol s feature type draw object 7 Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map
455. rently disabled select the feature and then select the Show Feature check box under Line Feature OR To hide a feature select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box under Line Feature The feature displays as Disabled in the Symbolization dialog box To hide multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box To hide a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the first and last records in the block To select multiple features press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you select each feature To select a block of features press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you select the first and last records in the block To select all features press CTRL A Symbolizing a Point Layer You can use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to modify the symbols modify the text properties and show hide certain features in a layer If you are symbolizing a layer for use with a PN compatible form see the PN Compatible Forms Help topic for more information To Change the Symbolization of a Point Layer Use the following steps to change the symbolization of a point layer e W Ne 126 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Select highlight the layer you want to symbolize To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box Click the layer icon next to the layer name OR Click the Tool
456. ress to address routing annotation tools document linking advanced printing GPS support and more In addition you can view and print GIS maps created using XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise e Collect and edit data using forms synchronized from an XMap Enterprise database e Optimize response time with the latest in vehicle voice controlled navigation tools e Perform country wide searches of address locations and points of interest e Easily redline data corrections to Enterprise GIS data and efficiently share these edits with your GIS administrator e View your data in stunning 3 D with the latest terrain modeling technology e Import ESRI shapefiles into the GIS tab and apply symbolization What s New in XMap XMap continues to facilitate GPS data collection for mobile field workers across all industries with tools that create and work with data collection forms e Now supports syncing to multiple databases Use as many subscription files as desired to sync with more than one database e One step selection of GIS Layer for use on the PN Right click on a layer in the Handheld Export tab to automatically select all of the grids containing the layer Getting Started New Database Manager for Enterprise users allows for quick selection of groups and or individual users for subscriptions and allows multi select for both users and layers Improved Project File Management Updated base maps can now be used to correct older pro
457. rger geographic area at lesser detail e If you view both the right primary and left secondary maps at different data zoom levels a box or lines depending on the current data zoom level displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest The box lines indicate the area that Is in 15 XMap User Guide view on the other map You can disable this feature by clearing the Show Ref check box at the top of the secondary map window e If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not equally represented on the screen 50 50 a box or lines displays on the map that is covering the most screen area The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the other map To Drag and Zoom In Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map 1 Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display A view box displays on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse A label displays the data zoom level at the current map center 2 Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The area you selected fills the map window the map re centers and the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail Tip To move the view box to another location press the SHIFT key at any time To Drag and Zoom Out Use the following steps to zoom in either the r
458. rights under this Agreement OTHER This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and supersedes and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding whether oral or written with respect to its subject matter This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maine applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in Maine Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court U S Government Rights in Commercial Software Use duplication or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the System except any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Copyright 2012 DeLorme Important Notices Patent and Copyright Notice XMap is a limited field of use license under United States Patent law including the following patents owned by DeLorme U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 and 6 321 158 Other patents pending All software data compilations screen displays and map printouts are all protected by U S and foreign copyright and owned by DeLorme or its licensors Purchaser
459. rn and a turn graphic indicating the direction the distance to the next turn based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box and the time to the next turn e Next Stop The distance and estimated time to the next stop e Finish The distance and estimated time to the finish E1 Click the Show More Turns button to view information for the turn after the following turn click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area To Stop GPS Tracking In GPS tab view click the GPS button amp on the toolbar or click the GPS tab and then click Stop GPS Getting Back on Track When Off Course To automatically recalculate your route when off course select the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button in the Route tab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Auto check box and click the Back on Track button to manually recalculate the route Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking When using the application with a GPS receiver to track a route your map automatically pans and redraws as you travel always indicating your position on the map when Center on GPS is activated To Automatically Pan the Map The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work together to automatically pan the map 1 Click the Options button B KELE on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the GPS Settings tab
460. rol the minimum height displayed on the profile graph under Manual Scale select the Min Elev check box and type the minimum height in the text box This adjusts the base level of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display heights below the height specified Note Distance displays in the units you set in the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Units of Measure Preferences Clearing a Profile Once you select an object to profile you can clear the highlighted feature from the map and the profile graphs from the Profile tab To Clear a Profile Use one of the options below to clear the map object highlight and the currently displaying Profile graph e Click the Clear button L 4 on the Profile tab OR e Press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking a profiled object on the map OR e Right click the profiled object and click Clear Profile User Profile Data User profile data is data you add to a DeLorme mapping program Types of Data You can profile several types of data When you profile a track or a gpl file that includes the data the profile graph displays a colored line for each type of data The types of data their scales and default graph colors modifiable are Data Type Default Color Map Elevation Black ft mi m or km Default type from map topographic Matches the units set on the Display tab in the data Options dialog box Track Elevation Green ft mi m or km Matches the unit
461. rom a file 92 i 2 3 6 7 8 9 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the Layers button point to Import and then click New Layer Append Layer or Replace Layer The Import Layer wizard opens OR Click the Import Layers tool g on the toolbar and then click Import New Layer Import Append Layer or I mport Replace Layer If you are an XMap GIS Enterprise user under Source select File Under Data File click the Browse button El and browse to the file location you want to import Once you find the file double click it or select it and then click Open The Layer text box is automatically completed with the default layer name the file name portion of the file location or the name within the file once you select the file you want to import The file information such as file name location file geometries attribute fields and coordinate boundaries displays in the information area Notes e To rename layers once the file is imported right click the layer in Workspace click Rename and then type a new name for the layer Layer names need not be unique in the database e lf the layer you are importing contains many layers select the layer you want to import from the Layer drop down list You can import only one layer at a time Optional For a new layer type a new name for the layer in the Name text box From the Database drop down list select the database tha
462. roperties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as rasters vectors shaded relief contours points DEM properties etc Note You must select to show images in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the raster properties on the map See Customizing the Map Features Preferences for information on showing hiding images To Change Raster Properties Use the following steps to change the raster properties 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 3 Click the plus sign next to the sub data category 4 Right click Quad Rasters and click Properties The Raster Properties dialog box opens 5 Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab marker to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum data zoom range displays above the Set Data Zoom Range For Display area 6 Click Next 7 Type the minimum and maximum data zoom range for your custom raster properties in the text boxes 71 XMap User Guide 10 11 12 13 14 LD Select the raster data positions from the drop down list for that data zoom range Note The raster data position you select also includes all of the options above it in the list Continue to enter data zoom ranges and choose a position for each range Click Add Change to upd
463. rrent Route Click Search If your search is Very Successful The results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the location of the POI match Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click Go To e Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results e Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book Entry preview a result on the Handheld Export tab or assign it a start stop or finish in a route Just right click a search result and click the option Finding Points Near Your Current Location Use the GPS Radar option on the Find tab to search for points of interest POIs such as gas stations restaurants accommodations rest areas and so on near your current location if tracking with a GPS or near the current map center when viewing another location You can also search for GIS points and waypoints If you enable voice reporting on the Find tab in the Options dialog box you can he
464. rs vary by manufacturer and model e If you import multiple waypoints from a third party GPS device without assigning a waypoint ID to each first all of the waypoints display in the mapping application with a single default symbol e f you do not know the identification number for a third party GPS device s waypoint import the waypoint file into the mapping application Then use one of the two methods below to learn the waypoint ID o Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint s ID number in XSym o Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab ao a Symbol Editing Tools Draw Tool Box DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the Symbol Editing Grid independently of the DeLorme mapping program The tools provided help you to create unique symbols to add to your map 243 XMap User Guide The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box m oje jo Nis Pencil Draw freehand lines within the grid Line Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want within the grid Ellipse Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or Shape of the ellipse you want Filled Ellipse Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want Rectangle Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging unti
465. rter option 2 Type the following in the command line xmapimport target server server name target db database name source file file path datum datum of the file e g NAD83 coordinate system the coordinate system of the file e g SPCS spcs zone me w spcs units surveyfeet only needed when spatial reference information is not specified in the file Notes e The coordinate information varies depending on the type of coordinate system you specify for example if you select SPCS you must also specify the SPCS zone and units e If the server was created on your local machine type lt computer name gt xmap 7 If you are connecting to an external server see your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information 3 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard A confirmation message displays after the file is imported the message includes the file name number of geometries and the time it took for the file to import 4 Add the layer to your workspace To Import Files Creating an ini File 83 XMap User Guide This option works on a single file or wild card basis using the parameters described in previous sections You can create the initialization file ini using a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad All parameters are separated by a return in the ini file The name and path of the ini file are referenced in the command line 1 Open your preferred text editing program such as Wordpad or Notepad 2
466. rumb Trail 285 Show Location MapNotes 281 Show Summary MapNotes 55 281 SHOW TUNS ora aa AO 272 Showing Address Book Contacts on the WAND E E ctor E A A 196 Showing Attributes in a Layer 138 SHOWING TADS schon steers auc a 46 Showing Toolbar Features 0008 28 SINGlE VAlUC cc eccccceee cece T 120 SKY VICW yest enact E 293 Small Integer ccc cece cece eee e eee eeees 139 Snapping Draw Objects 006 221 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Mae a n A ost 171 Speech Profile Training 297 303 Speech Recognition 006 297 301 SDCCG vied ceanidwasvatad T 292 SPECA Niraes aa E 106 SPIN GC aa a eames 224 Standard Deviation seseressererrersre 118 Stal GPS eea 285 289 Statistical Data Options 65 255 SOD Pl ClScs ite ctavaduaaveinkencind cites 2 1 280 SOPS gh ie iets Sa ee a ee ees 268 Streel COlOl S rae er E e a ORA 40 SING eenaa 139 SHD Maps wmeadietiatene as 166 S UDSCMDUION seata a 78 SUN MOOM citictcdeetucbaetehidevedeeciite ss 294 Supported Coordinate Formats 12 SYMON 231 Symbolizing a Line Layer 124 Symbolizing a Point Layer 126 Symbolizing a Polygon Layer 128 Synchronize s sssesessrsrsrsrrrrens 78 79 81 Synchronizing Tooli iriiria traa 30 T Tab Configuration 05 44 46 47 Tap Manage eireas
467. rvers are in the public domain unless specifically annotated otherwise and may be used freely by the public so long as you do not 1 claim it is your own e g by claiming copyright for NWS information see below 2 use it ina manner that implies an endorsement or affiliation with NOAA NWS or 3 modify it in content and then present it as official government material You also cannot present information of your own in a way that makes it appear to be official government information The user assumes the entire risk related to its use of this data NWS is providing this data as is and NWS disclaims any and all warranties whether express or implied including without limitation any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will NWS be liable to you or to any third party for any direct indirect incidental consequential special or exemplary damages or lost profit resulting from any use or misuse of this data As required by 17 U S C 403 third parties producing copyrighted works consisting predominantly of the material appearing in NWS Web pages must provide notice with such work s identifying the NWS material incorporated and stating that such material is not Subject to copyright protection GDAL I nfo ZIP License This is version 2005 Feb 10 of the Info ZIP copyright and license The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp ftp info zip org pub infozip license htm
468. s GPS Devices Computer Desktop GPS Device SD Card T Earthmate GPS Sync Map Packages E hh Pa Bradbury_1249491 21 23 MB Topo 9 ME North pa 80 87 MB Topo 9 ME South Downloaded map file Choose location for file after sync Step 6 View the imagery on the device Disconnect your device from your computer On the device go to Map gt MENU gt Data Management Then highlight the map file press MENU and select View Map N 43 6 4094 MST W 71 8 9479 69 23 mi Fundy Cia 300 ft Speed Heading Onn 241 Tutorial Sync Data with a PN Series GPS Use Earthmate GPS Sync to send and receive waypoints including geocaches tracks and routes to and from an Earthmate PN Series GPS When planning a trip use XMap to create 317 PH 60 Sto geocaches drive or an the internal PN 40 Sto drive or an geocaches Store route XMap User Guide a set of waypoints a track and a route that identify the locations you are interested in visiting e See Syncing Maps Points Routes and Tracks for more information about syncing e See the Add a Map to a PN Series GPS tutorial for more information about adding maps and imagery and syncing them For this tutorial we are transferring data to a PN 60w connected to the computer Step 1 Create your trip information Use XMap to create your trip information To easily manage your information create a new project for e
469. s book by manually entering each record Imported address book items are merged with your existing address book Items with identical names are not replaced during the import process To Import an Existing Address Book Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button i The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Import 4 Click Browse to find the dab txt csv or tab address book file Click the file and then click Open 5 If the first line of the title contains column names select the First Row is Header check box 6 If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information select a default column label from the available drop down lists There is a list for Name Street Address City State Abbreviation ZIP Postal Code Telephone Latitude Longitude The information in your address book displays to the right of these lists 7 Click OK The address book contacts are imported into the program All street address or latitude longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol and the 193 XMap User Guide name of the contact Note If your contacts do not display on the map check the Located column in the Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was made If Not Located displays next to any of your records either address coordinate information was not provided with th
470. s button and then click Symbolize Working With GIS The Symbolize Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Symbolize OR XMap GIS Editor and Enterprise only Right click a point on the map and click Symbolize Under Symbolization each row in the table displays each of the classes in the layer Each column in the table indicates This Column Displays Field The minimum and maximum or unique values of each class name Feature The current visual property for each class Legend Label The current label for each class The Null Class indicates any object whose attribute value falls out of the classification The Highlight Features label lets you visually identify which records have been queried The field you chose while classifying the layer displays each of the features for that layer Each of the features are selected by default to show on the map 5 Click the feature for which you want to change the properties e To change the opacity of the color of your feature from the Opacity drop down list select Opaque 0 transparent Transparent 100 transparent Blended 50 transparent or XOR combination of the source and background pixels most useful when records with the same symbolization overlap e To change the type of symbol you want to display select a symbol set from the Set drop down list and then use the symbol list below the Set drop down list to select a new symbol Note To a
471. s dialog box Changing Voice Output calculated To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route Your application offers text to speech technology so you can receive spoken updates about your route directions next turn next stop current location time to finish or current coordinates when navigating with a GPS receiver Text to speech allows hands free navigation of the program on your computer Use your text to speech engine to change and preview the tone and quality of the computer s voice To Change the Voice Output Use the following steps to change your computer s voice 1 Click the Options button Ba EEE on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Voice Settings tab 3 From the Voice drop down list box select a voice from the list of options A description of the selected voice displays to the right of the drop down list box Note If you have purchased SAPI 5 1 compatible voices from another software vendor they are included in this list 4 From the Device drop down list box select the output device from which you want to hear the computer s voice for example your speakers or a headset 5 To preview the voice click Test Voice type a sample sentence and then click OK The sample sentence is spoken in the selected voice 6 Use the Voice Volume spin box to adjust the output volum
472. s for a specific name in a specific category For example if you want to find a particular restaurant in your town you would type restaurant in the Keywords text box type the name of the restaurant in the Name text box and then type your location information in the available text boxes For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Category Searches for a category of items within the specified area For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches Notes Finding a Location on the Map e In all category searches the Keywords field is optional If the Keywords field is left blank all objects in the selected Within area display in the Results list e Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Area Code and Exchange There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search Use at least a partial Area Code and Exchange to locate the covered regions This is not an individual phone search The results display in a browse list Latitude Longitude A single result is returned using a latitude longitude coordinate search There are no Within options Coordinates must be in one of the many formats recognized by the program and are based on your Display settings in the Options dialog box 3 From the Within drop down list select an option Available choices are based on what you se
473. s logical expression Returns TRUE if the first expression is greater than the second expression and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical _ expression Returns TRUE if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second expression and FALSE otherwise The result type is logical expression Dates are made up of dateparts hours minutes seconds years months days and so on For example the month datepart of the date July 4 1776 is 7 The day part is 4 and the year part is 1776 In a field creation formula datepart specifiers are used as parameters to date functions e g YEAR DATEDIFF etc D A datepart representing the day part of a date DD is a synonym for D DW A datepart representing day of the week for a date DY A datepart representing the day of the year for a date Y is a synonym for DY 146 Working With GIS HH A datepart representing the hour part of a date M A datepart representing the month part of a date MM is a synonym for M MI A datepart representing the minutes part of a date N is a synonym for MI MS A datepart representing the milliseconds part of a date Q A datepart representing quarters QQ is a synonym for Q S A datepart representing the seconds part of a date SS is a synonym for S WK A datepart representing the week part of a date WW is a synonym for WK YY A datepart representing the year part of a date YYYY is a synony
474. s set on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Speed Blue fos mph mps or kmh Matches the units set on the Display tab in the Options dialog box 258 Profiling Linear Objects Pedal Cadence Purple rps rom rph Depends on data Temperature Maroon F or C Depends on data To View Information for a Specific Data Type When you have multiple types of user data you can choose which type to focus on using the follow function 1 Profile a track with user data The data types display in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the graph 2 To follow a different data type e Inthe toolbar click the arrow next to the data type and click Follow OR e Right click the line for the data type on the graph point to Follow in the menu and click the data type 3 Move your cursor along the data profile in the profile graph to view the data in the info box For more information about viewing the profile graph see Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs To Hide or Show a Specific Data Type You can hide and show data on the profile graph 1 Profile a track with user data The data types display in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph 2 To hide or show a data type on the toolbar click the data type button to toggle it on or off To Change the User Data Type Color You can change the user dat
475. se XMap Professional users can edit embedded documents Use the Attributes subtab to view and or edit the attributes of a layer The columns that display in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab are field headings that were selected to be visible in the Design View of the Attributes subtab You can make some headings invisible by clearing the appropriate check boxes in the Design View To Edit the Attributes of a Layer Use the following steps to edit the attributes of a layer 1 2 3 Notes 132 Click the GIS tab Click the Attributes subtab and click the Datasheet View button E From the Layer drop down list select the layer to edit To view all of the attributes for the selected layer regardless of what is currently displaying on the map select All from the List drop down list OR To view only the attributes in the current map rectangle select Map Region from the List drop down list OR To view only attribute information for geometries you click on the map select Toolbar Select from the List drop down list Optional From the Query drop down list select a query against which to run the layer Note This option is unavailable when there have been no queries made against the layer To change a value in the layer double click inside the cell you want to modify type your edits in the appropriate cell and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard You cannot edit the area length perimeter or other XMa
476. sfer waypoints between the System and GPS receivers recommended by DeLorme for that purpose Earthmate PN Series GPS Device Map Data Distribution Rights Earthmate PN series GPS devices are supported by all of the XMap 8 software titles You may use the System for the distribution of duplicate copies of map data to multiple PN series device owners provided you are a licensed XMap 8 GIS Enterprise user and provided that you do not receive any remuneration in exchange for your distribution of such map data Paper Report Distribution Rights You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or clients up to one thousand 1 000 paper copies of any System map printouts for use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies provided that no such report includes more than fifty 50 different System maps and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication for sale or resale or contain paid advertising Periodical Illustrations You may reproduce paper copies of any System map printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works such as magazines newspapers and newsletters provided that the publication is not primarily a collection of maps and provided that a proper legend as described below accompanies the output Such articles may also be posted on your Web site Graphic printers hired by licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license Special Presentation R
477. sparent color bright pink show around the imagery OR If you do not want to select a color to display as transparent click Next 6 Type the minimum and maximum data zoom range for your custom raster properties in the text boxes 7 Select the raster data position for that data zoom range from the drop down list Note The raster data position you select includes all of the options above it in the list 8 Click Add Change to update your data positioning selections to the map You must perform this step to apply any change 9 Click Next 10 Drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum data zoom levels at which you want to see the imagery file on the map 66 Using Projects Map Data 11 Click Next 12 Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your raster properties 13 Click Finish Changing Point Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as rasters vectors shaded relief contours points etc Note You must use the Map Features tab of the Options dialog box to set the options for viewing any changes made to the point properties on the map See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing hiding points of interest To Change Point Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of point data 1 Click the Map Data tab Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next
478. splays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below 8 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 9 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 10 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced e If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Removing a Symbol You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set you have created To Remove a Symbol Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set 241 XMap User Guide 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool BI 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the
479. ss and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the object to the new location OR Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left OR Drag it to the new location To move the entire MapNote press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the object to the new location or position your cursor between the MapNote text and the anchor and drag the entire MapNote to the desired location OR To move the MapNote s anchor drag the MapNote s anchor to the new location OR To move the MapNote s text drag the MapNote s text to the desired location Tip To undo a draw object move click the Undo button to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new coordinate or distance and bearing angle number within the corresponding text boxes Using the Draw Tools Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles symbols text and MapNotes The whole object moves to the entered location If you change the distance and bearing numbers the object moves in relationship to the object s last location Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points small red circles in line segments in routable roads trails lines splines polygons rectangles and arcs If you change the d
480. ssions and your user permissions you can use the form to view or edit existing layer geometries or add new geometries Notes e If you edit an object that has been deleted from the Enterprise database since you last synchronized it will be restored to the database when you synchronize again e If you decide that you do not want to synchronize your edits with the Enterprise database click the Revert button on the toolbar to discard the edits The layer will synchronize with the Enterprise database but not include the edits e To view the history of changes made against each geometry in a layer click the Ext Sets button and then click Show Extended Sets a secondary table opens below the primary table and displays the changes Refreshing the Layers in a Subscription This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise To ensure the layers that were part of your subscription are the most recent files available click the Synchronize button ces on the toolbar The layers are refreshed with the latest version from the source database Adding Subscription Layers to Your Workspace This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Click the Add Synchronized Layers tool E on the toolbar for a quick and easy way to add all of the layers that are in the active subscription to your workspace The tool is
481. ster property settings for sid and tiff tif data 4 Save the project Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects To Remove Files in a Project Use the following steps to add or delete specific files in a particular project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 If the project you want to remove files from is not displaying open the project The contents of the current project display in the primary map window on the right side of the dialog area 61 XMap User Guide Note To verify the correct project is displaying check the title bar The project name displays directly after the product name 3 To remove a file select that file from the project list on the Map Data tab and then click the Remove button ai Note This does not delete the file it removes it from the selected project 4 Save the project Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Notes e Projects created in XMap 5 x or earlier are stored in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your C drive For more information see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location e Select the check box next to a file to display it Clear the check box to hide it e Use the Move to Primary Map and Move to Secondary Map l buttons to move datasets from one map to the other Renaming a Project Projects are untitled when you first add them to XMap When you save the map you can accept th
482. t e Large layer definition of geometries Type the minimum number of geometries a layer must include to define it as a large layer When a layer includes at least that number of geometries XMap will handle the layer differently to improve processing speed For example the map will not zoom to the location of the geometries and the count function for query results Is Suppressed The default number of geometries for a large layer is 50 000 e Geometry selection color Click the button to open the Color dialog box and click the color for selection highlights on the map Select geometries with the Selection Tool X in the toolbar or by selecting records on the Attributes subtab in datasheet view e Limit geometries from database to If you want to limit the number of geometries that the database is allowed to return type the number in the box The database will return up to that number and then return no more results A zero in the box indicates that there is no limit e Edit off screen objects Select this check box to allow editing or deleting of objects that are partially off the screen e Drag objects with the Edit tool Select this check box to allow the use of the Edit tool to drag objects GIS Query Options 71 XMap User Guide Use the Query subtab on the GIS tab in the Options dialog box to create default settings for managing queries Note Changes to query options apply only to the queries you create after you make the changes
483. t the numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Editing a Track Once you download a track from a GPS receiver you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time 226 Using the Draw Tools To Edit a Track Use the following steps to edit a track L 2 3 Open the project containing the draw file with the track you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done Click the Select tool Al and click the track you want to edit e A box displays around the selected track e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares Change any of the track style color or weight options of the existing track e To edit any label on a track click the Select tool select the line twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the track e Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line e A sma
484. t in small increments Copying Your Map to the Clipboard Click the Copy to Clipboard button a on the Print tab to copy your map to the clipboard You can then paste it into another program You can also right click anywhere on the map and click Copy Map to Clipboard Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image You can save the current map view as a bitmap bmp or J PEG jpg image in all page layout formats Single 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 If you select a multi page format all the active 17 XMap User Guide pages are saved as individual bitmaps or J PEGs The file name is the specified file name with an incremental page number at the end See Printing a Map for information about printing a map without saving it as a file To Save a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Use the following steps to save a map as an image Locate the area on the map that you want to save as an image Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab if it is not already selected Under Map select Left Right or Both Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size specified in the Setup options or Screen the map print area is based on the screen BR WN Be 18 size The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a Screen map displays as a blue box on the overview map If you selected Page in step 4 the following options are available Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x
485. t you want to add the layer to You can also select Other to attach a different database If you are importing a new layer you can select New if you want to create a new database If you are appending or replacing a layer select the destination layer from the Layer drop down list Click Next 10 If you are importing a layer that contains spatial reference information coordinates datum and projection a progress bar displays and the import process is complete OR If you are importing a layer that does not contain spatial reference information and is not a Geocode File Type asc csv dbf txt mdb xls tab go to the next step OR If you are importing a Geocode File Type a Verify how the data displays under Geocode Fields If it does not display correctly under Data Delimiter Type select the option that separates your data into the appropriate columns If your first row is not a header row clear the First Row is Header check box OR b Working With GIS Under Geocode Fields click the header for each column and select the appropriate field option from the drop down list Under Geocode By select how you want to locate your field information Street Address ZIP Code or Coordinates Note The available Geocode By options are based on which fields are assigned to the columns in step b Click Next If you selected Street Address or ZIP Code as the Geocode By option in step c the import process is complete
486. t you will not hold yourself out as having any ownership rights thereto You further agree that you will make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement PROHIBITIONS ON USE No Resale or Distribution Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement you do not have the right to sell or to reproduce or distribute for sale any part of the System or 341 XMap User Guide output of the System alone or in combination with any other text data software or graphic matter No Interactive Use You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme No Modifications or Decompilation Except through use of any software modification functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise access source code or the logical structure and contents of the System database No Third Party Service Bureau Use Except as specifically provided in this Agreement you may not a permit any third party to use the System or transfer disclose or otherwise make available the System to any third party b use the System in the operation of a service bureau or c allow access to the System through terminals located outside your premises You agree to secure and protect the System in a
487. tance to get to them by road is more than 10 miles e Search only in direction of travel Select the check box if you want to search only in the direction you are traveling when you are moving e Repeat the search every E minute s The interval at which to repeat the search Select the check box and then select the number of minutes from the drop down list You can also start or stop the search 177 XMap User Guide repeat with the Repeat Timer D button on the GPS Radar subtab The repeat search status you select is saved when you close the program but to start the timer you must click the Search button on the GPS Radar subtab If you click Stop Search on the GPS Radar tab the timer is turned off e Only repeat search when GPS is tracking Select the check box if you want to suspend searching when the GPS is disabled e Only highlight the selected object Select the check box to highlight only the selected result on the map rather than all results e Enable voice reporting Select the check box to allow voice reporting of results e Report z From the drop down box select the option for reporting e Interrupt report for new search results Select this check box if you want a new result to interrupt voice reporting To restore the default settings click Use Defaults Performing a Basic Search Use the QuickSearch tab to locate places addresses ZIP Postal Codes coordinate positions and more To search for other it
488. te directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options AND OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Right click Function Use the following steps to create a route l Right click the map location where you want to begin your route point to Create Route and click Set as Start Optional Add or insert stops or vias Right click the map location where you want to end your route point to Create Route and click Set as Finish If the route doesn t automatically calculate right click the route point to Manage Route and click Calculate Road Quickest Calculate Road Shortest Calculate Trail or Calculate Direct Note Ifthe program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK Optional Click the Route tab Then click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options or Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Toolbar Click here to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias Use stops and vias to route you through a particular place or along a particular road
489. ted dialog box click Open to open the migrated project or Close to close the dialog box and return to your last active project Note If there is a problem with the migration a message will notify you of any corrective action you need to take Managing Data Adding Data and Imagery to XMap XMap is compatible with a variety of DeLorme datasets and imagery formats You may have some of these datasets installed on your hard drive or you may access the data on a DVD Whether the data is on a DVD or saved on your hard drive you can choose to add the data to current and future projects or only the current project Notes e When adding third party imagery formats such as MrSID sid and GeoTIFF tif a DeLorme adc file is automatically created in the directory where the data resides This file is a connection between the original data and the DeLorme application e When you add MrSID or GeoTlFF to future projects you can select the adc file to automatically add the data If you select the sid or tif extension an adc file with the same name is created and you are prompted to overwrite the file name if it exists Adding Data to Current and Future Projects 56 Using Projects Map Data Data that is in current and future projects is considered base data If your data is saved on your hard drive you must update the Base Data settings in the Map Data tab to include that data in your current and future projects Note If you are accessin
490. tered Image 246 Creating Projects ccccceseeeeeeeeeeees 59 Creating Redline Edits 0000e es 80 Creating Transfer FileS 00eeeeeeees 62 Crte a ante vnsternateia encniabnt eevee aun 156 CUSAN ib Sinister eho eee Paks 139 Current Elevation ccccceeeeeeeeees 255 Cursor POSITION naserie a 245 Custom Points of Interest 39 Custom SYMDOIS ccc cece ee eeeeeeeees 234 Customizing a DeLorme Scheme 51 Customizing the Map Feature Preferences sau acne TE Bera E en nist 39 D Dale ensscutetatvustusestictedateneevenetaceniie des 56 Data COrrectiOns ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 333 Data ZOOM Levele narinari 15 21 Datasheet View 131 136 137 149 Date TNE cadi ccitueruns ouevawasgs ciceapareantien 139 Deleting a Classification 000008 123 Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book Peipdtecanah can imei Maina ora avin oe ora a naan ie 197 Deleting a Custom Scheme 0065 52 Deleting a Draw File 0ccs eens 205 Deleting a Field from a Layer 141 Deleting a Layer ccccceeeee eee eeeees 103 Deleting a ROUtEC cece eee cece eee ees 283 Deleting a Symbol Set 0085 130 Deleting an Existing WorkFile 249 Deleting Draw Objects 085 219 Deleting Files in a Project 5 61 Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw ODJjeCtS cc cece eee eee
491. tes subtab To not show a heading clear the appropriate check box in the Visible column in Design View To Show Hide Attributes in a Layer Use the following steps to show hide attributes in a layer 1 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab 3 Click the layer for which you want to show hide attributes N 4 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button Ez The following table describes the columns in the Design View Column Name Description Attribute Set The name of the attribute set that to which the field belongs Source Name Displays the original field name that is stored in the database Field Name Displays any associated field labels for the heading To edit a cell click it make the change and press the ENTER key on your keyboard You cannot edit field names in bold text Visible Selected check boxes indicate that the fields display as headings in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab the Classification dialog box and the layer export results 138 8 Working With GIS Data Type The data type for the field Includes the character limit if the data type is String Description The field description To edit a cell click it make the change and press the ENTER key on your keyboard You cannot edit XMap managed fields From the Attribute Sets drop down list select a dataset Select All Sets to view attributes for all of the datasets or select a particular set to view the a
492. th of the entire line object on the map e When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon draw object a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total area of the polygon on the map e Points in Rectangles Circles and Arcs Draw objects such as rectangles circles and arcs also contain points but they are treated differently 202 Using the Draw Tools Rectangles Contain shape points at the four corners but the lines between the Shape points contain no editable end points When you click one of these shape points a text box displays the width height and area of the rectangle on the map Circles Contain no shape points but have a central point that does not display until you snap it see Note below to another object Clicking the circle displays a central crosshair within the circle and a text box containing information on the area and radius of the circle on the map Arcs Contain three shape points When you click any of the points a text box displays the angle or bearing of the selected point the radius of the arc and the total length of the arc line on the map Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc are treated as start and end points i e show red or green when clicked The central magenta shape point or third point you placed determines the shape of the arc Note For information
493. that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Delete Field feature to delete custom fields you have added to your layer or to delete default fields that came with your imported layer When you delete a field from a layer it is permanently deleted from the database including all involved elements such as labels dependent formulas classifications etc To Delete a Field from a Layer Use the following steps to delete a field from a layer 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected 3 Click the layer from which you want to delete a field Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button Fal Click the Options button and then click Delete Field A confirmation message displays OR Right click the field you want to delete and then click Delete Field A confirmation message displays 6 Click OK to permanently delete the field from the database OR Click Cancel if you do not want to delete the field from the database aS Function and Operator Descriptions This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise The following definitions describe some of the terms used in the function descriptions table below Data_type One of integer float string or datetime String may have an optional length specification string integer For example string 40 Date_expression An expression yielding a datetime result Dat
494. that you want to make transparent when displayed on the map To alter the tolerance of the transparency select Normal Sharp or Broad from the drop down list Notes e To reduce 24 bit images to 8 bit click the Reduce button e To modify the transparency color that displays in the image window select a color from the drop down list to the right of the transparency button 14 15 16 Tips Registering Images Click WorkFile Note The WorkFile contains the registration points and a reference to the source image file WorkFiles are saved in C DeLorme Docs WorkFiles Change the WorkFile name in the WorkFile text box Click Save The WorkFile is available in the table in the WorkFile subtab Magnify the image in the image window and zoom in on the map in the map window until image and source are approximately the same viewing resolution For example Zoom in on the source map in the map window to a street that appears to be about an inch in length on your screen Now adjust the magnification of the image in the image window until the same street is also about an inch in length on the screen If your images or maps appear too pixilated decrease magnification on the left and Zoom out on the right Clear the Link to Map check box to pan and zoom the map window without affecting the map center of data zoom level of the image window Select the Enable check box to preview the map features which were not made transparent
495. the Attributes subtab To Change How Query Results Display in the Attributes Subtab Use the following steps to change how query results display in the Attributes subtab Click the GIS tab Click the Query subtab Click the Manage button click Attributes Effect and then select Highlight Filter or None The option with a selected check box next to it is the currently selected L 2 3 option J Highlight Highlights the query results yellow in the Attributes subtab Filter Filters the Datasheet View of the Attributes tab so that only the query results display None Does not show any visual cue of the query results in the Attributes subtab but will show how many records were affected as long as the Count 161 XMap User Guide option is enabled Select this option to make the query process run more quickly Deleting a Query This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can delete a query from a workspace or a database To Delete a Query Use the following steps to delete a query 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Query subtab 3 Select the query you want to delete from the Query drop down list 4 Click the Manage button and then click Delete Cancelling a Query This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you cancel a query the map and attribute effects used by the query are no longer appli
496. the Save as Type drop down list 7 Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is root name of the layer 8 Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file 9 Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files You can export track or waypoint files as GPX files GPX files derived from tracks contain the elevation time and GPS status for each point in the track GPX files derived from a waypoint file include the waypoint name comment URL lat lon elevation time GPS status and the symbol name You cannot export more than one waypoint track layer into a single GPX file To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file 1 Open the project containing the track or waypoint file you want to export OR Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers 4 Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list 207 XMap User Guide Ti 8 J Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box opens Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of C DeLorme Docs Export Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop down list Type a
497. the XMap application If you do not have this data installed you do not see this option Note DeLorme Street Level data is not included in the map if the Export Map Format is set to DeLorme Earthmate Satellite Imagery SAT10 9 11 True color 10 meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite Satellites d observation de la Terre Downloaded using the NetLink tab USGS Quads 3DTQ 12 14 Color contour topographic maps produced by the United States Geological Survey Downloaded using the NetLink tab Aerial Imagery DOQQ 15 17 Black and white 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab Color Aerial Imagery DO 13 17 True color 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab 1 50K Canada Topographic Map Sheets 10 15 Coverage for most of Canada Can overlay other maps These maps are made from original Canadian map sheets and are a combination of Toporama maps photomaps and scanned maps They include not only topographic contour lines and water but also significant buildings historic sites and other man made features in urban areas Downloaded using the NetLink tab NOAA Nautical Charts varies Using DeLorme PN Series GPS Devices Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA Downloaded using the NetLink tab USGS Hi resolution 133 City Imagery 13 17 Color
498. the bars the main profile graph adjusts to show the area within the borders and the right and left vertical scales adjust to fit the data you are viewing The area you are not viewing in the main graph is highlighted with grey in the overview graph 254 Profiling Linear Objects e When you hover your cursor over the area within the bars the cursor changes to a hand Left click to grab the area and drag it horizontally to reposition the border focus area or to center the selection on that point 3 To hide the overview profile graph click Less __Lesst Statistical Data You can manage the type of statistical data you want to view for a profile graph The profile statistic options display to the right of the profile graph The applicable selected options display in the info box when move your cursor along the profile graph An info box can also contain user data that you add to the mapping program see User Profile Data for more information To View Your Current Options To view all options you currently have selected click the More button _ Morea near the bottom of the Profile tab to expand your view To Remove an Option Use the following steps to remove an option from the statistics list 1 Move your cursor over the statistic you want to delete An X appears in the cell 2 Click the X to remove the option To Add an Option 255 XMap User Guide When one or more options have been removed use the followin
499. the connection establish a new connection or remove the disconnected or deleted layer from the Workspace e To refresh the connection for all layers click the Layers button and click Refresh All Layers OR To refresh the connection for specific layers highlight the layers right click the highlighted area and click Refresh Selected Layers e To reconnect all layers to the original database or to connect them to a new database click the Layers button and click Reconnect The Connect Layers dialog box opens OR To reconnect connect specific layers highlight the layers right click the highlighted area and click Reconnect The Connect Layers dialog box opens e To remove the active layer click the Layers button and click Remove OR To remove specific layers highlight the layers right click the highlighted area and click Remove GIS Options GIS Layer Options You can customize the default settings for managing GIS layers To Set GIS Layer Options Use the following steps to create default settings for GIS layers 1 Click the Options button E Options on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 76 Working With GIS 2 Click the GIS tab and then click the Layers subtab 3 Set the following options e Add imported layers to Workspace Select this check box to automatically add imported layers to the Workspace subtab e Show
500. the following steps to import another user s Tab Manager preferences L If your application is open click the arrow next to the Options button Eg on the toolbar and click Tab Manager OR From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click Tab Manager Click File and then click Import The Import Tab Configuration dialog box opens Browse to the location of the configuration preferences file select it and then click Open Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported configuration file 47 XMap User Guide 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager 5 Exit your application 6 Open your application To Export Tab Manager Preferences Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration file 1 If your application is open click the arrow next to the Options button ca anes on the toolbar and click Tab Manager OR From the Start menu point to Programs gt DeLorme gt XMap gt Tools and then click Tab Manager 2 Click File and then click Export The Export Tab Configuration dialog box opens 3 Type a name for the configuration preferences file in the File Name text box and then click Save Configuration files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Configuration 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager Reordering the Tabs Use the Tab Manager feature to customize your program by reordering tabs You can access Tab Manag
501. the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click Redo Notes e Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc e To turn the snapping feature off press the ALT key on the keyboard while dragging the draw object To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool Al and then click the arc on the map A box displays around the active object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard drag the center point of the arc line over a point on the draw object until the snap point the yellow diamond displays 4 Release the arc It is snapped to the other object s point coordinate Adding Points to Draw Objects 221 XMap User Guide You can add points to routable road trail line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Add Points to Draw Objects Use the following steps to add points to routable roads trails lines splines and polygons 1 In the Draw tab click the Select tool A and then click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it
502. the radius for the circle into the radius text box OR To place a rectangle on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option Enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle s upper left corner point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box OR To place a polygon on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box Click Apply Note If you are placing a polygon on the map repeat the procedure for the other points Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and I mages Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or I mage to the Map You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current project Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Use the Waypoint tool to label waypoints on a map You can exchange waypoints with a GPS receiver Use the Symbol tool to identify certain areas on the map such as houses monuments or points of interest Use the MapNote tool t
503. them to XMap and merge them with your GIS layer To use the symbol set on the device you must classify and symbolize your layer See the Classification and Symbolization section below Note This Help topic explains how to use XMap to export GIS points and forms to your device for information about working with GPX files and forms on your device see the PN Pro Firmware Update document on the Earthmate PN Series Wiki To Send GIS Points and Forms to a PN Series GPS Use the following steps to send GIS points to your PN Series GPS device 1 Click the GIS tab and ensure the Workspace subtab is selected 2 Select the check box for the point layer that contains the points you want to send OR To manually select the points click the Selection Tool w in the toolbar and click or drag and select the points OR Create a query 3 Connect your PN Series GPS device to your computer and power it on On the device s Connect to Computer screen select Map Transfer and then Transfer to SD Card OR from any screen press MENU go to Device Setup gt Connect to Computer and select Transfer to SD Card from the USB Setting drop down list 4 In XMap click the Send GIS Layer button E3 on the toolbar OR Click the layer in the workspace click Tools and click Send to PN Series Device OR Right click the layer in the workspace table and click Send to PN Series Device The Export Points dialog box opens 5 Ensure the correct layer is displaying in th
504. tion click the Remove Class button Click OK The classification is saved for future use To view it again select it from the Classification drop down list Classifying a Layer with a Single Value 120 Working With GIS This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise When you classify a layer in a database with a single value all of the records are in the Same class and look the same on the map For example they all have the same fill color on the map By default single value classifications are automatically assigned to all layers If you are classifying a layer for use with a PN compatible form see the PN Compatible Forms Help topic for more information To Classify a Layer with a Single Value Use the following steps to classify a layer with a single value Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer you want to classify Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 To edit view an existing classification for the selected layer select it from the Classification drop down list OR To create a new Classification for the selected layer click the Manage button and then click New 6 Select Single Value from the Type drop down list 7 Click OK e W Ne Saving a Classification to a Template Fi
505. tion From a Template File This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Load Template feature in the Classify Layer dialog box to attach a classification template to classification The layer to which you are applying the template must have the same attribute fields name and data type as those used in the original template If the layer does not have the same attribute fields as those used in the template an error will appear when you apply the template to the layer To Apply a Template to a Classification Use the following steps to attach a template to a classification Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer that you want to classify Click the Tools button and then click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Classify The Classify Layer dialog box opens 5 Click the Manage button and then click Load Template The Open Template dialog box opens 6 Browse to the location where the template was saved and click Open Note Classification templates have xmc extensions 7 Optional Recalculate or classify the layer based on the settings in the template 8 Click OK oe Copying a Classification This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise 122 Working With GIS You can copy an existing classification if you want to make
506. tion obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license the Software to use reproduce display distribute execute and transmit the Software and to prepare derivative works of the Software and to permit third parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so all subject to the following The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement including the above license grant this restriction and the following disclaimer must be included in all copies of the Software in whole or in part and all derivative works of the Software unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine executable object code generated by a source language processor THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE J asPer License JasPer License Version 2 0 Copyright 1999 2000 Image Power Inc Copyright 1999 2000 The University of British Columbia Copyright 2001 2003 Michael David Adams All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any p
507. tion properties Click Finish The USGS quad line connection properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Using Projects Map Data Note The USGS quad line connection property changes are only made in the current project You must save your project to retain the property changes Changing Draw Connection Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as draw objects rasters vectors shaded relief contours points and so on To Change Draw Connection Properties Use the following steps to change the properties of draw objects 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Under Secondary Map or Primary Map click the plus sign next to the draw file for which you want to modify the properties 3 Right click the draw file and click Properties The Draw Connection Properties dialog box opens 4 Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area 5 Click Next 6 Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your draw connection properties 7 Click Finish The Draw Connection Properties are modified and are visible on the map Note The draw connection property changes are made only in the current project You must save your project to retain the property changes Changing the Raster P
508. tion to get a current copy of the document from the database and then use the Upload option to replace the document with a new 134 Working With GIS version e If there is no editor on your computer for a type of document you can use Upload to store a file in the database and Save As to copy the document from the database back to your hard drive e You can open the embedded documents menu from the Attributes subtab from the map or with a form e Attributes Datasheet View Hover over a cell in a document column until you see an arrow Click the arrow to open the menu e On the map Right click a GIS object geometry that contains at least one document column If that object contains a document a Documents option is available in the menu If there are multiple documents or multiple objects on the map where you click then all of the options available for the action you select are displayed e With a form When a form includes an embedded document the form creator sets permissions that allow viewing the document within the form editing a document from the form deleting the document or uploading a new document to replace the one in the form Changes made from a form are made to the layer just as if you were working with the document from the Attributes tab or the map See Forms Overview for more information about Forms and Forms requirements e Edit Upload and Delete actions are added to your Undo history until you commit
509. to the open project the Save Changes dialog box opens to ask you if you want to save your changes For more information see Creating and Deleting Projects To Open a Project To open an existing project 1 Click the Open button on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Open button and then click Open Project If you made changes to a project that is already open the Save Changes dialog box opens Note Projects have xmp extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects The Open File dialog box opens 2 Select the project you want to view and click Open Note If the project has not been migrated to the new DeLorme Docs location you will be prompted to migrate it Click Migrate to create a copy of the file in the new DeLorme Docs location Click No to cancel For more information about migrating projects see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location For more options for opening files see To Migrate a Project To migrate an existing project from C DeLorme Docs Projects to C DeLorme Docs Projects 1 Click the arrow next to the Open button and then click Migrate Project Obie i Open Project fea Migrate Project The Migrate Project dialog box opens 2 Browse to the project you want to migrate and click Migrate After the migration is complete a confirmation message appears 3 Click Open to open the project or Close to close the message For more information abo
510. to a database How do manage the layers in my workspace What is a workspace How do classify a layer How do create a query How do use XMap Forms GPS XMap User Guide How do I start tracking with my GPS device See also Routing Handheld Export How do I use my mapping application with my PN Series GPS Map Data What is a project How do I add or remove base data How do I add data and imagery How do I set data as routing data Routing How do create a route How do track a route with my GPS receiver How can I automatically recalculate my route when I m off course How can I avoid a specific area when routing Printing How do I print a map Profile How do view a profile of a route I ve created 1 Center the route you want to profile on the map 2 Click the Profile tab 3 Select a route on the map to generate its profile When the object is selected it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile dialog area 3 D How do generate a 3 D map How can expand my 3 D map to fit the entire screen Helpful Tips These tips may help you use the features in your DeLorme mapping program The Did You Know pop up tutorials provide hints while you are working in the application Tips e To disable a specific pop up tutorial select the Don t Show Again check box before you close it e To disable all pop up tutorials click the Help button T on the toolbar and click Shut Off
511. to show it on the map e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each point in your route Click Done Moving Route MapNotes 281 XMap User Guide You can move route MapNotes The text box moves but the point stays on the map location To show delete route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences To move and delete draw Map Notes see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes To Move a Route MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab L 2 Click the Move Route MapNotes button bal 3 Click the MapNote to select it 4 Drag the text box to the new location Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map All the routes you create are automatically displayed The active route displays as a gold line outlined in red Each inactive route displays as a dashed orange line outlined in green You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting them from the map To Display a Route on the Map Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In the route list on the left select the check box next to the route you want to display OR To center the map on the route double click the route name To Hide a Route on the Map Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In th
512. to the dataset for which you want to modify the properties 3 Click the plus sign next to the sub data category 4 Highlight Map Points click Data and then click Properties The Point Properties dialog box opens OR Right click Map Points and click Properties The Point Properties dialog box opens 5 Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum level you want The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range For Display area Note The Show URLs check box is enabled if your dataset supports showing points as hyperlinks on the map 6 Click Next Review the dataset information and click Next if applicable 8 Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with your point properties 9 Click Finish The Point Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map Note The point property changes are made only in the current project You must Save your project to retain the property changes Changing Vector Properties Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various map features such as rasters vectors shaded relief contours points etc Note You must select to show land thoroughfares in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view any changes made to the vector properties on the map See Customizing the Map Features Preferences for information on showing hiding land thoroughfares
513. topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise Use the Attribute Search feature in the Attributes subtab to quickly search for particular attributes within a layer Once the search is complete the results are saved as a query and display in the Query drop down list as Attribute Search Note Attribute Searches filter the attribute table in the Datasheet View to only show the results of the search the geometries are not highlighted or filtered on the map To Search for Attributes Use the following steps to use the Attribute Search dialog box 1 Click the GIS tab 2 Click the Attributes subtab and click the Datasheet View button L 3 From the Layer drop down list select the layer from which to search the attributes 4 Click the Attribute Search button ial The Attribute Search dialog box opens The name of the layer you selected displays in the Name text box 136 Working With GIS 5 From the Attribute drop down list select the Attribute field for which you want to search 6 Type the specific attributes for which you want to search in the Values text box Separate multiple values with a comma or a comma and a Space for example portland me OR portland me Note If you copy a column of attributes or multiple attributes from an application such as Microsoft Excel and paste them into the Values text box they are automatically comma delimited 7 Optional To r
514. trail waypoint or draw layer depending on the type of draw object you selected When the draw file type is changed the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made and switched to the new draw file type leaving you with two files the original draw file and the copied draw file which has a new draw file type To Change a Draw Object Use the following steps to change a draw object type 1 Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map 2 To change a routable trail track or line to a road layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Road Layer OR To change a routable road or routable trail to a track layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Track Layer OR To change a routable road track or line to a trail layer right click the object point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Trail Layer 214 Using the Draw Tools OR To change a routable road routable trail waypoint or track to a draw layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To create a copy of an existing area object point object or line object right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To change a track to a GPS log right click the track on the map point to Manage Dra
515. transfer files openspace on the map Once the data is imported as a layer you can choose to classify symbolize and label the data in the layers to your specifications You can also e Create a database on a network server to share data among group members e Create attribute queries using the fields in your layer e Embed documents and link URLs to attribute records e Use XMap Forms to easily collect data e Create spatial queries between layers e Add fields to your layer e Create a new layer a new empty layer or a new layer based on an existing layer query results or map selections e Send GIS layers to an Earthmate PN Series GPS device e Create default option settings for layers and queries e And much more The GIS tab has five subtabs Subtab Description Name Workspace The Workspace subtab is the primary area for using the GIS tab You can use the tools in the Workspace subtab to manage and analyze layers in your databases as well as manage the databases themselves See also Handling Disconnected or Deleted Layers Attributes The Attributes subtab has two different views the Datasheet View and the Design View The Datasheet View displays the fields that are selected to be visible in the Design View and lets you edit the attribute values The Design View lets you edit properties of the fields view field metadata create fields and import and link additional fields to your layer Query The Query subtab l
516. ttributes contained in that dataset Your selection determines which attributes display in the Datasheet View and Design View To show an attribute in a layer select the check box under Visible in the row OR To hide an attribute in a layer clear the check box under Visible in the row Tip Right click the table and click Check All to select all check boxes or Clear All to clear all check boxes Click Options and then click Save Note To undo a previous change before you save click Options and then click Reset to return the table to the previously saved view Adding Editing a Field in a Layer This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can add fields to a layer in Design View Once you add a field you can edit it You can add several data types including documents and URLs To Add a Field to a Layer Use the following steps to add a field to a layer L rA 3 Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab Highlight the layer to which you want to add a field Click the Attributes subtab and click the Design View button Pal To add a field to the layer click Options and then click the type of field you want to add e Add Simple Field 1 Type a name for the field in the Field Name box This will be used as the column heading 2 Select a data type from the Data Type drop down list 3 If you selected String Unicode String Memo Unicode Memo or URL in th
517. two base points of the arc only When the central 227 XMap User Guide Shape point of the arc is selected the text options change from Distance and Bearing Angle to Radius and Direction Enter the appropriate radius number and direction to change the radius for this point 4 Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point The line object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle OR After placing the first point coordinate move your pointer to the map screen and place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen 5 To place additional points lines or other draw objects on the map in reference to the first line enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and click Apply Joining and Breaking Linear Objects You can join two or more routable roads trails tracks lines arcs or splines into a single entity You can also break routable roads trails tracks lines or splines You cannot break arcs To Join Use the following steps to join linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and select any lines arcs or splines you want to join OR Click the Select tool Al and drag a box around the linear objects you want to join Note When joining the preceding types of line objects you can mix and match lines arcs and splines The result is always a line However when you join multiple s
518. uality clock within the receiver decreases the accuracy of your location The atmosphere the ionosphere and the number of channels your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your system Consult your GPS hardware manuals for information on how your receiver adjusts for errors Any buildings natural structures or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna s view of the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the accuracy of your position Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U S Department of Defense There are two available radio signals that receivers can use the Standard Positioning Service SPS for civilians and the Precise Positioning Service PPS for military and authorized personnel 295 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Voice Overview To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated Using the speech recognition and text to speech technology included in your application you can issue a series of voice commands to a laptop computer The voice commands activate basic navigation map control and GPS features providing you with hands free program navigation so you can concentrate on your driving When tracking with a GPS receiver you can receive spoken updates about your route directions next turn next stop current location etc The Voice label on the Voice tab displays red when the microphone is act
519. uffer Use the following steps to create a buffer around a geometry L 2 CH Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click Tools and then click Buffer The Buffer Layer dialog box opens From the Source Layer drop down list select the layer for which you want to create a buffer the list displays only layers in the workspace Select the Source Geometries option e All Build buffers around all geometries in the source layer 107 XMap User Guide e Selected Build buffers around selected geometries in the source layer Make selections with the GIS tools on the toolbar or select attribute records within the Attributes subtab Note This option is grayed out when there are no selections in the source layer e Query Results Build buffers around geometries in the source layer that are contained within the results of the active query Note This option is grayed out when there is no active query in the source layer Under Output Location select New Layer or Existing Layer If you selected the New Layer option in step 5 type the name of the new layer in the Layer Name text box Then select the database for the new layer from the Target Database drop down list or select Other to attach a new database OR If you selected the Existing Layer option in step 5 from the Layer Name drop down list select an existing polygon layer in your workspace Type the buffer distance in the Distance text box Fo
520. undo the move of the pasted draw object click the Undo button Y to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj e f you undo the first move of the pasted object the object is placed back on top of the original copied object e To copy and move a single object select the draw object you want to copy press the CTRL key on your keyboard and drag the draw object to the new location e f the item you copied does not successfully paste it may be because you clicked out of the map display To focus the cursor back on the map click inside the map display Then try pasting again 217 XMap User Guide Moving Draw Objects You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one location to another Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Move Draw Objects Use the following steps to move draw objects 1 Open the project that contains the object you want to move 218 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click the Select tool Al and click the draw object you want to move A box displays around the active object You can move draw objects in different ways If the object is a n Routable Road Routable Trail Track Line Arc Spline Polygon Rectangle or Circle Symbol or Text MapNote Pre
521. ure to make edits to the layer in a draw file To Open a Subscription File Use the following steps to open a subscription file 1 Double click the file either within an e mail or after you save it to your computer If XMap is not already open it opens automatically 2 When prompted restart XMap 3 Click the Synchronize button oes on the toolbar A progress bar indicates the synchronization percentage complete 4 Click OK to acknowledge the synchronization completed The layers in the subscription are added to the workspace on the GIS tab 5 To view a layer on the map click the GIS tab click the Workspace subtab and then select the check box next to the layer in the workspace 78 Working With GIS OR To center the layer on the map double click the layer in the workspace Note Only one subscription file can be active at a time Editing a Layer in a Subscription This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can edit a layer you are subscribed to and then synchronize the edits with the Enterprise database on the server Editing a Layer in a Subscription 1 Open a subscription file OR If you are using a subscription file you are already subscribed to click the Synchronize button on the toolbar to refresh the layers 2 Use the GIS editing tools to make edits to the layer If the layer includes a form depending on the form permi
522. us with the operator The result type is logical expression FLOOR numeric_ expression Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a number The result type is integer _expression GETDATE Returns the current date time as a datetime value The result type is date expression IF logical expression Returns one value if a condition you value_if true value_if false specify evaluates to TRUE and another if it evaluates to FALSE The result type is derived from value_if true and value_if_false which must either be both string or both numeric If numeric then if either of the values is float then the return type is float_expression and otherwise it is integer_expression if string then the result type is string expression Returns TRUE if the string field field is empty and FALSE otherwise NOT may be use to reverse the sense of the test The result type is logical expression Returns TRUE if field is NULL and FALSE otherwise NOT may be use to reverse the sense of the test The result type is logical expression field IS NOT EMPTY field 1S NOT NULL LEN string expression Returns the length of a string The result type is integer_expression Return the leftmost number_of_ characters characters of a string where number_of_ characters is of type integer_expression The result type is string expression LEFT string expression number_of_ characters LTRIM string expression
523. uster of control points Consider placing control points around the border of the data to register then adding interior points Depending on how the layer to register is distorted the control points may define a solution with more curves than required to correct the distortion If this occurs consider using the second order polynomial or triangulated transform Click in the image window to place a point A point displays on the image with a label for the point number the label Point with a number is the default label Note For helpful hints on placing points see Hints for Placing Points Move your cursor to the map window Center the cursor over the same intersection location you chose in the image window and click that same point in the map window OR If you know the coordinates for the intersection point in the map window enter the latitude and longitude numbers in the Latitude and Longitude fields for the current point Repeat steps 9 10 for each additional point evenly distributing points throughout the image The number of points that are required varies depending on the solution you chose in step 8 Optional If you want to register a portion of the image click the Crop tool d and draw a polygon around the area you want to crop out of the image Optional If you want to make an area in your image transparent click the Transparency button a to switch to the transparent image mode Then click the area within the image
524. ut migrating data to XMap see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location To Open A Project 1 Click the Map Data tab 2 Click File and then click Open 3 Select the project you want to view and then click Open 4 Click OK To Open a Route 5 Click the Map Data tab 6 Click Data and then click Add The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens 7 Browse to the file you want select it and then click Add The route is added to the current project To Open a Draw File 8 Click the Map Data tab 9 Click Data and then click Add The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens Getting Started 10 Browse to the file you want select it and then click Add The draw file is added to the current project What is my server name XMap uses Microsoft SQL Server as its DeLorme OpenSpace database engine Your server name varies depending on if you are connecting to or creating a DeLorme database in Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or a Microsoft Enterprise SQL Server at your company e To establish a local connection to SQL Server 2005 Express or SQL Server 2008 use lt computer name gt XMAP7 for the server name To establish a connection to SQL Server 2005 Express on another computer in your network use lt computer name gt XMAP7 e To establish a connection to a Microsoft Enterprise Microsoft SQL Server use lt Server Name gt for the server name You will need to ensure that you have the proper s
525. ut migrating projects see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location To Save a Project To save the project that is currently open 1 Click the Save button on the toolbar The Save File dialog box opens 29 XMap User Guide 2 Browse to the location where you want to save the project If you want to rename the project type a new name in the File Name text box 3 Click Save To Print To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab click the Print button onthe toolbar The Print button is hidden by default to show it right click the toolbar to open the menu and click Print For more information see Printing a Map To Print the Map Screen To print the current view as it displays on the screen click the Print Screen button New on the toolbar The Print Screen button is hidden by default to show it right click the toolbar to open the menu and click Print Screen To Open the Map Library To open the Map Library subtab on the NetLink tab click the Map Library ama button To Use the Map Navigation Tool Click the Navigation tool on the toolbar to enable Navigation mode e To zoom in click the map hold down the left mouse button and drag down and right 2 D maps only e To zoom out click the map hold down the left mouse button and drag up and left 2 D maps only e To re center the map click the map where you want to center it To Grab and Pan the Map To drag
526. ute Avoids 274 Routing Ever been planning a trip only to find out that a major road you re planning to take is currently under construction How about when you re in the middle of your travels and you see a Sign that says Road Construction next 35 miles The Route Avoid feature lets you assign an area to avoid and even recalculate an existing route For more information see Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing Step 1 Create a route Create a route Step 2 Select the area to avoid 1 Decide which area you want to avoid On this trip we want to avoid Columbus Ohio 2 Click the Draw tab and then click and hold the Polygon tool _ gt and select the Shape you want We are going to use a rectangle oa a iy hu 3 From the Fill drop down list select Blended Note See Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map for more information about the options available op oe am a i ma ha Blended Y E J f Fel Ae 7 es ma efe a 4 Click the map and drag the shape to cover the area to avoid The measurements of the area you are covering display as you move the mouse 27 5 XMap User Guide 5 When you have the area you want release the mouse Tan al PETETA L blh a Cl malaal on a a F Width 10 oq mi rele ote mi 5 Area 3195188 g mi T 2 Y Step 3 Create the route avoid Right click the new draw object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Route Av
527. ve button E The layer displays in the Layers in the Database list OR Under Layers in the Workspace double click the layer in the workspace that you want to remove The layer displays in the Layers in the Database list Note You can also click the Remove All button P remove all of the layers in the workspace 6 Click OK Note You can also remove a layer from the database by highlighting the layer s in the workspace table clicking the Layers button and then clicking Remove Or just right click the highlighted layers that you want to remove and click Remove Viewing a Layer on the Map 102 Working With GIS This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap Professional XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise You can view several layers on the map at once To View a Layer on the Map Use the following steps to view a single layer or multiple layers on the map Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Optional Add layers to your workspace To view a layer on the map ensure the check box next to each layer you want to display is selected OR To view multiple layers on the map hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click each of the layers you want to display Then click the Layers button and click the Check Selected option 5 To determine which map primary secondary or both in which to view the layer double click the Map column for the layer you want to view
528. via is labeled Add If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select Add To add a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Address Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list e Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names e Right click the map to add a last stop or via 1 Right click the map where you want to add the last stop or via 2 Point to Create Route and then click Add as Last Stop or Add as Last Via e Use the toolbar to add a stop or via If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via 269 XMap User Guide OR Click the Calculate button Go on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box
529. vice manual 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device 13 Click Finish Sending Tracks Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send tracks to your device To Send Tracks Use the following steps to send tracks to your device 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your device manual 3 Click the Sync button on the toolbar 4 Click Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 5 Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device 6 Select Send to Device 7 Select User Map Data Track from the Object drop down list 8 Click Next 9 Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File drop down list 10 Optional Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 13 Click Finish Sending Waypoints Third party GPS If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device 1 C
530. view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map For more information about drawing area objects see Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map e What s the best way to measure a short distance on the map The best way to measure a short distance that is not made up of a road trail on the map is to use the Measure tool Gad on the toolbar The measure tool allows you to measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box For instructions on how to use the measure tool see Measuring Distance and Area e Why won t 3 D billboards display If you receive a message saying that 3 D billboards cannot be displayed ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest drivers and that it supports DirectX and transparencies For more information see the DeLorme Forums Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats These are the supported search formats Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth Maine 12 Getting Started Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop down text boxes along with a history of your most current search criteria Coordinate Format Latitude Longitude N 43 48 30 W70 9 52 N 43 48 4910 W 070 09 8440 N434829 4600 W0700950 6400 N43 48 30 W 0 9 52 N 43 48 29 46 W 70 9 50 64 4348 7009 4348N 7009W N4348 W7009 4348n 7009w n4348 w 009 43 8081833
531. voice navigation or to change the default speed road type or routing preference see Setting Your Routing Preferences Important If you have only the left map window open the route start finish via and stop icons in the Route tab and on toolbar are grayed out To activate the options use the map resize tool to expose the right map window To Create a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to create a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click New Edit if it is not already selected 2 Click File click New and then type the name for your route in the Name text box 3 Click the Start tool and then click the point on the map where you want to begin your route OR To use an address book entry as your start location select Start From Address Book from the Start drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR To use your current GPS position as your start location select Start From GPS Location from the Start drop down list OR Type your start location in the Start drop down text box You can type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 4 Optional Add or insert stops or vias 5 Click the Finish tool
532. w and click Copy Track to GPS Log OR To change a symbol to a waypoint right click the symbol on the map point to Manage Draw and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab For more information see Copying a Draw File Renaming a Draw File Once you create a draw file you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map To Rename a Draw File Use the following steps to rename a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Right click the draw file and click Rename The file name area activates OR Click within the file name cell once Then click it again do not double click The file name area activates 4 Type the new file name in the cell and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object Once you have placed a routable road trail line arc or spline on the map you can use the right click feature to create a direct route using the points in that line object Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 To Create a Route from a Routable Road Trail Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to create a direct route from a
533. w Tools e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset Routable trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset For information visit www delorme com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800 561 5105 Snapping Draw Objects You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool Al and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the active object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object It displays as a red or green circle 4 Drag the point to e Any other shape point within a line spline polygon arc or rectangle e The center point of a circle e The anchor of a symbol e The base point of a text label e The text box anchor point of a MapNote When you drag your shape point over a point on the draw object a yellow diamond TO a 154 rl E a defines the snap point Hi 4 Release the point you dragged when the snap point displays The active draw object is then snapped to the other object s point coordinate Tip To undo a draw object snap click Undo to undo
534. you want to appear transparent The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected color and the Image Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent Using the Draw Tools 9 To display all colors select the Opaque option under Transparency The Image Preview reflects this change 10 Click OK when finished Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not repeated in another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque Select a new color from the color palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as transparent with the new color Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in the symbol grid Anchor Position Being aware of Cursor Position is important for choosing the anchor position of a symbol The anchor is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Any newly created symbol whether imported pasted or dragged into the XSym Symbol Editing Grid has a default position of center anchor XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol To Select the Anchor Position Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol ale 1 Once your symbol is created click the Anchor Position 2 button When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid it changes to a small cross hair plus sign 2 Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position y
535. ze options vary based on the type of layer point polygon or line you are modifying With the Symbolize Layer dialog box you can make line changes color changes symbol changes and font changes for labels Tip Click the icon next to the layer name to quickly open the Symbolize Layer dialog box Databaze keywest Adobe Acrobat PDF files of the lines and symbols are available by clicking a link below Line Styles PDF Symbol Styles PDF Symbolizing a Line Layer Use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to customize the layer s visual properties or select to show hide certain elements or classes of the layer produced by a classification If you change the visual property of a class produced from a classification the Vary By scheme is automatically set to Custom in the Classify Layer dialog box To Change the Color Outline Label Properties of a Line Layer Use the following steps to change the color outline label properties of a feature in a line layer 124 e UW Ne Working With GIS Click the GIS tab Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected Click the layer you want to symbolize To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box Click the layer icon next to the layer name OR Click the Tools button and then click Symbolize The Symbolize Layer dialog box opens OR Right click the layer and click Symbolize OR XMap GIS Editor and Enterprise only Right click a line on the map and click Symbolize Under Symb

XMap User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents